Cl  Shorter  Course 


junsotv  j  aono 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


By  JAMES  E.  MUNSON 

LATE   OFFICIAL   STENOGRAPHER,    NEW    YORK 
SUPREME   COURT 


I.    The  Art  of  Phonography 

A  Complete  Instructor  in  the  Best  Method  of 
Shorthand  for  All  Kinds  of  Verbatim  Work, 
with  the  Author's  Latest  Improvements.  New 
revised  edition.  Cr.  8vo.  .  net  $2.00 

II.    A  ShorterCourse  in  Munson  Phonography 

Adapted  for  the  Use  of  Schools  and  for  Self- 
Instruction.  Second  Edition  with  Important 
Revisions.  Cr.  8vo.  .  .  .  net  $1.25 

III.  Munson's  First  Phonographic  Reader 

Business  Correspondence  written  in  Phono- 
graphic Characters.  Prepared  for  Use  in  Con- 
nection with  "The  Art  of  Phonography"  and 
"  A  Shorter  Course  in  Munson  Phonography." 
Cr.  8vo.  .....  net  50  cts. 

IV.  Munson's  Phonographic  Dictation    Book 


Longhand  Key  to  Munson's  First  Phonographic 
Reader.     Cr.  8vo.     .         .         .  net  50  cts. 


G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS,  NEW  YORK  AND  LONDON 


A  Shorter  Course 
in 

Munson  Phonography 

Containing  a  complete  exposition  of  the  Author's  system 

of  Shorthand,  with   all  the  latest  improvements, 

adapted  for  the  use  of  schools,  and  planned  to 

afford  the  fullest  instruction  to  those  who 

have  not  the  assistance  of  a  teacher 

By 

James  E.  Munson 

Official  Stenographer,  New  York  Supreme  Court,  and  Author 
of  "  The  Art  of  Phonography " 


SECOXD,  REVISED,  EDITION 


G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS 
NEW  YORK  AND  LONDON 
'Knickerbocker  ipress 
1912 


COPYRIGHT,  1912 

BY 
JOSEPHINE  L.  MUNSON 


ttbe  finfcherbocher  press,  «ew 


^  PREFACE 

Mr.  Munson  was  so  careful  and  so  thorough  in  his 
work  that  a  revision  might  be  considered  unnecessary, 
yet  he  never  lost  sight  of  the  fact  that  daily  practice 
will  reveal  errors  or  defects  which  might  in  the  ordin- 
ary course  escape  even  the  most  watchful  eye,  and  he 
was  quick  to  note  these  and  always  ready  to  grasp  any- 
thing  which  he  thought  would  aid  or  be  useful  to  the 
2  stenographer  in  his  work. 

During  tilts  between  opposing  counsel  and  in  the 

5  examination  of  witnesses  who  are  rapid  speakers,  even 

a  an  old  experienced  reporter  is  sometimes  put  to  his 

J  utmost  speed,  and  in  making  his  outlines  forced  to 

^  avail  himself  of  any  short  cuts  or  expedients  which 

may  suggest  themselves. 

It  was  Mr.  Munson's  habit  in  reporting  or  in  dic- 

*  tating  to  amanuenses  to  note  anything  which  struck 

him  as  being  practical  or  useful,  whether  in  the  form 

y.  of  a  good,  legible  outline  or  in  the  construction  of  a 

;  phrase,  and  he  would  quickly  encircle  it  with  his  pen 

j2  so  that  he  might  afterwards  examine  it  more  carefully, 

and  if  deemed  worthy  of  preservation  write  it  down 

for  future  reference. 

He  would  then  not  only  test  its  usefulness  himself 
but  would  submit  it  to  some  of  his  fellow  reporters 
to  prove  its  worth,  and  if  found  to  be  of  value  he  would 
adopt  it  in  his  practice  and  teach  it  in  his  books. 

iii 

448455 


iv  PREFACE 

His  duties  in  court  prevented  his  utilizing  much  of 
this  material,  which,  being  the  actual  and  practical 
results  of  the  author's  many  years'  experience  in  court, 
the  lecture  room,  etc.,  is  of  great  value.  After  his 
death  there  were  found  among  his  letters,  papers,  and 
transcripts  of  cases  a  vast  number  of  these  notes  which 
can  be  used  in  the  revision  or  preparation  of  future 
work. 

While  his  aim  was  to  make  his  System  of  Phonog- 
raphy as  absolutely  perfect  as  it  could  be  made,  and 
to  hold  closely  to  the  rules  which  he  laid  down  for  the 
guidance  of  its  writers,  yet  when  he  found  that  a 
slight  deviation  from  these  rules  was  necessary  to 
prevent  confusion  arising  from  a  similarity  of  form  or 
meaning  he  did  not  hesitate  to  recognize  the  fact. 
As  he  remarked  to  an  expert  and  enthusiastic  writer: 
"The  rules  were  made  for  phonography,  not  phonog- 
raphy for  the  rules." 

As  the  Shorter  Course  was  the  last  text-book  pub- 
lished by  Mr.  Munson,  it  has  been  the  aim  of  the  writer 
to  avoid  making  any  radical  changes — neither  to  add 
nor  strike  out  anything  which  might  tend  to  disturb 
the  harmony  or  mar  the  beauty  of  the  work,  making 
only  such  alterations  as  were  contemplated  by  the 
author,  and  correcting  palpable  errors  or  omissions 
which  must  have  escaped  his  keen  scrutiny  or  occurred 
through  the  carelessness  of  the  proof-reader,  and  thus 
make  the  book  a  perfect  exponent  of  the  system  as  he 
wrote  and  taught  it. 

The  writer  was  associated  with  Mr.  Munson,  so- 
cially and  in  his  business,  for  forty  years,  and  assisted 


PREFACE  V 

him  in  the  preparation  of  the  Shorter  Course  and  all 
his  books  except  the  Complete  Phono grapher;  there- 
fore it  is  this  education  and  familiarity  with 
the  author's  ideas  concerning  the  Munson  System 
that  he  feels  has  fitted  him  for  this  work  of  revis- 
ion. 

Besides  the  correction  of  typographical  errors, 
imperfect  phonographic  characters,  words  out  of  posi- 
tion, the  mingling  of  characters  with  dotted  lines, 
particularly  in  Reading  Exercises,  pages  203  to  220, 
inclusive,  and  the  changes  necessary  to  conform  to 
later  rules,  there  have  been  some  additions  and 
corrections  in  List  of  Abbreviations  and  Outlines 
Specially  Distinguished. 

Outlines  of  words  were  given  in  some  of  the  exercises 
before  their  use  had  been  sufficiently  explained.  As 
this  was  confusing  to  the  student  and  embarrassing 
to  the  teacher,  other  words  have  been  substituted. 

Attention  is  called  to  the  following : 

To  the  new  rule  for  the  termination  "SHUS,"  page 
202. 

"HAVE"  in  Phrases,  how  written,  page  54. 

Breve-yay  for  Syllable  "  U" — omission  of  sound 
" u,"  page  39. 

A  bbreviations  out  of  Position,  how  written  in  Fourth 
Position,  page  41. 

The  stem  L.  when  standing  alone  is  always  struck 
upward.  See  Examples:  hall,  hill,  halloo,  hallway, 
page  40;  owl,  page  15. 

New  Abbreviation  for  oil,  Poid-Lee.  See  Example, 
page  31. 


VI  PREFACE 

The  writer  takes  pleasure  in  acknowledging  his 
indebtedness  to  Mr.  George  S.  Walworth  and  to  Mr. 
Harris  Pierce  for  their  kindly  interest  in  the  work  and 
for  their  suggestions  in  regard  to  it. 

JAMES  J.  WILLIAMSON 
WEST  ORANGE,  N.  J. 
January,  1912. 


PREFACE  TO  FIRST  EDITION. 

This  text-book  of  Phonography  is,  as  its  name  implies, 
a  course  in  Munson  Phonography  that  is  shorter  than 
that  presented  in  the  author's  recent  and  larger  work, 
The  Art  of  Phonography.  It  has  been  designed  especially 
as  a  phonographic  instruction  book  for  schools,  by  the 
use  of  which  teachers  will  be  able  to  advance  their 
pupils  with  great  rapidity  to  a  practical  knowledge  of 
Phonography,  without  at  the  same  time  sacrificing 
thoroughness. 

All  the  essentials  of  Phonography  are  presented,  but 
in  a  more  condensed  form  than  in  the  other  work.  The 
reading  and  writing  exercises  are  considerably  shorter, 
but  will  be  found  amply  sufficient  for  any  class  work  ; 
and  the  particular  reading  and  writing  exercises  con- 
nected with  each  Lesson  have  been  made  entirely  inde- 
pendent of  each  other,  neither  of  them  containing  any 
words  which  are  found  in  the  other,  so  that  the  learner 
will  have  nothing  to  aid  him  in  his  reading  or  writing 
but  the  rules  and  principles  of  Phonography  as  presented 
in  the  text  and  the  illustrative  examples.  As  soon  as 
the  learner  has  been  put  in  possession  of  sufficient  pho- 
nographic knowledge  to  make  it  practicable  to  do  so,  he 
is  set  at  work  reading  and  writing  short  sentences.  At 
first  the  sentences  are  necessarily  very  simple,  very  much 
like  the  matter  of  a  child's  primer  ;  but  as  advance  is 
made  they  become  more  and  more  complex  and  com- 
prehensive until  the  final  ones  take  in  and  represent  the 


viii  PREFACE. 

whole  of  Phonography.  Some  of  the  sentences  may 
seem  a  little  humorous,  but  it  has  been  thought  that  a 
little  pleasantry  will  relieve  the  study  somewhat  of 
monotony  and  the  effects  of  much  close  application. 

For  those,  however,  who  wish  to  make  a  thorough 
scientific  study  of  the  system,  as  well  as  for  teachers  of 
the  art,  and  for  learners  who  are  pursuing  the  study  by 
themselves,  the  larger  work  will  be  indispensable.  Speed 
in  writing  Phonography  comes  very  largely  from  being 
familiar  with  a  large  number  of  different  word-outlines, 
— having  an  extensive  phonographic  vocabulary,  as  it 
were  ;  and  The  Art  of  Phonography  far  excels  all  other 
text-books  of  Phonography  in  the  number  of  word- 
outlines  given  in  shorthand  characters. 

The  attention  of  teachers  of  Phonography,  and  other 
Phonographers  who  may  be  interested,  is  respectfully 
asked  to  the  following  statement  : 

I  claim  for  my  system  of  Phonography  superiority 
over  others  mainly  for  the  following  reasons  : 

I.  Its  alphabet,  including  both  consonant  and  vowel 
representation,  is  absolutely  simple  and  for  that  reason 
is  the  best  for  the  teacher,  and  has  proved  itself  to  be  the 
best  in  practice. 

II.  In  the  application  to  the  consonant-stems  of  the 
various  abbreviating  principles  of  Phonography,  such  as 
hooks,  modifications  by  halving  and  lengthening,  circles 
and  loops,  etc.,  there  is  the  most  complete  freedom  from 
exceptions    to    general    rules  —  again    aiding    both    the 
teacher  and  the  practitioner. 

III.  The  adaptation  of  the   system   to    the    require- 
ments of  the  practical  reporter  is  much  more  thorough 
and  complete  than  is  to  be  found  in  any  other  system. 
This  last  point  is  of  very  great  importance,  although  it  is 


PREFACE.  jx 

apt  to  be  overlooked  by  teachers  and  casual  investigators 
of  shorthand  systems. 

My  consonant-signs  are  all  simple  stems,  the  origin  of 
which  is  shown  at  page  i,  paragraph  5  ;  whereas  in  the 
alphabets  of  other  systems  of  Phonography  may  be 
found  instances  of  either  compound  stems  being  used 
for  simple  consonant-sounds  or  simple  stems  used  for 
double  consonant-sounds,  or  both.  This  absolute  sim- 
plicity of  the  consonant-signs  of  my  alphabet  enables 
me  to  provide  very  concise  and  simple  rules  for  the 
carrying  out  of  the  main  principles  of  Phonography,  to 
the  advantage  of  both  teacher  and  pupil,  as  will  now  be 
illustrated  by  comparison  of  some  of  the  important  rules 
given  in  this  book  with  the  corresponding  rules  to  be 
found  in  the  leading  instruction  book  of  the  old  or 
"  Ninth  Edition  "  Phonography.  At  pages  70  and  72 
are  the  rules  for  the 

EL  AND  ER   HOOKS. 

(MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY). 

"  Either  /  or  r  may  be  added  after  any  straight  stem  by  a  small 
initial-hook.  For  /  it  is  turned  on  the  right  side  of  downstrokes, 
and  on  the  upper  side  of  rightstrokes.  For  r  it  is  turned  on  the  side 
opposite  the  El-hook. 

"  Either  /or  r  may  be  added  after  any  curved  stem  by  an  initial- 
hook,  the  hook  being  made  large  for  /  and  small  for  r." 

The  "  Ninth  Edition  "  rules  covering  the  same  subject 
are  as  follows  : 

EL  AND   ER   HOOKS. 

("NINTH  EDITION"  PHONOGRAPHY.) 

"A  small  hook  on  the  circle-side,  and  at  the  beginning  of  any 
consonant-stroke  (except  /,  r,  »t,  «,  ng,  s,  z,  w,  h),  indicates  that  an/ 
follows  it. 


X  PREFACE. 

"  Shel  and  Zhel  never  stand  alone,  have  their  hooks  at  the  bottom, 
and  are  always  written  upward. 

"  The  reporter  uses  a  large  initial  hook  on  Em,  En,  Ray  [our  Ree] 
for/. 

"Signs  to  indicate  the  combination  of  r  with  a  preceding  conso- 
nant (except  s,  z,  /,  r,  m,  n,  rig,  w,  y,  A),  are  obtained  by  turning 
over  sidewise  the  corresponding  El-hook  signs,  except  Shel,  Zhel, 
which  are  turned  over  endwise. 

"  Sher  and  Zher  have  their  hook  at  the  top,  and  are  always  written 
downward. 

"  R  may  be  added  to  Em  and  En  by  a  small  initial  hook,  provided 
they  are  widened  [that  is,  changed  to  our  Hay  and  Ing  respectively]." 

At  pages  86  and  89  are  the  rules  for  the 

HALVING  AND   LENGTHENING   PRINCIPLES. 

(MUXSON  PHONOGRAPHY.) 

"  Either  /  or  d  may  be  added  to  any  stem,  straight  or  curved, 
simple  or  hooked,  by  making  it  half  its  ordinary  length. 

' '  The  syllables  ter,  der,  ther,  and  ture  may  each  be  added  to  any 
curved  stem,  whether  simple  or  hooked,  and  to  any  straight  stem  with 
final-hook,  by  making  the  stem  twice  its  ordinary  length." 

The  "  Ninth  Edition  "  rules  on  the  same  subject  are  as 
follows  : 

HALVING  AND  LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLES. 
("NINTH  EDITION"  PHONOGRAPHY.) 

"  Either  t  or  d  may  be  added  to  certain  signs,  by  halving  them  : 

"  I.  To  any  unhooked  consonant-stroke,  except  El,  Lay  [our  Lee], 
Em,  En,  Ar  [our  Er],  Ing,  Way,  Yay,  Emp  or  Emb  [our  Hay]. 

"  2.  To  any  hooked  consonant-stroke. 

"Way,  Yay,  Emp,  and  Ing  are  never  halved  for  any  purpose  ;  but 
El,  Lay,  Em,  En,  and  Ar  are  sometimes  halved. 

"  Hooked  Way,  Yay,  Emp,  unlike  simple  Way,  Yay,  Emp,  may 
be  halved. 


PREFACE.  XI 

"  By  halving  the  curve-signs  for  /,  m,  «,  or  r,  — t  or  d  is  added, 
according  as  the  shortened  letter  is  made  light  or  heavy. 
"  Doubling  the  length  — 

1.  Of  Ing  adds  kr  or  gr. 

2.  Of  any  other  curve,  adds  tr,  dr,  or  thr. 

"  The  reporter  may  derive  great  advantage  from  doubling  a  full- 
length  straight  line,  without  a  final  attachment,  to  add  thr  for  there, 
their,  or  they  are ;  the  heavy  lines  being  tapered  toward  their  ter- 
mination." 

Attention  is  also  called  to  the  rule  for  the  circle  for 
s  or  z  on  page  98.  It  will  be  seen  that  it  is  all-compre- 
hensive and  covers  everything,  including  the  outlines  of 
such  words  as  chose,  debts,  salt,  enters,  fruits,  puffs,  fines, 
faints,  founders,  cycle,  sinner,  etc. ;  and  shows  the  great 
advantage  of  not  teaching  the  circles  and  loops  until 
after  the  learner  has  mastered  all  the  hooks  and  the 
halving  and  lengthening  principles. 

The  invention  and  adoption  by  me  of  the  new  sign 
for  ishun,  namely,  a  large  final-hook  joined  to  stems 
with  a  circle  intervening  (page  123),  enables  me  to 
use  the  old  ishun-curl  for  n  always,  and  for  ing  after 
loops  (page  122).  The  use  of  the  curl  for  n  is  ex- 
ceedingly valuable  in  writing  proper  names  ending  in 
"  son"  etc. 

My  vowel-scale,  in  which  all  the  broad,  open  vowels 
(ah,  3.,  aw,  6,  i,  01,  ow)  are  put  in  one  position  by  them- 
selves and  all  the  close  vowels  (e,  \,  66, 6~o,  u)  in  another 
position  by  themselves,  makes  the  writing  of  word-out- 
lines in  the  positions  of  the  accented  vowels  perfectly 
simple  and  easy  of  acquisition  and  application  ;  while 
the  vowel-scale  of  the  "  Ninth  Edition,"  in  which  the 
vowels,  open  and  close,  are  all  mixed  up,  renders  the 
practice  of  writing  words  in  position  quite  difficult.  For 
a  very  full  treatment  of  this  subject  the  reader  is  referred 


xii  PREFACE. 

to  the  preface  to  the  Revised  Edition  of  The  Art  of 
Phonography,  pages  iv.  to  vii. 

With  regard  to  the  adaptation  of  the  system  to  the 
requirements  of  the  practical  reporter,  I  will  state  that 
many  years  ago,  I  made  an  important  discovery  respect- 
ing the  length  of  word-outlines  ;  namely,  first,  that  in 
writing  Phonography  we  analyze  our  word-outlines  into 
their  stem-signs,  not  counting  hooks,  circles,  etc.,  they 
being  considered  merely  as  connectors  of  stems  ;  and, 
second,  that  the  mind  grasps  and  the  fingers  execute 
outlines  of  one,  two,  and  three  stems  much  more  easily 
than  outlines  of  four  or  more  stems.  Acting  on  this 
conclusion,  I  have,  in  preparing  all  my  text-books,  as 
far  as  I  possibly  could,  kept  my  word-outlines  within 
the  three-stem  limit. 

To  illustrate  with  a  few  examples  I  will  take  the  out- 
lines of  the  following  words,  selected  at  random  from 
Isaac  Pitman's  Dictionary  :  affirmative,  decorum,  incan- 
descent, melancholy  are  there  written  respectively  Ef- 
Er-Em-Tev  (4  stems),  Dee-Kay-Ree-Em  (4  stems), 
En-Kay-En-Dess-Ent  (5  stems),  Em-Len-Kay-Lee  (4 
stems)  ;  while  my  outlines  for  the  same  words  re- 
spectively are  Fer-Met-Vee  (3  stems),  Dee-Ker-Em  (3 
stems),  En-Kend-Esent  (3  stems),  Mel-En-Kel  (3  stems). 

I  will  now  touch  briefly  upon  another  important  re- 
spect in  which  my  Phonography  has  been,  I  think,  more 
completely  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  reporter  than 
any  other  system.  Every  system  of  shorthand  has  a 
considerable  number  of  conflicting  outlines  which,  unless 
special  provision  is  made  to  avoid  or  neutralize  them, 
become  veritable  pitfalls  to  the  reporter.  Some  of  them 
are  common  to  all  systems  ;  and  in  addition  to  those  each 
system  has  a  good  many  others  that  are  peculiar  to 


PREFACE.  xiii 

itself.  In  the  List  of  Words  and  Phrases  Specially  Dis- 
tinguished, commencing  at  page  182,  are  given  most  of 
the  instances  of  that  kind  that  are  to  be  found  in  Munson 
Phonography.  This  list  is  the  most  complete  of  the 
kind  that  has  ever  been  published  in  connection  with 
any  system  ;  it  being  one  of  the  important  fruits  of  the 
author's  long  experience  as  a  stenographic  reporter. 
The  result  is  that  the  Munson  system  is  more  com- 
pletely "  charted "  against  the  dangers  of  unvocalized 
Phonography  than  any  other. 

A  word  in  closing  in  regard  to  certain  new-fangled 
systems  of  shorthand  that  are  now  being  urged  with 
great  persistency  upon  educators,  which  are  entirely  out- 
side of  what  is  commonly  known  as  "  Phonography." 
The  author  of  one  of  them  seeks  to  convince  by  shout- 
ing, "  No  shaded  lines,  no  ruled  paper,  no  word-signs,  to 
burden  the  memory"  Another  uses  the  more  emphatic 
war-cry,  "  One  slope!  One  position //  One  thickness !!! 
Connective  vowels!!!!"  Now  each  of  these  claims, 
which  to  the  uninitiated  seems  so  fascinating,  is  really  a 
very  serious  defect.  Writing  (without  vowels)  the  con- 
sonants with  light  and  shaded  lines,  struck  in  all  direc- 
tions, and  in  different  positions  with  reference  to  the  ruling 
of  paper,  is  the  very  thing  that  enables  us  to  have  a  short- 
hand in  which  very  few  word-outlines  exceed  three  stems 
in  length.  If  these  long-established  requisites  of  steno- 
graphy are  discarded  verbatim  speed  is  an  impossibility. 

When  a  student  takes  up  the  study  of  shorthand  he  is 
entitled  to  have  the  best.  Either  of  the  well-known 
American  systems  of  Phonography  is  better  than  any  of 
the  new  systems  of  shorthand  that  I  have  seen. 

J.  E.  M. 

NEW  YORK,  November,  1900. 


HISTORICAL  SKETCH  OF  SHORTHAND. 

England  is  the  birthplace  of  true  shorthand,  and  the  art  has  had 
its  entire  growth  and  development  to  its  present  high  state  of  perfec- 
tion among  English-speaking  peoples,  without  any  assistance  from 
the  outside.  Neither  Germany  nor  France  has  contributed  anything 
of  importance  toward  stenographic  improvement,  although  each  of 
these  countries  has  produced  shorthand  systems  of  some  merit.  By 
true  shorthand  is  meant  shorthand  that  is  written  with  an  alphabet 
composed  of  geometrical  lines  variously  distinguished.  The  earliest 
example  of  such  an  alphabet  is  that  of  John  Willis,  published  in 
1602.  Previous  to  that  there  were  the  systems  of  Timothy  Bright 
(1588)  and  Peter  Bales  (1590),  but  as  these  were  based  on  the  idea  of 
using  arbitrary  signs  for  whole  words,  each  of  which  had  to  be  mem- 
orized by  itself,  the  systems  were  impracticable  and  are  not  entitled 
to  be  called  shorthand.  And  yet,  strange  to  say,  Webster's  definition 
of  "  stenography  "  is  only  applicable  to  the  useless  creations  of  Bright 
and  Bales  !  The  alphabet  of  John  Willis  was  very  crude  and  imper- 
fect, but  it  was  the  first  step  in  the  right  direction.  During  the  rest 
of  the  seventeenth  century  very  little  progress  was  made  until  near  the 
end.  Ten  different  systems  were  published,  none  of  which  is  worthy 
of  special  mention  except  Shelton's  (1641),  and  this  only  as  being  the 
shorthand  in  which  the  celebrated  Pepys  Diary  was  written. 

The  most  distinguished  shorthand  writer  of  the  seventeenth  century 
was  William  Mason.  His  works  were  issued  in  1672,  1682,  and 
1707.  Mason's  alphabet  was  adopted  by  Thomas  Gurney  in  1753  ; 
and  the  Mason-Gurney  system  is  still  much  used  in  England,  and  two 
of  the  best  shorthand  writers  in  the  courts  of  the  city  of  New  York 
to-day  write  that  system.  From  Mason  down  to  the  invention  of 
Phonography  (1837-40)  there  were  published  some  seventy-five  dif- 
ferent systems,  among  which  are  those  of  Macaulay  (1747),  which  is 
the  basis  of  the  Scovil  system,  Angell  (1758),  the  author  of  which,  as 
related  by  Boswell,  called  on  Dr.  Johnson  one  day,  and,  claiming 
that  he  could  write  as  fast  as  a  person  could  read,  the  doctor  reached 


xvi        HISTORICAL   SKETCH    OF   SHORTHAND. 

for  a  book,  began  reading,  and  soon  knocked  the  boasting  stenog- 
rapher out !  Then  follow  the  meritorious  systems  of  Byrom  (1767), 
Taylor  (1786),  whose  system  has  been  pirated  more  than  any  other 
except  possibly  the  present  author's,  Mavor  (1789),  Lewis  (1815),  and 
Moat  (1834).  The  system  of  William  Tiffin  (i  750)  is  worthy  of  remark 
as  being  the  first  phonetic  system.  The  order  of  his  vowels  was  sub- 
stantially the  same  as  ours,  namely,  ah  a,  a  £,  e  K,  aw  o,  6  ti,  do  66, 
e  (in  earth).  Most  of  the  writers  of  the  early  shorthand  text-books 
claimed  that  their  systems  were  ' '  adapted  to  the  meanest  capacities." 

Isaac  Pitman's  first  shorthand  publication,  Stenographic  S^nind- 
Hand,  was  published  in  1837.  Phonography,  the  alphabet  aad  some 
of  the  abbreviating  principles  of  which  were  the  invention  of  Isaac 
Pitman,  was  first  published  in  1840.  Mr.  Pitman  was  not  a  practi- 
cal shorthand  reporter,  and  the  system  through  the  first  six  "editions '' 
was  exceedingly  crude  and  contained  many  absurdities.  But,  aided 
by  the  suggestions  of  many  practical  writers,  both  in  England  and 
the  United  States,  by  the  year  1852  Mr.  Pitman  was  able  to  publish 
the  "  Ninth  Edition,"  which  was  by  far  the  best  system  of  shorthand 
then  known.  But  after  that  time  Mr.  Pitman  retrograded  in  his 
productions,  and  the  work  of  improving  the  system  was  taken  up  in 
the  United  States.  Ben  Pitman  continued  to  publish  the  "Ninth 
Edition"  at  Cincinnati ;  Andrew  J.  Graham  issued  his  Handbook, 
based  on  the  "  Ninth  Edition,"  in  1859  ;  in  1866  the  present  author 
published  the  Complete  Phonographer,  which  was  a  work  of  phono- 
graphic  simplification,  and  a  revision  of  it  in  1877,  and  in  1898  the 
Art  of  Phonography  was  brought  out. 

The  shorthand  of  the  time  of  Cicero,  by  means  of  which,  accord- 
ing to  Plutarch,  one  of  the  orations  of  Cato  the  Younger  was  pre- 
served, was  a  scheme  of  abbreviated  longhand  combined  with  a  great 
number  of  arbitrary  characters  for  words.  It  was  not  at  all  Kke 
English  shorthand. 


CONTENTS 


HISTORICAL  SKETCH  OF  SHORTHAND  .          .... 
ALPHABET  OF  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY  .....       xvi 

LESSON 

I.  Number  of  Sounds  in  English  Language  —  The  Con- 
sonant-Signs —  The  Vowel  -  Signs  —  The  Vowel- 
Places —  Long-  and  Short -Vowels — Rules  for 
Reading  Phonography  —  Directions  about  Writing 
— Rules  for  Writing  Phonography  .  .  .  1-8 
II.  Chay  and  Ree  Distinguished  —  The  Long -Vowels  — 

Word  -  Position  —  The  Diphthongs        .         .         .     8—15 

III.  The  Short- Vowels — Words  of  More  than  One  Stem  — 

Which  Stem  to  Write  the  Vowel  to  —  Position  of 
Words  of  Two  or  More  Stems  and  One  Vowel       .   15-23 

IV.  Position  of  Words  of  More  than  One  Vowel  —  Rule 

for  Word-Position — About  Certain   Stem-Joinings 
—  Chay     and     Ree     Distinguished  —  Concurrent 
Vowels  ........  23—29 

V.    Downward  and  Upward  Stems  —  Er,  Ree,  Ish,  Shee, 

El,  and  Lee          .......   29-36 

VI.    Breve-Signs  for  Hay,  Way,  and  Yay  —  Capitals  and 

Punctuation  . 37~4* 

VII.    Abbreviations  —  Lists  of  Single   and   Two-Stem   Ab- 
breviations—  Dot-ing  for  Abbreviations        .         .  41-50 
xvii 


xviii  CONTENTS 

LESSON  PAGE 

VIII.    The  Breve-Signs  —  Phraseography         .         .        .       50-58 

IX.    Hooked-Stems—Final  Hooks  — The  En-Hook  — 
The  Eff  or  Vee   Hook— Hooks  in    Phrase- 
Writing  ........       58-65 

X.    The    Shun-Hook—  The  Ter  or  Ther  Hook         .       66-69 

XI.    Initial-Hooks  —  El  and  Er  Hooks  on  Straight  and 

Curved  Stems  —  Stenotypy      .  69-74 

XII.    Special     Vocalization  —  Way -Hook    on    Straight 

Stems — Plural  Vowel-Signs  ....       74-85 

XIII.    Modified  Stems— Halving   Principle    .         .         .       85-89 

XIV.    Lengthening  Principle  —  Short  Rules  for  Positions 

— Modifications  in  Abbreviations  and  Phrases.       89-97 

XV.  Circles  and  Loops  —  Small  Circle  on  Simple  Stems 
—  The  Circle  between  Stems  —  The  Large 
Circle  ...'....  97-106 

XVI.    Of   the   Loops  — The    Small    Loop  — The    Large 

Loop  —  Independent  Loops    ....   107-114 

XVII.    Implied  En  and  Er  Hooks  on  Straight  Stems  — 

Circles  and  Loops  Joined  Together       .         .   114-121 

XVIII.  Curls  for  the  Nasals  En  and  Ing— The  Ishun- 
Hook  —  Curl  for  "in,"  "en,"  or  "  un  "  in 
Initial-Hooks 122-126 

XIX.    Prefixes  and  Suffixes 126-135 


XX.  Words  Commencing  with  "in,"  "en,"  "  un," 
"il,"  "im,"  "ir" — Rules  for  the  Forma- 
tion of  Past-Tense  Outlines,  etc. —  Forms  of 
Plural  and  Possessive  Nouns,  etc.  .  .  136-141 

UNVOCALIZED  PHONOGRAPHY    ......         142 


CONTENTS  Xix 

PAGR 

MISCELLANEOUS  ABBREVIATIONS — List  of  Abbreviations 
and  Initials  —  Outlines  of  Derivatives  of  the 
Abbreviations  —  Remarks  about  Abbrevia- 
tions, etc 142-157 

REMARKS  ABOUT  WORD  OUTLINES 158-161 

FESTIVAL  OF  THE  ABBREVIATIONS 161-164 

LIST  OF  PHRASES  —  REMARKS  ABOUT  PHRASES  .        .        .  165-181 

WORDS  AND  PHRASES  SPECIALLY  DISTINGUISHED  —  RE- 
MARKS  ABOUT  OUTLINES  SPECIALLY  DIS- 
TINGUISHED    I82-2O2 

READING  EXERCISES 203-220 

KEY  TO  READING  EXERCISES 221-228 

INDEX 229-236 


ALPHABET   OF   MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

CONSONANTS. 

VOWELS. 

Sign.           Power. 

Xitme.  Type. 

SIMPLE  VOWELS. 

\  p    in  pay 
\   b    "  bay 

Pee 
Bee 

P 
B 

Sign. 

Power. 

Name.    Type. 

a  in  alms 

ah 

a 

|     t     "  tie 

Tee 

T 

• 

a  "  ale 

a            a 

Abrupts. 

|     d    "  die 

/    ch  "  choke 

Dee 

Chay 

D 
CH 

I' 

- 

e   "  eve 
a  "  all 

e 
awe 

e 
a 

/    j     "  joke 

Jay 

J 

- 

o  "  ore 

o 

6 

—  c    "  came 

Kay 

K 

_ 

oo  "  ooze 

00 

o 

,—  g    "  game 

Gay 

G 

a  "  am 

at 

a 

V_  f     "  fan 

Ef 

F 

e  "  ell 

et 

e 

V^_   v    "  van 

Vee 

V       £ 

i    "  if 

it 

a 

Continuants. 

(     th  "  thigh 
(     th  "  thy 
)    8     "  seal 
)    z    "  zeal 
_J  sh  "  shore 
—  J  z     "  azure 

Ith 
Thee 
Ess 
Zee 
Ish 
Zhee 

TH 
DH 

S 
Z 
SH 
ZH 

i 

- 

o  "  on 

u   "  but 
oo  "  foot 

ot 
ut 
oot 

0 

u 
9 

DIPHTHONGS. 

Sign. 

Pou-er.        Xante.     Ty])f. 

'  V 

i   in  pine        i 

i 

4  (V-N  m  "  may 

Em 

M 

| 

* 

oi  "  toil 

oi        oi 

;J| 

1 
•1 

i^-s  n    "  no 
N-^tng"  sing 
C  1     "  lay 
~^   r    "  oar 
/  r    "  roe 
~"^  w   "  woe 

En 
Ing 
Lee 
Er 
Bee 
Way 

N 
NG 

LJ 

B 
R 
W 

* 

u 

ow<l  now        ow 
ew  "  few        ew 

ow 

EW 

CONSONANT-BREVES. 

Sign. 

Pou-er.              Type. 

i 

1 

0 
C    3 

s  in  suppose             s 
w  "  wade,  walk        w 

58lr,y  "  you 

iiay 

Y       1 

3 

„„ 

y   "  yam,  youth        y 

ftf^h    "  high 

Hay     H       *  1  1  -  h    "  hook,  hedge       h 

Copyright,  l«!Ki,  by  .(Mini's  K.  Miinson. 

PHONOGRAPHY. 


LESSON  I. 

1.  Phonography     Defined.  —  Phonography    is    a 
method  of  shorthand  writing  in  which  each  sound  of  the 
language  is  written  with  a  sign  of  its  own. 

2.  Number  of  Sounds. — There   are   forty   distinct 
sounds  in  the  English  language,  twenty-four  of  which 
are  consonants  and  sixteen  are  vowels. 

3.  Explanatory. — Each   of  the   following  words  has  but  two 
sounds,  the  first  being  a  consonant-sound  and  the  last  a  vowel-sound  : 
pa,  bay,  tea,  daw,  Joe,  coo,  fie,  boy,  thou,  new.     The  fact  that  most 
of  these  words  are  written  with  three  letters,  and  one  with  four,  does 
not  indicate  that  there  are  more  than  two  sounds  in  any  of  them. 

4.  The   Consonant-Signs. — The   consonants   are 
written  with  simple  straight  and  curved  signs,  struck  in 
various  directions,  some  of  which  are  made  light  and 
others   heavy.      These   signs    are    called    "consonant- 
stems,"  or,  briefly,  "  stems." 

5.  Origin  of  the  Stems. — The  source  from  which  the  phono- 
graphic signs  for  the  twenty-four  consonant-sounds  are  derived  is  the 
circle,  with  diametrical  lines  drawn  as  shown  in  the  following  cuts : 


The  first  cut  gives  us  two  straight  stems,  a  perpendicular  and  a  hori- 
zontal, and  four  slanting  curves  ;  and  the  second  gives  us  two  slant- 
ing straight  stems  and  four  curves,  two  of  which  are  perpendicular 


2  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

and  two  horizontal — the  two  diagrams  thus  furnishing  twelve  distinct 
signs.  Then,  by  making  each  of  the  stems  shaded  as  well  as  light, 
we  get  twelve  additional  signs — making  twenty-four  simple  con- 
sonant-signs in  all. 

6.  Every  consonant-stem,  whether  straight  or  curved,  is  written 
in  the  direction  of  some  one  of  the  lines  of  the  following  diagram  : 

2 
1  3 


-4 

7.  Direction  of  Stems.  —  The  horizontal  stems  are 
written  from  left  to  right.     They  are  the  following  signs  : 

Kay  Gay  Em  En  Ing  Hay 

8.  The  stems  Lee  and  Ree  are  written  from  left  to 
right  and  upward  ;  thus,  — 


9.  All  the  other  stems  are  written  from  the  top  down- 
ward.    They  are  the  following  signs,  — 

\     \     I     I     /     /     ^    ^    ( 

Pee         Bee      Tee      Dee    Chay      Jay         Ef          Vee        Ith 

(     )    )   j  j   ^    >i    r 

Thee        Ess       Zee        Ish      Zhee       Er        Way         Yay 

10.  The  Vowel-Signs.  —  The  simple-vowels,  twelve 
in  number,  are  written  with  dots  and  short  dashes,  also 
made  both   light  and  heavy,  which  are  written  at  the 
sides  of  the  consonant-stems  in  different  places  length- 
wise of  the  stems.     The  diphthongs,  four  in  number,  are 
written  with  little  angles,  likewise  placed  at  the  sides  of 
the  consonant-stems.     A  vowel-sign  may  be  written  on 
either  side  of  a  stem. 


INTRODUCTORY.  3 

11.  The  Vowel-Places. — There  are  three  places  at 
the  sides  of  consonant-stems  in  which  vowel-signs  are 
written,  namely,  at  the  beginning,  at  the  middle,  and  at 
the  finish.     Thus,  when  placed  to  a  Tee,  we  have 

1      -I      .1      1      -I      -I     "I 

ah  a  e  aw  o  oo  I,  etc. 

12.  Names   of  the   Vowel-Places. — The   vowel- 
places  are  called  respectively,  "  First-place,"  "  Second- 
place,"    and    "  Third-place."      The    numbers    of    the 
vowel-places — one,    two,    three — are    counted   from  the 
beginning  of  a  stem  as  it  is  written,  no  matter  in  what 
direction  it   may  be  struck.     Thus,  with  a  downstroke 
they  run  from  the  upper  end  downward;  with  a  horizon- 
tal, from  left  to  right,  and  with  an  upstroke,  from  the 
lower  end  upward.     The  three  vowel-places  are  shown 
below  by  dots  and  dashes  placed  to  broken  lines  which 
represent  a  downstroke  and  an  upstroke  stem  : 


First-place  * 
Second  " 
Third     " 


,/""  (ah)  First-place 

*:'"  (a)  Second  "  • 

/•"  (e)  Third     " 


.;''"  (aw) 


13.  Diagrams  of  Vowel-Places. — The  three  vowel-places,  both 
before  and  after  stems,  may  be  learned  from  the  following  diagrams, 
in  which  the  figures,  i,  2,  3,  are  placed  to  the  stems  Tee  (downward), 
Kay  (horizontal),  Ree  (upward),  Chay  (downward),  Ef  (downward), 
Em  (horizontal),  Lee  (upward),  and  Ish  (downward). 

Before  consonant-stems — 


After  consonant-stems — 
la     7      2      3 


4  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

14.  Long  and  Short  Vowels. — Six  of  the  simple- 
vowels  are  long,  and  six  are  short.  The  Heavy  vowel* 
signs  represent  Long  vowel-sounds,  and  the  Light 
vowel-signs  represent  Short  vowel-sounds.  The  long- 
vowels  are  heard  in  the  words  bah,  bay,  be  ;  bought,  boat, 
boot  j  and  the  short- vowels  are  heard  in  the  words  bat, 
bet,  bit  j  bock,  buck,  book. 

15.  Writing  by  Sound. — All  words  are  written  entirely  by  sound, 
— that  is,  just  as  they  are  pronounced.     By  this  is  meant  that  each 
sound,  whether  consonant  or  vowel,  is  written  with  its  own  phono- 
graphic sign.     No  attention  whatever  is  paid  to  the  ordinary  spelling 
of  words  ;  and  only  as  many  signs  are  used  to  write  a  word  as  it  has 
sounds.     Thus,  each  of  the  words  pay,  ought,  though,  know,  bough, 
isle,  has  but  two  sounds,   therefore  each  is  written  in  phonography 
with  but  two  signs.     Silent  letters  are  never  written,  the  k  in  know 
and  the  h  in  hour  and  heir  being  omitted.     Know  is  written  like  no 
and  heir  like  air. 

16.  For  the  purposes  of  this  lesson  it  will  be  necessary  to  learn  the 
first  sixteen  consonant-signs  of  the  Phonographic  Alphabet,  at  page 
xii. ,  that  is  from  Pee  to  Zhee  inclusive,  being  the  following  characters— 

VII  /  _ 

Pee          Bee        Tee        Dee     Chay         Jay          Kay  Gay 

^      ^     (      (      )        )       J        J 

Ef  Vee         Ith       Thee      Ess          Zee  Ish  Zhee 

and  the  two  second-place  long-vowels,  namely — 

••a  •:  6 

17.  How  to  Learn  the  Consonants. — A  good  way  to  learn  the 
consonant-signs  is  to  take  a  rule  (or  card)  in  the  right  hand  and  with 
it  cover  the  three  columns  entitled  "Power,"  "Name,"  "Type," 
under  the  heading  "  CONSONANTS"  in  the  Alphabet  (page  xvi.), 
leaving  exposed  the  column  of  "  Signs  "  at  the  left.     Then,  while  look- 
ing at  each  of  those  signs  successively,  pronounce  its  name  as  printed  in 
the  third  column, — Pee,  Bee,  Tee,  etc. ,  to  Zhee.  If  at  any  time  you  are 


RULES   FOR   READING.  5 

not  sure  about  the  name  of  a  sign,  the  rule  may  be  lowered  so  as  to 
show  that  name,  but  none  of  those  below  it.  Pursue  this  course 
until  you  can,  without  hesitation,  give  the  names  of  the  first  sixteen 
signs.  Then  take  the  rule  in  the  left  hand  and  cover  only  the  col- 
umn of  signs,  and  while  looking  at  the  name  and  studying  the  power 
of  each  sign,  make  the  sign  with  a  pencil.  Continue  doing  this  until 
without  seeing  it  you  can  instantly  make  each  sign  upon  looking  at 
its  name  or  knowing  its  power. 

1 8.  Second-Place    Long -Vowels. — The    vowel- 
sound  heard  in  each  of  the  words  ape,  ate,  day,  lace,  aid, 
gate,  pain,  they,  eight,  neigh  is  written  with  a  heavy  dot 
placed  near  the  middle  of  the  stem.     The  vowel-sound 
heard  in  each  of  the  words  ore,  joke,  loaf,  more,  door, 
beau,  dough  is  written  with  a  short,  heavy  dash  placed 
near  the  middle  of  the  stem.     These  two  sounds  are 
called  long-vowels. 

RULES  FOR  READING  PHONOGRAPHY. 

19.  If  a  vowel-sign  is  written  at  the  right  of  an  upright 
or  slanting  consonant-stem,  or  below  a  horizontal  stem, 
the  consonant  is  readers/  and  the  vowel  next. 

20.  If  a  vowel-sign  is  written  at  the  left  of  an  upright 
or  slanting  consonant-stem,  or  above  a  horizontal  stem, 
the  vowel  is  read  first  and  the  consonant  next. 

READING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK  I.     The  reading  of  the  first  part  of  this  exercise  consists 
in  calling  each  of  the  consonant-stems  by  name. 

V\   I    I// ^  ^  (    ( 

)  )  J  J  \  \  /  \  /       I M 


6  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

^  )   (^  )    )  (  J    (  /  \  _\ 
_|    I    /   ^   (   V (     )    I    ) 

J  /  J _  \  — I / _ \ / 

^  (  k_  )  J  J  \  ^  )  I  \ 

REMARK  2.  The  reading  of  the  rest  of  the  exercise  consists  in 
first  pronouncing  the  names  of  the  phonographic  signs,  consonant  and 
vowel,  of  each  word,  and  then  pronouncing  the  word  itself  ;  thus, 
Pee-a,  pay  ;  6-Tee,  oat,  etc. 

X      X    -I      /•     -I      X.     X     / 
^     )-    X    -(    J,     (•_._._ 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

21.  Bay,  Poe,  ape,  Fay,  toe,  age,  Joe,  ate  or  eight,  dough  or  doe, 
ope,  day,  aid,  though,  say,  ace,  Coe. 

DIRECTIONS  ABOUT  WRITING. 

22.  Materials  Used. — Phonography  should  always  be  written  on 
paper  with  lines — wide  ruled  being  the  best  ;  and  either  pen  or  pencil 
may  be  used. 

23.  How  to  Hold  the  Pen. — In  writing  phonography  hold  the 
pen  as  you  are  accustomed  to  hold  it  in  writing  longhand  ;  that  is, 
between  the  thumb  and  first  finger,  or  between  the  first  and  second 
fingers,  as  the  case  may  be.     But  the  penholder  should  be  thrown 
out  a  little  more  than  in  writing  longhand,  and  should  generally  point 
in  a  line  with  the  forearm,  so  that,  without  changing  its  position,  a 
phonographic  Dee  or  Bee  can  readily  be  made. 


RULES   FOR   WRITING.  7 

OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 

24.  Length  of  Consonant-Stems. — The  proper  length  that  the 
consonant-stems  should  be  made  is  about  one-sixth  of  an  inch,  the 
forms  in  the  reading  exercises  being  models  in  this  respect.     It  is 
important,  too,  that  the  stems  be  made  uniform  in  length.     Irregu- 
larity in  this  respect  may  lead  to  confusion  hereafter,  when  other 
principles  of  phonography  are  learned. 

25.  Direction  of  Stems. — Great  care  must  be  taken  from  the 
very  outset  to  give  the  stems  their  proper  direction.     Perpendicular 
stems  should  stand  exactly  upright.     The  tendency  with  beginners  is 
to  involuntarily  slant  them  to  the  right,  the  same  as  they  incline  the 
letters  of  longhand.     It  would  be  well,  therefore,  for  them  to  make 
frequent  tests  of  their  written  characters  with  the  straight  edge  of  a 
card,  placing  it  against  the  sides  of  straight  stems  and  to  the  tips  of 
curves.     Slanting  stems  should  likewise  be  tested  in  the  same  way,  to 
make  sure  that  they  lean  at  an  angle  half-way  between  a  horizontal 
and  a  perpendicular,  which  is  the  angle  of  forty-five  degrees.     Any 
improper  inclination  in  the  characters,  that  might  not  be  noticed  by 
the  inexperienced  eye  of  the  beginner,  will  be  made  clearly  manifest 
by  the  edge  of  the  card,  because  of  its  greater  length. 

OF  THE  VOWEL-SIGNS. 

26.  The  vowel-signs,  both  dots  and  dashes,  should  be  written  at  a 
little  distance  from  the  consonant-stems.     Beginners  are  apt  to  place 
them  too  close. 

27.  The  dash  vowel-signs  should  be  struck  at  right  angles  to  the 
stems  near  which  they  are  written.     When  written  to  a  curved  stem, 
they  should  stand  at  right  angles  to  the    part  to   which  they  are 
opposite. 

RULES  FOR  WRITING  PHONOGRAPHY. 

28.  Order  of  Writing. — The  consonant-stems  of 
words  are  always  written  before  writing  any  of  the 
vowels,  and  the  vowel-signs  are  afterwards  placed  to  the 
stems. 


8  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

29.  One  Consonant  and  One  Vowel. — When  a 
word  is   composed    of   one    consonant-sound    and    one 
vowel-sound,  it  is  written  as  follows: 

1.  Write  the  proper  consonant-stem. 

2.  Write  the  sign  of  the  vowel  at  the  side  of  the  con- 
sonant-stem in  the  following  manner: 

I.  If  the  vowel  is  heard  after  the  consonant,  place  its 
sign  to  the  right  of  an  upright  or  slanting  stem,   and 
below  a  horizontal  stem;  thus, — 

\    \      I      I-      )      )- 

Pee         pay      Dee          day  Ess          so        Gay         gay 

II.  If  the  vowel  is  heard  before  the  consonant,  place 
its  sign  to  the  left  of  an  upright  or  slanting  stem,  and 
above  a  horizontal  stem;  thus, — 

/        /       \        \       (-(__!_ 

Jay        age  Pee          ape        Ith  oath          Kay         oak 

REMARK.  In  writing  the  examples  given  in  the  preceding  para- 
graph, it  is  not  meant  that  each  stem  shall  be  made  twice,  once 
without  the  vowel,  and  then  a  second  time  with  the  vowel ;  but  in 
the  case  of  each  pair  of  illustrations,  the  first  shows  the  stem  before 
it  is  vocalized,  and  the  second  shows  the  same  stem  after  the  vowel- 
sign  has  been  written  to  it. 

LESSON  II. 

30.  The  learner  should  now  commit  to  memory  the  remaining 
nine  consonant-signs  of  the  Phonographic  Alphabet  (page  xvi  ),  in 
the  same  way  that  the  first  sixteen  were  memorized  (17);  that  is,  from 
Em  to  Hay  inclusive,  being  the  following  characters  : — 

^        ^_S      ^>       f ^/^/^x-x 

Em          En         Ing         Lee       Er         Ree     \Vay     Yay     Hay 


RULES   FOR   WRITING.  9 

31.  Chay  and  Ree  Distinguished. — When  not 
joined  with  other  stems,  or  one  with  the  other,  Chay  and 
Ree  are  distinguished  by  difference  of  slant;  Chay  being 
written  downward  at  an  angle  of  sixty  degrees,  and  Ree 
upward  at  an  angle  of  thirty  degrees ;  thus, — 

/  Chay  /  Ree 


READING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.  The  consonant-stems  and  vocalized  words  of  this  exer- 
cise are  read  in  the  same  way  as  the  stems  and  words  in  the  reading 
exercise  to  Lesson  I.  (pages  5  and  6). 


^  r  r^^\\  i  i  i 
)  (  )  rj  ~^  j  ^^  ^r 

~  //  ^  )  ^  >  (  j  c  j 


j  (  J  (  r  )  ~\^s/  /s-.c 
^^•^  /  ^^.^  (  (  )  )  j  j 

c  —  >^-^^,N^"^  f  ^  /  /  i  i 
\\  ___  /  c  t  (  ^.^^ 
^  ^  r  (^  ^ 


10  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

32.  Write  the  consonant-stems  indicated  by  each  of  the  following 
names :  Em,    Hay,   En,   Ing,   Lee  (upward),  Yay  (downward),  Er, 
Way,  Ree  (upward),  Chay  (downward),  Em,  Lee,  Er,  Ing,  En,  Yay, 
Way,   Hay,  Zhee,  Ish,  Yay,   Lee,  Vee,  Thee,   Ess,  Ef,  Chay,  Ree, 
Zhee,  Thee,  Ish,  Zee,  Vee,   Ess,   Ef,  Chay,   Ree,  Chay,  Yay,  Em, 
Way,  Hay,  En,  Vee,  Ef,  Thee,  Ith,  Zee,  Ess,  Zhee,  Ish,  Er,  Em, 
Lee,   Ef,  En,  Ing,  Vee,  Pee,  Bee,  Chay,  Jay,  Tee,  Dee,  Kay,  Gay. 

33.  Write  each  of  the  following  words  on  the  line  and  in  accord- 
ance with  the  rule  at  29  :  Mow  (to  cut  grass),  ohm  (an  electrical 
term),   nay  or  neigh,   lay,   roe  or  row  (as  in   "rowboat"),  way  or 
weigh,  yea,  hoe. 

THE  LONG-VOWELS. 

34.  In  the  previous  lesson  only  two  vowels  were  given  to  the  learner 
to  use,  namely,  the  two  long-vowels  (a  and  6)  of  the  second  position. 
It  will  now  be  necessary  to  learn  the  four  other  long-vowels — two 
belonging  to  the  first-place  and  two  to  the  third-place — and  also  the 
diphthongs.     But  before  any  of  them  can  be  used  properly,  word- 
position  must  be  understood.     In  order  that  the  two  vowels  already 
presented  may  appear  in  their  proper  places  among  the  other  vowels, 
the  instruction  in  regard  to  them  will  be  here  repeated.     Before  pro- 
ceeding farther,  however,  paragraphs  n  and  12  should  be  reviewed. 

35.  The  six  long-vowels  are  written  with  heavy  dots  and  dashes  as 
follows  : 

1.  The  sound  of  ah  (a  in  art),  with  a  heavy  dot  in  the  first-place. 

2.  The  sound  of  a  (a  in  age),  with  a  heavy  dot  in  the  second-place. 

3.  The  sound  of  e  (e  in  t've),  with  a  heavy  dot  in  the  third-place. 

4.  The  sound  of  aw  (a  in  ell),  with  a  heavy  dash  in  the  first-place. 

5.  The  sound  of  6  (p  in  0de),  with  a  heavy  dash  in  the  second- 
place. 

6.  The  sound  of  6b  (oo  in   0<?ze),  with  a  heavy  dash  in  the  third- 
place. 

36.  Or,  reversing  the  order  of  the  foregoing  rule,  it  may  be  stated 
briefly  as  follows : 

I.  A  heavy  dot  written  to  a  stem  and  put  opposite  the  beginning, 
middle,  or  finish  of  the  stem,  stands  for  either  ah,  a,  or  e,  according 
to  its  place. 


WORD-POSITION.  II 

2.  A  heavy  dash  written  to  a  stem  and  put  opposite  the  beginning, 
middle,  or  finish  of  the  stem,  stands  for  either  aw,  6,  or  do,  accord- 
ing to  its  place. 

37.  These  rules  are  illustrated  in  the  following  table  : 

TABLE  OF  LONG  VOWEL-SIGNS. 


a  in  art  (ah) 
a  "  age  (a) 

e  "  eve  (e) 


a  in  all  (aw) 
o  "  ode  (6) 
oo  "  ooze  (do) 


38.  Names  of  the  Long-Vowels. — The  names  of  the  long- 
vowels  are  their  sounds, — ah,  a,  e,  aw,  6,  do.  In  Webster's  diction- 
ary the  sounds  are  all  indicated  by  single  letters  marked  thus : 
a,  5,  e,  a,  6,  o.  These  marks  are  called  "diacritics/'  and  every 
student  should  learn  their  use. 


WORD-POSITION. 

39.  Three  Word-Positions. — There  are  three  dif- 
ferent  positions,   up  and    down,   with   reference  to  the 
line,  in  which  words  are  written — high,  median,  and  low 
— being  called  respectively  "  First-Position,"  "  Second- 
Position,"  and  "  Third-Position." 

40.  Meaning  of  the  Dot-Line. — The  dot-line,  shown  in  connec- 
tion with  the  phonographic  illustrations,  represents  the  line  or  ruling. 
When  an  outline  appears  without  the  dot-line,  it  is  to  be  understood 
that  the  word  belongs  to  the  second-position. 

41.  Word  of  One  Stem  in  Position. — A  word  of 
only  one  stem-sign  is  said  to  occupy  a  particular  position 
when  its  consonant-stem  is  written  in  that  position. 

42.  Three   Consonant-Positions. — Every   conso- 
nant-stem may  be  written,  with  respect  to  the  line,  in 
three  different  positions. 


12  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

43.  First  Consonant-Position.  —  The  first-position 
for  every  consonant-stem  is  above  the  line;  upright  or 
slanting  stems  being  written  half  a  Tee-length  above, 
and  horizontal  stems  a  full  Tee-length  above;  thus,  — 

--;•-/   I   \  ^  )   "\^r  --  —  —  r 

_  j  _______________________  .  __________________  ______________  .......  ______  :.  . 

44.  Second    Consonant-Position.  —  The   second- 
position  for  every  consonant-stem  is  on  the  line;  thus,  — 


45.  Third  Consonant-Position.  —  The  third-posi- 
tion for  every  upright  or  slanting  consonant-stem  is  across 
the  line,  being  divided  by  it  into  equal  parts;  and  for 
every  horizontal  stem,  just  below  but  not  touching  the 
line;   thus,  — 

/-(  .....  ^  -j--^-  r-^  -^  ^-^^ 

46.  Positions  of  One-Vowel  Words.  —  When  a 

word  contains  but  one  vowel-sound,  as  be,  pay,  ma,  aim, 
dough,  paw,  too,  thee,  etc.,  the  position  in  which  its  con- 
sonant-stem should  be  written  (whether  in  the  first, 
second,  or  third  position)  is  determined  by  the  vowel- 
place  (first,  second,  or  third  place)  to  which  that  vowel- 
sound  belongs. 

VOWEL-PLACES  SUGGEST  WORD-POSITIONS. 

47.  First  Vowel-Place.  —  The  first  vowel-place  is  associated  with 
and  suggests  the  first  word-position  —  that  is,  above  the  line. 

48.  Second  Vowel-Place.  —  The  second  vowel-place  is  associated 
with  and  suggests  the  second  word-position  —  that  is,  on  the  line. 

49.  Third  Vowel-Place.  —  The  third  vowel-place  is  associated 
with  and  suggests  the  third  word-position  —  that  is,  through  or  belov* 
the  line. 


THE   DIPHTHONGS.  13 

WQRDS   OF    ONE    STEM    AND    ONE    VOWEL. 

50.  When  a  word  has  but  one  consonant-stem  and  one 
vowel-sound,  it  is  written  in  position  by  putting  the  stem 
in  the  position  indicated  by  the  place  of  the  vowel,  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  last  three 
paragraphs.  Examples: 

5.  i-  .^  .S..  (- ._,  .s..:  s-  — 

pa        day        me       paw     though     coo         or  eel        eke 

51.  Position  Indicated  in  Type. — A  phonographic  sign  may  be 
indicated  in  ordinary  type  as  being  in  a  particular  position,  by  placing 
after  its  name  a  superior  figure  denoting  the  position  ;  thus,  Pee1, 
Dee2,  and  Em3  represent  the  stems  of  the  words  pa,  day,  and  me  and 
their  positions.     The  same  may  be  done  with  the  "types"  of  the 
signs  ;  thus,  SH2,  R1,  and  F3  represent  the  stems  and  positions  of 
the  words  show,  or,  and  fee. 

THE  DIPHTHONGS. 

52.  Besides  the  twelve  simple-vowels,  which  are  written 
with  dots  and  dashes,  there  are  in  our  language  four 
Diphthongs,    or  glide-vowels,    which    are   written    with 
small  angle-points,  placed  at  the  sides  of  the  consonant- 
stems, 

53.  The  diphthongs  are  the  sounds  of — 

1.  I  in  bite  or y  in  by. 

2.  OI  in  oil  or  oy  in  boy. 

3.  OW  in  owl  or  ough  in  bough. 

4.  EW  in  few  or  u  in  tube. 

54.  Places   of   the    Diphthongs. — Three  of   the 
diphthong-signs  are  written  in  the  first-place,  and  one  in 
the  third-place;  as  shown  in  the  following — 


14  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

TABLE  OF  DIPHTHONG-SIGNS. 
v[  I  *{  01          ""low         J  W 

55.  Signs  Always  Point  the  Same  Way.— The  angle-points 
of  the  diphthong-signs  are  always  turned  in  the  directions  shown  in 
the  above  table,  no  matter  what  may  be  the  inclination  of  the  stems 
to  which  they  are  written. 

Examples  : 


tie        by         my         boy      joy        vow         cow         few         cue 

56.  Names  of  the  Diphthongs. — The  diphthongs  are  named  by 
simply  giving  their  sounds.     Thus,  the  name  of  I  is  the  sound  of  the 
pronoun  "  I"  ;  of  01,  the  sound  of  the  word  oil  with  the  /omitted  ; 
of  ow,  the  sound  of  the  word  out  with  the  t  omitted  ;  and  of  KW,  the 
sound  of  the  word  due  with  the  d  omitted.     In  naming  the  diph- 
thongs 01,  OW,  and  EW,  be  careful  noc  to  say  "  o-i,"   "  o-double- 
you,"  "  e-double-you." 

57.  Sign  for  "  I  "  Joined. — At  the  beginning  of  words,  when  it 
is  convenient,  the  sign  for  the  diphthong  I  may  be  joined  to  the  con- 
sonant-stem ;  thus,     1     eyed.     It  is  entirely  proper,  though,  not  to 
join  it.     See  102. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


\  .......... 


THE   SHORT-VOWELS. 


'5 


V^ 


\-(  )  1 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

58.  Pa,  bay,  heaU  or  bow  (of  a  ribbon),  two  or  too,  they,  thee,  saw, 
so  or  sew  (with  a  needle),  coo,  Joe,  me,  fee,  nay  or  neigh,  no  or 
know,  she,  shoe,  low,  thaw,  raw,  ape,  ought  or  aught,  ale  or  ail,  or, 
ear,  ache,  ooze,  each,  dough  or  doe,  ode  or  owed,  key  or  quay,  eke, 
roe  or  row  (with  an  oar),  oar.  Die,  by  or  buy,  thy,  toy,  rye,  vie, 
cow,  jew,  shy,  pew,  coy,  thou,  my,  few,  sue,  mow  (pile  of  hay),  lie, 
hew  or  hue  or  Hugh,  out,  eyed,  ice. 


LESSON  III. 


THE  SHORT-VOWELS. 

59.  The  six  short-vowels  are  written  with  light  dots  and  dashes  as 
follows : 

1.  The  sound  of  a  in  at,  with  a  light  dot  in  the  first-place. 

2.  The  sound  of  e  in  ^bb,  with  a  light  dot  in  the  second-place. 

3.  The  sound  of  i  in  it,  with  a  light  dot  in  the  third-place. 

4.  The  sound  of  o  in  on,  with  a  light  dash  in  the  first-place. 

5.  The  sound  of  u  in  «s,  with  a  light  dash  in  the  second-place. 

6.  The  sound  of  oo  in  foot,  with  a  light  dash  in  the  third-place. 


TABLE  OF  SHORT-VOWELS. 


a  in  at  (a) 
e  "  ebb  (£) 


o  in  on  (8) 
u  "  us  (u) 
oo  "  foot  (6t>) 


i  ••  it  0) 

60.   Names  of  the   Short-Vowels. — The  names  of  the  short- 
vowels,  like  those  of  the  long-vowels,  are  the  sounds  themselves. 


l6  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

But  as  it  is  somewhat  difficult  for  most  beginners  to  utter  these  short 
sounds  accurately,  except  in  connection  with  consonants,  a  little 
special  practice  will  be  necessary.  To  get  the  sound  of  a  in  at,  say 
pat  several  times,  then  at  several  times,  and  then  the  vowel  without 
the  /  several  times ;  thus,  pat,  pat,  pat,  pat ;  at,  at,  at,  at ;  a,  a,  a,  a. 
Be  careful  not  to  change  the  sound  from  2.  to  a.  To  get  the  sound  of 
e  in  <?bb,  say  m&t,  m^t,  m«,  mSt ;  e"t,  et,  £t,  et ;  e,  e,  e,  e  (not  e,  e, 
e,  e).  To  get  the  sound  of  i  in  z't,  say  pit,  pit,  pjt,  pit ;  It,  It,  It,  It ; 
I,  \,  !,  \  (not  T,  I,  I,  i).  To  get  the  sound  of  o  in  on,  say  cot,  cdt,  c6t, 
cfit ;  6t,  6t,  6t,  6t ;  6,  6,  6,  6  (not  6,  6,  5,  6).  To  get  the  sound  of 
u  in  us,  say  cut,  cut,  cut,  cut ;  fit,  fit,  fit,  fit ;  u,  u,  u,  u  (not  you, 
you,  you,  you).  To  get  the  sound  of  oo  in  fwt,  say  foot,  foot,  foot, 
foot;  6"6t,  <56t,  otit,  oot ;  66,  6~6,  do,  66  (not  "double-o"  or  "two 
o's"),  etc.  In  Webster's  Dictionary  the  marked  letters  to  denote 
these  short  vowel-sounds  are  a,  e\  1,  6,  u,  o. 

REMARK.  For  examples  of  words  containing  each  a  short-vowel 
and  one  consonant,  see  the  first  ten  words  in  the  reading  and  writing 
exercises  on  pages  22  and  23. 

61.  All  of  the  Vowels. — All  of  the  sixteen  vowel-sounds  of  the 
language  having  now  been  presented,  together  with  their  phono- 
graphic signs,  a  complete  table  of  them  is  here  given. 


COMPLETE  TABLE  OF  VOWEL-SIGNS. 


ah 


5  •       "i  aw 


5          -   6 


60 


o         v|  i         ^01         low 


u 


00  i  EW 


THE  VOWEL-SOUNDS  AND  THEIR  "PLACES." 

62.  All  of  the  long  vowel-sounds  are  heard,  in  their  proper  order 
by  "  places"  (that  is,  lengthwise  of  the  consonant-stem),  in  the  sen- 
tence :  "  Pa  gave  me  all  those  shoes." 

63.  All  of  the  short  vowel-sounds  are  heard,  in  their  proper  order 
by  "  places,"  in  the  sentence  :  "Pat  went  in  on  one  foot." 

64.  All  of  the  diphthong-sounds  are  heard  in  their  proper  order  in 
the  sentence  :  "  My  joys,  how  few  !  " 


WORDS   OF   MORE   THAN   ONE   STEM.  IJ 

65.  Sounding  the  Vowels  across. — The  usual  order  in  which 
the  vowels  are  sounded  is  lengthwise  of  the  consonant-stem,  from  its 
beginning  to  its  finish  ;  the  six  long-vowels  being  given  first,  next  the 
six  short-vowels,  and  then  the  four  diphthongs  ;  thus,  ah,  a,  e ;  aw, 
6,   60 ;  a,  g,  1 ;  6,  u,  6~6 ;  i,  01,  ow,   EW.     The  learner,  however, 
should  make  a  practice  of  occasionally  sounding  them  across  the  con- 
sonant-stem, from  left  to  right,  and  in  that  way  learning  all  the 
sounds  of  each  of  the  three  vowel-places  by  themselves.     Thus,  first- 
place,  ah,  a,  aw,  6,  i,  01,  ow  ;  second-place,  a,  £,  6,  u  ;  third-place, 
e,  1,  do,  do,  EW.     This  kind  of  practice  will  help  one  in  determining 
quickly  the  proper  position  in  which  to  write  the  outline  of  any 
word. 

66.  All  of  the  first-place  vowel-sounds  are  heard  in  the  sentence : 
"  Laugh  at  all  of  my  toys  now." 

67.  All  of  the  second-place  vowel-sounds  are  heard  in  the  sen- 
tence :  "  They  get  no  cup." 

68.  All  of  the  third-place  vowel-sounds  are  heard  in  the  sentence : 
"  We  bring  you  good  news." 


WORDS  OF  MORE  THAN  ONE  STEM. 

69.  Consonant-Outline  Written  before  Vowels. 

— As  has  been  already  stated  (28),  all  the  consonant- 
stems  of  a  word  are  written  before  writing  any  of  the 
vowel-signs.  The  entire  outline  is  first  completed  by 
joining  the  steins,  one  after  another,  in  proper  succes- 
sion, without  any  break  or  lifting  of  the  pen  or  pencil 
from  the  paper.  The  vowel-signs  are  then  written  to  the 
outline,  in  the  order  of  their  occurrence  in  the  word. 

70.  In  the  following   illustrations  the  upper   line  of   characters 
shows  the  outlines  of  the  words  filch,  Alabama,  etc.,  as  they  appear 
after  being  written  without  lifting  the  pen,  and  the  lower  line  shows 
the  same  outlines  with  the  vowels  inserted.     Each  outline  should  be 
vocalized  as  soon  as  it  is  written,  and  before  proceeding  to  write  the 
next  outline. 


i8 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


filch         Alabama         envy          rebuke  victim        monthly 

71.  Ish  and  Shee,  Lee  and  El. — When  the  signs  for  sh  and/ 
stand  alone,  the  former  is  written  downward  (9)  and  is  called  Ish, 
and  the  latter  is  written  upward  (8)  and  is  called  Lee.  But  when 
joined  to  other  stems,  both  of  the  signs  maybe  written  either  upward 
or  downward.  Now,  for  the  purpose  of  distinction,  when  written 
upward,  the  sh-sign  is  called  Shee,  and  when  written  downward,  the 
1-sign  is  called  El. 


READING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.  The  reading  of  this  exercise  consists  in  pronouncing 
the  names  of  the  consonant-stems  of  each  combination,  one  after  the 
other,  in  quick  succession  ;  thus,  Tee-Pee,  Bee-El,  El-Ing,  Ef-Lee, 
Ish-Dee,  Shee-Ith,  etc 


WHICH    STEM   TO   WRITE   THE   VOWEL   TO.       19 


r\  i/  /-, 


}  \ 


b"v 


WHICH    STEM    TO    WRITE    THE    VOWEL    TO. 

72.  One  Vowel  between  Stems.  —  When  one  vowel 
only  occurs  between  consonants,  its  sign  is  sometimes 
written  to  the  first  stem  and  sometimes  to  the  second. 
The  general  rule  that  governs  in  such  cases  is  as  follows: 

I.  The  signs  of  all  the  first-place  vowels,  whether  long 
or  short,  or  diphthong,  and  of  the  two  long  second-place 
vowels,  are  written  to  and  after  the  first  stem;  thus,  — 


balm      rack      fall       shop     chime      coil      loud      make       foam 


2O  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

II.  The  signs  of  the  two  short  second-place  vowels, 
and  of  all  the  third-place  vowels,  whether  long  or  short, 
or  diphthong,  are  written  to  and  before  the  second  stem; 
thus,  — 

A          (X 


gem      fetch     thumb      tub     deem     thick       boom     shook    duke 

73.  Another  Form  of  the  Rule.  —  (a)  Write  all  the 
first-place  vowels  and  the  two  heavy  second-place  vowels 
just  after  the  preceding  consonant.     (£)  Write  all  the 
third-place  vowels  and  the  two  light  second-place  vowels 
just  before  the  following  consonant. 

74.  All  vowels  which,  according  to  the  foregoing  rule,  are  written 
to  the  first  stem,  are  heard  in  the  sentence  :  "  Ma  and  all  of  my  boys 
now  may  go."     All  vowels  that  are  written  to  the  second  stem,  are 
heard  in  the  sentence  :  "  Let  us  see  if  you  could  mew." 

75.  Vowel  at  the  Beginning.  —  If  a  vowel-sound 
begins  a  word,  its  sign  is  placed  before  the  first  stem  of 
the  outline;  thus,  — 


ark  asp         eighth  elm          inch  imp         orb 

76.  Vowel  at  the  End.  —  If  a  vowel-sound  ends  a 
word,  its  sign  is  placed  after  the  last  stem  of  the  outline. 
For  examples  see  Lesson  IV. 

POSITION    OF    WORDS    OF    TWO   OR    MORE   STEMS   AND 
ONE    VOWEL. 

77.  When  a  word  has  more  than  one  consonant-stem 
and  but  one  vowel-sound,  it  is  put  in  its  proper  position 
as  follows: 

I.  If  the  outline  commences  with  an  upright  or  slant- 
ing stem,  or  is  composed  entirely  of  horizontals,  write 
the  first  stem  in  the  position  indicated  by  the  place  of  the 
vowel;  thus,  — 


POSITION  OF  WORDS  OF  TWO  OR  MORE  STEMS.      21 


z^ 


chalk 


K.., 


tame 


big 


shock 


reap  loop        check 


s 


vim        depth        came         knock          meek         maim         numb 
II.   If  the  outline  commences  with  horizontal  stem  or 
stems,   followed  by  upright  or  slanting  stem  or  stems, 
write  the  first  upright  or  slanting  stem  in  the  position 
indicated  by  the  place  of  the  vowel;  thus, — 


match         inch       mob  keep        knife          mouth         gauge 

=d_r^X 


cooked         month        nymph       gagged         gulp         garb     mange 

78.  The  Object  of  the  foregoing  rule  is  to  bring  all  outlines, 
composed  of  both  horizontal  and  upright  or  slanting  stems,  as  nearly 
as  possible  into  the  same  general  horizontal  line,  for  each  of  the 
positions,  irrespective  of  the  order  of  the  stems  in  such  words. 

Examples : 


pack      cap        fame 


muff 


A. 

chum       much      theme       myth 


park       march          pink          gimp          milked       munch      thump 

79.  Practice  in  Phonographic  Spelling-. — The  learner  is  recom- 
mended to  read  aloud  distinctly  several  times  all  of  the  words  given 
below,  together  with  the  phonographic  spelling  which  accompanies 
them.  This  spelling  should  be  done  by  pronouncing  the  syllables 
separated  by  hyphens.  The  combination  "ah"  is  sounded  as  the 


22  MUNSOX    PHONOGRAPHY. 

interjection  "  ah,"  "  aw  "  as  the  word  "  awe,"  and  "  oo  "  as  the  first 
syllable  of  the  word  "  oo-long." 

Palm,  Pee-ah-Em,  palm;  peach,  Pee-e-Chay, peach  ;  page,  Pee-a- 
]a.y,page  ;  poke,  Pee-6-Kay, poke ;  beam,  Bee-e-Em,  beam;  boom, 
Bee-ob-Em,  boom;  balk,  Bee-aw-Kay,  balk;  bake,  Bee-a-kay,  bake ; 
bathe,  Bee-a-Thee,  bathe ;  fame,  Ef-a-Em,  fame ;  faith,  Ef-a-Ilh- 
faith  ;  folk,  Ef-6-Kay,  folk  ;  vague,  Vee-a-Gay,  vague  ;  move,  Em- 
6b-Vee,  move;  maim,  Em-a-Em,  maim  ;  tomb,  Tee-oo-Em,  tomb  ; 
teeth,  Tee-e-Ith,  teeth;  teethe,  Tee-e-Thee,  teethe ;  teach,  Tee-e- 
Chay,  teach;  deep,  Dee-e-Pee,  deep;  daub,  Dee-aw-Bee,  daub; 
doom,  Dee-oo-Em,  doom ;  thief,  Ith-e-Ef,  thief;  name,  En-a-Em, 
name;  cheap,  Chay-e-Pee,  cheap;  chalk,  Chay-aw-Kay,  chalk; 
shape,  Ish-a-Pee,  shape ;  coop,  Kay-do- Pee,  coop ;  coupe,  Kay-6b- 
Pee-a,  coup/;  comb,  Kay-6-Em,  comb ;  coach,  Kay-6-Chay,  coach; 
cage,  Kay-a-Jay,  cage ;  gauge,  Gay-a-Jay,  gauge;  Paul,  Pee-aw-El, 
Paul ;  bowl,  Bee-6-El,  bowl ;  jail,  Jay-a-El, _/>«'//  peep,  Pee-e-Pee, 
peep  ;  babe,  Bee-a-Bee,  babe ;  coke,  Kay-6-Kay,  coke  ;  cocoa,  Kay- 
6-Kay-6,  cocoa;  gawk,  Gay-aw-Kay,  gawk ;  cab,  Kay-a-Bee,  cab; 
fetch,  Ef-e"-Chay,  fetch;  king,  Kay-I-Ing,  king  •  lock,  Lee-6-Kay, 
lock;  tongue,  Tee-u-Ing,  tongue ;  book,  Bee-do-Kay,  book;  sham, 
Ish-a-Em,  sham  ;  much,  Em-u-Chay,  much  ;  thick,  Ith-I-Kay,  thick  ; 
bath,  Bee-a-Ith,  bath;  file,  Ef-l-El,  file;  fill,  Ef-l-El,  fill;  boil, 
Bee-Ol-El,  boil;  mouth,  Em-ow-Ith,  mouth;  fume,  Ef-EW-Em, 
fume. 


POSITION  OF  WORDS  OF  MORE  THAN  ONE  VOWEL.    23 


.rrC7./T^  I     .<^r. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

80.  Ebb,  at,  Ed,  odd,  itch,  edge,  if,  ash,  in,  ell.  Calm,  bake, 
cage,  meek,  talk,  foam,  code,  move,  pack,  cap,  peck,  neck,  niche, 
king,  vim,  cop,  tongue,  much,  took,  guide,  mouth,  couch,  cube, 
chime,  nap  or  Knapp,  peg,  beg,  deck,  pike,  chum,  tithe,  dug,  make, 
cash,  dodge,  cape,  thumb,  budge,  catch,  dike,  Dutch,  nick,  teach, 
thick,  dime,  pink,  mink. 

LESSON  IV.  . 

POSITION  OF  WORDS  OF   MORE   THAN   ONE 
VOWEL. 

81.  When  a  word  has  more  than  one  vowel-sound,  as 
also,  uneasy,  memory,  etc.,  the  position  of  its  outline  is 
determined  by  the  place  of  the  accented  vowel.  The 
accented  vowel  is  the  one  that  is  sounded  loudest. 

REMARK  i.  Every  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  vowel-sounds. 
Therefore,  it  is  generally  said  that  the  position  of  a  word  is  deter- 
mined by  the  place  of  the  vowel  of  the  accented  syllable  ;  that  being 
the  syllable  which  is  pronounced  with  the  greatest  force.  The  accent 
is  on  the  last  syllable  in  the  words  ahove,  adieu,  allow,  fatigue,  and 
on  the  first  syllable  in  the  words  fancy,  Tuesday,  echo,  Erie,  balmy. 
Which  vowel  is  sounded  loudest  in  the  words  create,  alone,  able,  re- 
ject, bacon,  danger,  appertain,  lady,  domestic,  romantic,  exercise? 

REMARK  2.  Before  learning  the  rule  for  writing  words  in  position 
given  in  the  next  paragraph,  the  student  should  carefully  review 
paragraphs  47,  48,  49,  and  77. 


24 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


82.  Rule  for  Word-Position.  —  Write  the  first  up- 
right or  slanting  stem  of  a  word  in  the  position  indicated 
by  the  place  of  its  vowel,  or,  if  it  has  more  than  one,  of 
its  accented  vowel.  If  the  outline  contains  only  horizon- 
tals, write  the  first  stem  of  the  word  in  the  position  so 
indicated.  Examples: 


palmy        also       decay        fumy      although       taboo      endow 


mighty    unto    uneasy    Monday    awning      money        nominee 

83.  A  vowel-sign  written  before  a  stem  which  has  a  diphthong-sign 
joined  at  the  beginning  (57),  is  read  between  the  diphthong  and  the 
stem.  Examples  : 

-T  *L,  . 

iota          lone         eying         Iowa          iodic         Ionic         lanthe 
READING  EXERCISE. 


ABOUT   CERTAIN   STEM-JOININGS.  25 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

84.  Ago,  echo,  easy,  eighty,  Opie,  allow,  essay,  avow,  Emma, 
balmy,  veto,  envy,  mighty,  cony,  coffee,  buggy,  choppy,  tabby, 
coupe,  chatty,  gummy,  poet,  fussy,  chubby,  baggage,  jockey,  awning, 
zany,  body,  caddy,  beauty,  chalky,  noisy,  above,  attack,  atom,  aback, 
assume,  untie,  offing,  enjoy,  espy,  enough,  assignee,  escape,  tunic, 
carriage,  dynamite. 

ABOUT  CERTAIN  STEM-JOININGS. 

85.  A  Straight  Stem  is  Repeated  by  making  it 
double  its  ordinary  length;  thus, — 


Jay     Jay-Jay  Tee    Tee-Tee    Chay    Chay-Chay  Bee      Bee-Bee 

86.  A  Curved  Stem  is  Repeated  by  writing  it 
twice  without  taking  off  the  pen,  making  a  sharp  angle 
between  the  stems;  thus, — 

!     > 

Ef      Ef-Ef      Dhee       Dhee-Dhee    Zee      Zee-Zee        Er    Er-Er 

87.  Joinings  without  Angles. — When  stems  are  joined  between 
which  there  is  naturally  little  or  no  angle,  no  attempt  should  be  made 
to  make  one,  not  even  for  the  purpose  of  indicating  where  the  first 
stem  leaves  off  and  the  other  begins  ;  thus, — 

~^ 
^  ^    J~  } 

o  n  r^ 

KEY:  Pee-Ess,  Pee-En,  Ess-Chay,  Em-Pee,   Ith-Pee,   Lee-Kay, 
Ef-Kay,  En-Ree,  El-En.  Ef-Er.  Ef-Shee,  En-Em,  Shee-Lee,  Er- 


26  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

Ish,  Em-En,  Em-Ish,  Em-Ess,  Lee-Shee,  Lee-Ish,  Lee-Ess,  Lee-Er. 
88.  One  Light  and  One  Heavy  Stem. — If  one  of  such  stems  is 
light  and  the  other  heavy,  the  shading  should  be  so  blended  about 
the  joining  that  there  will  be  no  perceptible  point  of  division; 
thus.— 


O  O 


KEY  :  Tee-Dee,  Dee-Tee,  Pee-Bee,  Bee-Pee,  Kay-Gay,  Gay-Kay, 
Dee-Ish,  Dee-Ef,  Pee-Zee,  Pee-Ing,  Bee-Ess,  Bee-En,  Gay-Er,  Ef- 
Gay,  Vee-Kay,  Em-Bee,  Lee-Gay,  El-Ing,  Ith-Ing,  Vee-Er,  Vee- 
Shee,  En-Hay,  Ing-Em,  Em-Zee,  Em-Ing,  Hay-Ish,  Hay-En,  Lee- 
Zhee,  Lee-Zee,  Lee-Way. 

89.  Hay-Ess  and  Thee-En  Exceptions. — In  the  outlines  Hay- 
Ess  and  Thee-En,  because  of  the  liability  of  the  shading  of  the  first 
stems  to  run  too  far  into  the  second  stems,  an  angle  should  be  made 
between  the  stems. 

90.  Both  Stems  Heavy. — If  both  stems  are  heavy,  and  one  or 
both  are  curved,  and  there  is  no  angle  between,  no  attempt  should 
be  made  to  sharpen  or  taper  the  ends  of  the  curves  that  are  toward 
the  junction  ;  but  the  shading  should  be  continued  of  uniform,  heavy 
thickness  right  across  from  one  stem  to  the  other  ;  thus, — 


KEY  :  Dee-Vee,  Bee-Zee,  Bee-Ing,  Vee-Gay,  Yay-Ing,  Thee-Zee, 
Zee-Thee,  Hay-Zee,  Hay-Ing. 

91.  Blunt  Joinings. — When  a  straight  stem  is  joined  to  a  curved 
stem  on  its  concave  side,  and  at  right  angles  to  a  line  drawn  from 
tip  to  tip  of  the  curve,  the  point  of  junction  must  necessarily  be 
somewhat  rounded  ;  but  care  must  be  taken  in  the  writing  so  that 
its  exact  location  will  be  apparent.  Examples  : 


ABOUT   CERTAIN   STEM-JOININGS. 


c 


U    L     L,    U 


r\  r\ 

KEY  :  Chay-Ef,  Jay-Ef.  Jay-Vee,  Tee-En,  Tee-Ing,  Dee- En, 
Dee-Ing,  Pee-Ish,  Pee-Shee,  Bee-Ish,  Bee-Shee,  Kay-Ess,  Kay-Zee, 
Gay-Ess,  Gay-Zee,  Ree-Way,  Em-Tee,  Em-Dee,  Lee-Pee,  Lee-Bee, 
Ith-Kay,  Ith-Gay,  Ef-Ree,  Vee-Ree. 

92.  Chay  and  Ree  Distinguished. — When  standing  alone,  or 
only  joined  each  with  itself,  Chay  and  Ree  are  distinguished  by  dif- 
ference of  slant  (31).  But  when  joined  with  other  stems,  or  one  with 
the  other,  these  stems  are  distinguished  by  difference  in  the  direction 
in  which  the  pen  moves  in  making  them,  whether  down  or  up.  as  is 
indicated  by  the  outline  itself ;  and  the  distinction  by  difference  of 
inclination  need  not  be  observed.  Examples  : 


raw       etch        ray       each         rue        chowchow       roar 


patch      parry       fetch       ferry       Dutch       dairy      much      Murray 


coach     curry     notch   narrow    wretch      cherry   touching     tearing 

93.  Concurrent  Vowels. — When  two  vowels  occur  together  be- 
tween stems,  they  are  generally  separated  and  the  first  vowel  written 
to  the  preceding  stem,  and  the  second  vowel  to  the  following  stem, 
without  regard  to  the  rule  at  72  (see  example  bayonet).  Occasionally 
it  is  better  to  write  both  vowels  to  the  same  stem  (see  example  diary). 
When  two  vowels  occur  together  not  between  stems,  as  at  the  end  or 
at  the  beginning  of  a  word,  both  vowels  must,  of  course,  be  written 


28 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


to  one  stem  ;  and  the  sign  of  the  vowel  that  is  heard  farthest  from 
the  consonant  must  be  placed  farther  away  from  the  stem  than  the 
sign  of  the  other  vowel.  See  examples  boa,  Aello,  etc.,  in  the  line 
below. 


l> 


X 


bayonet          diary      boa  Leo          payee         Ohio         Aello 

94.  Final  Unaccented  "A." — Unaccented  a  or  ah,  when  it 
occurs  at  the  end  of  words  and  names,  usually  has  a  somewhat  indefi- 
nite sound  which  is  best  written  with  the  first-place  light  dot.  For 
examples  see  boa,  Leah,  Messiah,  etc.,  in  the  line  above  and  in  the 
next  reading  exercise. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


{ 


DOWNWARD   AND    UPWARD   STEMS.  29 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

95.  Pop,  judge,  baby,  gag,  cake,  fife,  funny,  mummy,  pony,  taffy, 
coke,  fake,  map,  faith,  name,  many,  mink,  chide,  manage,  decay, 
keg,  posy,  peach,  bony,  defy,  evoke,  thong,   pithy,  type,  tongue, 
toto,    couch,    tooth,   gauzy,   daisy,   dodge,    endow,  baggage,   mash, 
penny,  Monday,  fig,  nothing,  duenna,  dime,  chaotic,  Siam,  Noah, 
necktie. 

LESSON  V. 

DOWNWARD  AND  UPWARD  STEMS. 
ER,  REE,  ISH,  SHEE,  EL,  AND  LEE. 

96.  The  learner  will  recall  the  fact  that  the  consonant  r  has  two 
stems  assigned  to  it,  namely,  ~~^  and  ^^,  each   having   a   name  of 
its  own,  Er  and  Ree  respectively  ;  and  that  when  standing  alone,  the 
stem  __J  is  always  written  downward,  and  the  stem   (~  always  up- 
ward, being  then  called  Ish  and  Lee.     Also,  that  when  joined  to 
other  signs  both  the  stems  _J  and    (~     may  be  written  either  up- 
ward or  downward  ;  the  name  of  the  former,  when  struck  upward, 
becoming  Shee  instead  of  Ish,  and  the  name  of  the  latter,  when 
struck  downward,  becoming  El  instead  of  Lee  (71). 

97.  The  following  rules  and  directions  are  prescribed  to  regulate 
the  use  of  these  downstroke  and  upstroke  stems. 

98.  Use  of  Er  and  Ree  not  Joined.  —  When  an 
r  stem  is  the  only  one  in  a  word,  either  Er  or  Ree  is 
used,  in  accordance  with  the  following  rules: 

I.  If  there  is  a  vowel-sound  before  the  r,  whether 
there  is  one  after  it  or  not,  the  downstroke  Er  is  used; 
thus,  — 


awry  array  Erie 


30 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


II.   If  there  is  a  vowel-sound  after  the  r,  and  none 
before  it,  the  upstroke  Ree  is  used;  thus,  — 


.-- 

raw 


ray  raw  roe  wry 

99.  R,  SH,  and  L  Stems  Joined.  —  When  joined  in  outlines  of 
two  or  more  stems,  the  proper  use  of  these  downward  and  upward 
stems  is  determined  in  accordance  with  certain  principles  which  will 
now  be  given. 


AT    THE    END    OF    OUTLINES. 

ioo.   General  Rule.  —  At  the  termination  of  outlines, 
the  last  stem  of  which  is  an  r,  sh,  or  /  sign,  — 

I.  The   upstroke    is    used    if   the  word    ends  with    a 
vowel-sound,  and 

II.  The    downstroke  is  used   if   the  word  ends  with 
a  consonant-sound. 

Examples: 


S   NX 

...^......L^ 

,                                            \ 

bar         burrow 

fear           fury 

bush         bushy           pile 

^....  -r 

-r  .£:._ 

^   v     r 
...-  ,   *    ^  —  * 

julley           gale 

gaily        fall 

follow          nail         Nelly 

101.  Exceptions.  —  In  order  to  secure  easier  outlines 
for  certain  word-forms,  a  few  exceptions  are  allowed  to 
this  rule.  Thus,  in  the  cases  specified  below,  write  the  sk, 
/,  and  r  stems  as  indicated,  without  reference  to  whether 
a  vowel  follows  or  not  : 

1.  After  Kay,  Gay,  Ree,  En,  and  Ing  use  Ish. 

2.  After  Ef  and  Vee  use  Shee. 


DOWNWARD   AND   UPWARD   STEMS. 


3! 


3.  After  Lee  use  Lee. 

4.  After  Ree  use  Ree. 
Examples  : 


cash 


fish 


cassia         rush         rushy      gnash       nausea  fishy 


lull 


Vichy          lavish       lowly       Lowell 


102.  The  rule  at  100  also  applies  in  the  case  of  outlines  of  words 
written  with  an  r  sign  with  an  initially  joined  diphthong-sign. 
Examples  : 


ire 


irate         Ira          irony  oil 

READING*  EXERCISE. 


Irish 


32  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

WRITING  EXERCISE 

103.  Ear,  ore,  hour  (not  our),  raw,  row  (disturbance),  rue  (pro- 
nounced  roo),  array,  era,  tar,  tyro,  tear  (pronounced  teer),  attire, 
dare,  dairy,  deer  or  dear,  par,  Perry,  poor  bare  or  bear,  bureau, 
gear,  far,  farrow,  affair,  nigher,  narrow,  weigher,  wiry,  mayor,  merry, 
layer.  Josh,  dash,  dashy,  push,  lash,  mush,  mushy,  tall,  tally,  dale, 
daily,  duel,  duly,  pail  or  pale,  polly,  bill,  below,  coil,  Kelly,  gull, 
gully,  follow,  vale  or  veil,  valley,  shyly,  early,  Cosh,  rush,  rushy, 
knavish,  rear. 


AT    THE    BEGINNING    OF    OUTLINES. 

104.  General  Rule.  —  At  the  beginning  of  outlines, 
the  first  stem  of  which  is  an  r,  sfi,  or  /  stem,  unless  the 
result  will   be  a  difficult   or  awkward   word-form,   the 
following  rule  is  applied: 

I.  If  the  word  begins  with  a  vowel-sound,  the  down- 
stroke  is  used. 

II.  If  the  word  does  not  begin  with  a  vowel-sound, 
the  upstroke  is  used. 

105.  Exceptions.  —  The  exceptions  to  this  rule  are 
covered  by  the  three  following  paragraphs  (106  to  108): 

106.  Use  of  Initial  Er  and  Ree.—  Without  regard 
to  the  rule,  the  downstroke  Er  is  always  used  before  Em 
and  Hay,  and  the  upstroke  Ree  is  always  used  before 
Tee,  Dee,  Chay,  Jay,  Ef,  Vee,  Ith,  and  Thee. 

Examples  of  the  rule  and  the  exceptions: 


A     A       ......    .....  #. 

™Pe  orb  racy  rosy          rash          airish          rill 


rack 


DOWNWARD  AND    UPWARD   STEMS. 


33 


rhyme 


Rome 


room         ream      rehash 


..x...  4 .4...  A 


A 

reach        arch        rage        urge        reed      arid       wrath    earth 

107.  Use  of  Initial  Ish  and  Shee.  —  Without  regard 
to  the  rule,  the  downstroke  Ish  is  used  before  all  of  the 
stems  excepting  Ith  and  Thee,  before  which  two  stems 
upstroke  Shee  is  used.  Before  Tee,  Dee,  and  Lee  both 
Ish  and  Shee  are  used,  as  follows:  When  vowels  follow 
both  consonants,  as  in  shady  \  shallow,  Shee  is  used  ;  other- 
wise, Ish  is  used  (see  shade,  Ashley.']  Examples: 


shape          shabby         Ashby         shock       sherry       shoal          sheaf 


-H-  •=*- 


sheath  sheathe  shade  shady  chateau  Ashley  shallow 
108.  Use  of  Lee  and  El. — Either  Lee  or  El  is  used 
before  all  of  the  horizontal  stems  and  Lee  and  Ree,  ac- 
cording as  the  rule  (104)  directs;  but  Lee  is  always  used 
before  all  of  the  other  stems,  without  regard  to  the  rule. 
Examples: 


q. 

like         alike       lamb       elm 


lung       along     Leroy    Ellery 


....  n  . 

latch       elegy  lap 


.  r\ 

alp       elbow 


also       although 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

109.  Rope,  repay,  rub,  herb,  ark  or  arc,  rug.  Rage,  urge,  reed  or 
read  or  Reid,  rood  or  rude,  wrath,  wreathe,  review.  Arm,  rhyme, 
roam  or  Rome,  ream.  Shop,  shake,  sherry,  shove,  Shem,  chateau, 
shady.  Lick,  ilk,  lucky,  leg,  Lena,  lame,  alum,  limb,  laying. 
Ledge,  alto,  lead,  loud,  lip,  lobby,  loathe,  lathe,  life,  love,  lassie, 
lazy,  liar,  leeway,  lull,  lily. 

IN    THE    MIDDLE    OF    OUTLINES. 

no.  When  a  sign  of  the  r,  sh,  and  /  series  occurs  be- 
tween two  stems,  generally  the  stems  Ree,  Ish,  and  Lee 
are  used.  Examples: 


dirge        party         barge      carriage          garb         forth        march 

VV 


mirror         mirth     bishop     rushing       deluge        pulp 


bailiff 


DOWNWARD   AND    UPWARD   STEMS. 


35 


guilty     royalty      foolery     foolish     following     village     mileage 

in.  Exceptions. — The  following  are  exceptions  to 
the  foregoing  rule: 

I.  When   the   outline  of  a  root  verb  ends  with  the 
downstroke  El,  in  writing  the  present  participle  the  El 
is  generally  retained;  that  is,  it  is  not  changed  to  Lee. 
See  toil,  toiling.     A  similar  exception  applies  when  the 
outline  of  the  root  verb  consists  of  or  ends  with  Ef-Er  or 
Vee-Er;  the  Er  being  retained  in  the  participle  outline. 
See  fire,   firing ;   veer,    veering.      Generally,    however, 
when  the  outline  of  the  root  verb  ends  with  Er,  in  form- 
ing the  outline  of  the  participle  the  Er  is  changed  to 
Ree .     See  Jeer,  jeering. 

II.  Between  Ef  or  Vee  and  the  stem  Em,  Er  is  always 
used;  and  between  Ef  or  Vee  and  either  of  the  stems 
Kay,  Gay,  or  Lee,  Er  is  generally  used,  unless  there  is 
a  vowel-sound  after  the  r,  in  which  case  Ree  is  used. 
See  farm  to  virago. 

III.  The  upstroke  Shee  is  used  instead  of  Ish  after 
the  stems  Tee,    Dee,    Ef,   and  Vee,   and  in  the  word 
unsheathe.     See  toyshop,  dashing. 

Examples: 


toil        toiling     pull       pulling     fire        firing         veer      veering 


jeer     jeering     bearing  farm         forum        fork         forego 


36 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


fairly  Varley         virago         toyshop       dashing        fishing 

READING  EXKRCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

112.  Charity,  torch,  tyranny,  terrify,  dirty,  perch,  uproar,  bor- 
rowing, birch,  bark,  gorge,  rarity,  merge,  marriage,  merino,  marry- 
ing, pushing,  cashing,  unsheathe,  lashing.  Jollity,  tulip,  tallying, 
dollar,  apology,  policy,  bulge,  bellowing,  bulky,  oblong,  calico,  gal- 
lery, rallying,  filch,  filth,  film,  felony,  follower,  village,  milch, 
melody,  mollify,  molar.  Chilling,  dealing,  appealing,  filing,  faring, 
tiring,  daring,  pouring,  bearing,  firm. 


BREVE-SIGNS   FOR   HAY,    WAY,   AND   YAY.        37 

LESSON    VI. 
BREVE-SIGNS  FOR  HAY,  WAY,  AND  YAY. 

113.  Besides  the  heavy  stems,  Hay,  Way,   and  Yay, 
for  the  sounds  of  A,  w,  and  y,  light  breve-signs  for  writing 
these  consonants  are  also  provided,  as  explained  below. 

114.  "  Breve  "  Defined.  —  As  the  term  is  most  generally  used  in 
this  book,  a  "breve"  is  a  short  phonographic  character,  struck  in 
various  directions,  and  made  either  straight  or  curved,  and  about 
one-fourth  the  length  of  a  consonant-stem.     It  is  also  sometimes  ap- 
plied to  the  circles  and  loops. 

REMARK.     For  the  names  of  the  breves  see  paragraph  151. 

115.  Breve-hay.  —  H  may  be  written  with  a  short, 
light  tick-sign,  attached  to  a  consonant-stem  at  either 
end,  being  made  either  perpendicular  or  horizontal, 
according  to  which  position  gives  the  easiest  junction 
with  such  stem.  Used  initially  before  the  stems  En  and 
Ing,  it  is  struck  vertically  upward.  It  is  also  written 
upward  in  the  middle  of  the  outlines  of  a  few  words,  to 
avoid  using  the  stem  Hay.  This  sign  is  usually  called 
"  Breve-hay."  Examples: 


hedge      hook       hurry       hush      hum        hole      honey     hang 

REMARK.  It  is  optional  with  writers  whether  they  employ  the 
stem  or  the  breve  sign  for  h  before  En  and  Ing,  as  in  writing  the 
words  hinge,  hang,  etc.  But  if  the  breve  is  used  it  should  be  struck 
vertically  upward  ;  or,  if  it  be  inclined  at  all,  it  should  be  toward 
the  slant  of  Pee  rather  than  toward  that  of  Chay. 

116.  When  breve-hay  is  joined  at  the  beginning  of  an  /stem  stand- 
ing alone,  the  rule  for  writing  /  when  it  is  the  only  stem  of  a  word 
applies,  —  that  is,  it  is  struck  upward. 

117.  Breve-way.  —  W^maybe  written  with  a  small 
semicircle,  attached  to  a  consonant-stem,  and  opening 
either  to  the  right  or  to  the  left,  according  to  which 


448455 


38  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

position  gives  the  easiest  junction  with  such  stem.  When 
used  initially,  except  before  horizontals,  it  is  generally 
made  to  open  rightward.  But  in  the  middle  of  outlines, 
it  is  frequently  turned  the  other  way.  This  sign  is 
usually  called  "  Breve-way." 

118.  Breve-yay. — Y  may  be  written   with   a  small 
semicircle,   attached  to  a  consonant-stem,   but  opening 
either  upward  or  downward,  according  to  which  position 
gives  the  easiest  junction  with  such  stem.     This  sign  is 
usually  called  "  Breve-yay." 

Examples : 

*/  ^  -1.      .  Y...  ^-.^..^" 

'  •*' '  '  " "  <_^>  xv 

wage      wig    worry    wing   weighty   youth   yoke    yarrow    yank 

119.  Stem-signs  instead  of  Breves. — At  the  beginning  of  out- 
lines of  words  with  initial  vowels,  and  at  the  finish  of  outlines  of 
words  that  end  with  vowel-sounds,  as  a  rule  the  stem-signs  of  these 
consonants  must  be  used  and  not  the  breves  ;  as  in  the  words  O'Hara, 
awake,  Owego,  Ayora,  Lehigh,  Kanawha,  Himalaya,  etc. 

120.  The  principle  underlying  the  foregoing  rule  is  of  universal 
application, — that  if  a  vowel  must  of  necessity  be  written  to  a  particu- 
lar consonant,  such  consonant  must  be  written  with  its  stem-sign. 
The  reason  for  this  is  that  as  the  vowels  are  distinguished  by  differ- 
ence of  place,  we  must  write  them  to  signs  that  have  length  in  order 
to  show  whether  they  are  first,  second,  or  third  place  ;  and  nothing 
but  the  stem-signs  will  enable  us  to  so  write  the  vowels.     Thus,  in 
writing  wake,  weary,  etc.,  we  may  use  the  breve  for  w,  because  the 
first  vowel  being  medial  may  be  written  to  the  second  consonant  in- 
stead of  to  the  w.     But  in  writing  awake,  Owego,  etc.,  the  first  vowel 
being  initial  must  be  written  to  the  w,  so  the  stem  Way  and  not  the 
breve  must  be  used.     Likewise,  in  writing  hurrv,  Harry,  hem,  etc., 
breve-hay  may  be  used  ;  but  in  writing  O'Hara,  ahem!,  etc.,  stem 
Hay  must  be  used,  because  of  the  initial  vowel. 

121.  Breve-way  for  Syllable  "Way." — Breve- 
way,  however,  notwithstanding  the  foregoing  rule,  may 
sometimes  be  used  to  represent  the  terminal  syllable 


BREVE-SIGNS  FOR  HAY,  WAY,  AND  YAY.          39 

way,  especially  when  it  will  make  a  better  junction  with 
the  preceding  consonant-sign  than  the  stem  Way;  as  in 
the  outlines  of  the  words  by-way,  Rockaway,  pathway, 
hallway,  etc. 

122.  Breve-yay  for    Syllable   "U." — Breve-yay, 
besides  representing  the  simple  consonant  y,  is  frequently 
used  for  the  sound  u,  when  it  alone  forms  a  distinct  syl- 
lable; as  in  the  words  u-tility,  eu-logy,  eu-phony,  U-tica, 
nephew,    etc.     In    the    middle   of  outlines   it  need  not 
always    be    inserted.     Thus,    annual   may    be    written 
N-Noid-L*  or  N-L1,  annually  N-L1,  manual  M-N-Noid-L1 
or  M-N-L'. 

123.  Dot-sign  for  Hay. — Before  the  stems  Pee  and 
Bee  at  the  beginning  of  words,  and  occasionally  before 
those  and  other  stems  in  the  middle  of  words,  h  may  be 
written  with  a  light  dot  placed  near  the  succeeding  vowel. 
This  sign   is  called  "Dot-hay"   or  "Hay-dot."     Ex- 
amples : 

.:>...   .!\.  ..v     x      X      .^: 

happy  hop  heap  hope  hub  unhappy 

124.  Breve-hay  may  be  joined  initially  to  breve- 
way,    in  words  like  whiff,   etc.     But  generally  in  such 
cases  the  outlines  are  sufficiently  complete  for  legibility 
with  the  aspirate  omitted. 

125.  Hook-breve  for  W  on  Lee. — The  stem   Lee, 
with  a  large  initial-hook,  is  used  for  wl,  in  writing  such 
words  as  well,   Welsh,  wealth,  wolf,  etc.     The  hook  is 
read  before  any  vowel-sign  placed  to  the  stem.     The 
name  for  this  character  is  Weel. 

REMARK. — This  Hook-breve,  which  is  the  only  exceptional  ex- 
pedient of  the  kind  in  the  system,  is  of  much  value  generally,  but  is 
especially  useful  in  enabling  us  to  write  the  word  -wellvn.  full,  instead 
of  with  an  abbreviation. 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


./.  -i.  Jb.  ^  .C  ..^.  .*. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

126.  Huge,  haughty,  hog,  Harry,  hale,  hull,  hoof,  hive,  hung, 
ham,  hollow,  holy,  hackney,  harp,  harangue,  heresy,  healing,  havoc, 
hinge,  homage,  hemp  ;  unhook,  mayhem,  unholy  ;  Mohawk.  Wedge, 
witty,  wide,  webb,  wake,  wag,  weary,  wife,  wave  or  waive,  width, 
washing ;  bewitch,  outwear.  Yore,  yam,  Yeddo,  yelp.  By-way, 
pathway,  Hathaway,  alley-way.  Utica,  unique,  nephew,  Cayuga. 
Hip,  whoop.  Will  (noun),  Welsh,  wolf. 


CAPITALS  AND  PUNCTUATION. 

127.  Proper  Names. — Whenever  it  is  desirable  to  indicate  that 
a  shorthand  outline  stands  for  a  word  that  begins  with  a  capital 
letter,  as,  for  instance,  a  proper  name,  it  may  be  done  by  placing 
underneath  or  at  the  left  of  the  first  stem  two  short  parallel  lines  ; 
thus,— 


ABBREVIATIONS.  4! 


Adam       Burke         Foucher       Ptolemy         Ida         May       Zeno 

128.  Period,    Dash,    and    Interrogation.  —  The    phonograpic 
period  is  a  small  x-shaped  character  (*),  and  the  dash  is  written 
double  (=).     The  sign  of  interrogation  is  made  like  Chay-Chay. 

LESSON  VII. 

ABBREVIATIONS. 

129.  Of  the  large  number  of  words  used  in  speaking  and  writing 
English,  fully  one-half  is  made  up  by  the  repetition  of  certain  com- 
mon words  such  as  the,  and,  of,  to,  in,  a,  for,  it,  be,  but,  at,  they, 
etc.,  numbering  less  than  one  hundred  and  fifty  in  all.     Most  of 
these  words  are  so  briefly  written  in  this  system  of  phonography  by 
their  regular  full  outlines  that  no  other  provision  is  required  for  them. 
But  there  are  several  which,  if  the  shorthand  writer  were  obliged  to 
always  write  them  in  full,  would  cause  an  unnecessary  consumption 
of  time  and  labor.     For  that  reason  they  are  provided  with  shortened 
phonographic  forms,  as  illustrated  by  the  following  examples  : 


.!..  >..  \ 


had         part         but        can        shall          was          her       and         I 

130.  "Abbreviations  "—  "  Contractions  "—"Word-Signs." 
—  Outlines  of  this  sort  are  usually  called  "Abbreviations."     They 
are  also  called  "Contractions."     And  it  is  sometimes  convenient  to 
speak  of  them,  especially  the  single-stem  signs,  as  "  Word-signs." 

131.  Not  Vocalized.  —  The   abbreviations  of  phonography  as  a 
rule  should  not  be  vocalized  ;  not  even  by  the  beginner. 

132.  Abbreviations  out  of  Position.  —  It  will  be  noticed  that 
the  abbreviations  for  a  few  words,  as  which,  where,  were,  etc.,  are 
written  in  other  positions  than  those  required  by  their  vowels.     This 
is  done  so  that  in  unvocalized  phonography  they  will  not  be  mis- 
taken for  the  outlines  of  other  words.     When  a  word  usually  written 
with  an  abbreviation  is  preceded  by  to,  if  put  in  the  fourth  position, 


42  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

in  some  cases  it  is  better  to  use  its  full  outline,  as,  to-advertise  Dv4- 
£-Tz,  to-change  CHvN-J,  to-charge  CH4-A'-J. 

133.  Other  Outlines  out  of  Position.— There  are  also  a  few 
other  single-stem  words,  whose  outlines  are  not  abbreviated  at  all, 
but  yet,  for  the  reason  stated  in  the  last  paragraph,  are  written  out 
of  their  proper  positions,  as  the  words  do,  go,  any,  etc.  Although 
the  outlines  of  these  words  are  not  abbreviations,  still,  for  conven- 
ience of  reference  they  are  included  in  the  list.  So  also  are  words 
which  are  written  entirely  with  vowel-signs. 

CERTAIN    ABBREVIATIONS    DESCRIBED. 

134.  "  An  "   and    "  And." — When    standing   alone, 
both  the  words  an  and  and  are  written  with  a  light  dot  in 
the  first-position  (156). 

135.  "A." — When  standing  alone,  the  word  a  is  writ- 
ten with  a  light  dot  in  the  second-position  (156). 

136.  "  The." — When   standing  alone,   the  is  written 
with  a  light  dot  in  the  third-position  (156). 

137.  "  I." — When  standing  alone,   the  pronoun  /  is 
written  in  the  first-position,  with  a  light  straight  breve- 
sign,  struck  upward  in  the  direction  of  Ree  (Roid1). 

138.  "Of." — When   standing  alone,  of  is  written  in 
the   second-position,    with    a   light    straight   breve-sign, 
struck  upward  in  the  direction  of  Ree  (Roid2). 

REMARK.  The  breve  for  0/is  removed  from  its  natural  position 
above  the  line,  and  placed  on  the  line,  in  order  to  avoid  conflict  with 
the  signs  of  /  and  have. 

139.  "  Have." — When  standing  alone,  have  is  usually 
written  with    a   heavy   straight  breve-sign   in   the   first- 
position,  struck  downward  in  the  direction  of  Jay  (Joid1). 
Have  may  also  be  written  with  the  stem  Vee. 

140.  "  Who  "  and  "  Whom." — The  words  who  and 
whom  are  both  written  with  a  heavy  straight  breve-sign 
in  the  third-position,  struck  downward  in  the  direction 


ABBREVIATIONS.  43 

of  Jay  (Joid9).  When  necessary  to  distinguish  by  out- 
line between  who  and  whom,  the  stem  Em  may  be  joined 
to  Joid3  in  writing  whom. 

141.  "He." — When    standing   alone,    he   is    usually 
written    with    the    light    straight,  perpendicular    breve, 
placed  in  the  second-position  (Toida). 

142.  "  Him." — When  standing  alone,  him  is  usually 
written   with   the    heavy   straight,   perpendicular   breve, 
placed  in  the  second-position  (Doid2). 

143.  "How." — When  standing  alone,  how  is  usually 
written   with    the    light    straight,    perpendicular    breve, 
placed  in  the  first-position  (Toid1). 

REMARK.  It  is  allowable  to  write  he,  him,  and  how  with  the 
stem  Hay,  placed  on  the  line  for  he  and  him  and  above  the  line  for 
how. 

144.  "New,"  "  Knew,"  and  " Now."— The  words 
new,  knew,  and  now  are  written  with  the  stem  En,  with 
abbreviated  forms  for  the  diphthong-signs,  EW  and  ow, 
joined  at  the  end  ;  thus, 

new,  knew  ~^    now 

145.  Semicircle  Breve  Words. — The  words  with- 
out, when,  with,   what,  and   would  are  written   with  the 
semicircle  breves  Thoid  and  Soid,   and  the  word  you, 
with  Noid  or  Moid,  in  the  manner  shown  in  the  follow- 
ing lists  of  single-sign  abbreviations. 

146.  One  Sign  for  Two  Words. — Whenever  in  the  Lists  of 
Abbreviations  there  occurs  an  outline  with  the  key  opposite  contain- 
ing a  hyphen,  it  means  that  the  abbreviation  is  used  for  two  words. 
Thus  "give-n  "  indicates  that  both  give  and  given  are  written  with 
the  same  sign,  namely,  Gay3.     It  means  the  same  thing,  also,  when 
two  key-words  follow  a  single  sign,  as  which  and  change  after  Chay'. 
In  all  such  cases  of  double  representation  of  words  by  single  signs, 
they  are  words  that  will  not  conflict  although  written  alike,   the 
context  invariably  showing  which  word  is  intended. 


44  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

LIST  OF  SINGLE-STEM  ABBREVIATIONS. 

ARRANGED   PHONOGRAPHICALLY. 


STEM-SIGNS.                              / 

that 

them 
was 
these 
shall 
should 
usual-ly 
from,  time 
home,  member 
own 
any 
now 
new,  knew 
long 
among 
thing 
will 
her 
hear,  here 
are,  our 
where,  recollect 
were 
why 
beyond 

--t-  yet,  young 

\ 

part                   .(  — 
hope                        ' 

—  f^  year,  your 

VOWELS  AND  EREVES 

ah 

\ 

\ 

~X" 

but 

an,  and 

1 

had                       '  j._ 

..  a 
the 

1 

do                     _    J 

It 

/ 

did                        *~~^ 

! 

charge               _  ^—  ^  -  - 

of 

have 

/ 

large 

__/  O,  oh,  owe 
who-m 

advantage 

/ 

can                    

I 

\ 



come                 
could                 _.  >«•-_ 
so 

_   how 
_i___  he 
i          him 

gave,  together        /~ 

without 

^ 

give-n                _  _~^  _  . 
half                         -^ 

...  c  when 
with 

__.^ 

( 

for                     ..  /_ 
ever                    _  /".-- 
thank                 .__/__. 
worth 

c 
what 

_.  would 

3 

_..or  YOU 
U       n        J 

as,  has 

_( 

-(- 

think                 _./Tl- 

_______  is,  his 

ABBREVIATIONS. 
LIST  OF  SINGLE-STEM  ABBREVIATIONS. 

ARRANGED  ALPHABETICALLY. 


45 


1 

!_„  _     had 

^ 

own 
part 
recollect 
shall 
should 
thank 
that 
the 
them 
these 
thing 
think 
time 
together 
usual-ly 
was 
were 
what 
when 
where 
which 
who-m 
why 

ah 

«      -        half 

\ 

0 

/ 

._-  i-   _    he 

-y- 

~^-  -   her 

( 

0 

X 

( 

.-s—^.-   home 

—  X  ..    hope 

i 

—  N  ..  but 

-—  '  change 

I 

A 

~Jy 

come 

.  knew 
.      -  -        large 

1           AM 

s 

jn 

long 
-  -  '    >•  -  -    member 

—  ->  ever 
-    for 

C  

/ 

*3 

—  /  —    O^  oh,  owe 

.-.'--.     of 

—  \  —    opportunity 

gave 
--AU  —    give-n 

_TS_ 

46  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

...  xr: —  will  would 

..... —  with  __XT__.    year 

c                                                      -. 
without  __r_ yet 

. — .v —  worth  — r...        young 


READING  EXERCISE. 


j; 


A  ....  xC  (^"-^i  . 

r 


)V 

I    -^   .       )_~    I    ^^  ^.^  I     (• 


X:  \* 

•      N  \     '      T^          'y.      /     -x- 

•_y  .......  -  -o-  .......  --      *•  v  6 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


47 


• 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.  Words  in  italics  are  written  with  abbreviations. 
It  may  be  well  for  her  to  come  home  now.  How  I  hope  he  will 
see  him  at  his  home  I  He  saw  all  of  my  hay  go  in  the  mow.  Why 
do  they  come  by  ///a/  «<•?#  way  now  ?  How  can  I  be  away  so  long 
when  he  is  on  his  way  here?  The  day  they  had  the  row  she  saw 
them  row  away  together.  When  tvill  he  be  ^«v  zwV^  my  key  which 
he  has  had  so  long  ?  Did  he  hear  of  my  new  bow  and  arrow  that  1 
had  from  Eli  Shaw?  We  may  yet  rue  the  day  Ma/  Joe  Lee  was 
here.  He  can  go  out  on  our  bay  and  row  zvz'M  ease.  She  should  'show 
shoe  to  Ann. 
LIST  OF  TWO-STEM  ABBREVIATIONS. 


"7 


acknowledge 


anything 

j*~^_^  ° 

*s»  ._     assemble-y 
become 


memorandum 


48  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

147.  It  is  not  expected  that  the  learner  will  commit  to  memory  at 
once  all  the  abbreviations  contained  in  the  foregoing  Lists,  but 
most  of  the  forms  may  be  acquired  gradually  by  practice  on  the 
sentences  of  the  preceding  and  following  Reading  and  Writing 
Exercises. 

148.  "  Dot-ing  "  for  Abbreviations. — The  final 
syllable  ing,  when  it  is  added  to  words  that  are  written 
with  abbreviations,  is  generally  indicated  by  a  light  dot 
placed  at  the  end  of  the  outline,  instead  of  using  the 
stem  Ing.  This  sign  is  called  the  "  Ing-dot  "  or  "  Dot- 
ing." Examples: 

giving  thinking         becoming          representing         remarking 

REMARK.  It  is  allowable  also  to  use  the  dot  for  final  ing  for  the 
purpose  of  shortening  some  very  long  outlines,  such  as  those  of  the 
words  indemnifying,  denominating,  etc.  But  the  general  substitution 
of  the  dot  for  the  stem  Ing,  in  writing  words  ending  with  ing,  as  is 
the  practice  of  some  phonographers,  is  not  to  be  commended.  See 
257. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


.„,„/. /...'?..*r,  r\  ,  c  ,  . 


V      o\     -f- 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


49 


.4-..  1  /  • 


,_.   .r.    V    /I. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.     Words  in  italics  are  written  with  abbreviations. 

7^<?  law  will  take  <?^f  /  w/^^«  it  has  the  name  0/  our  Governor.  I 
acknowledge  that  I  did  wrong  in  making  that  remark.  They  enjoy 
the  voyage  going  to  and  coming  from  Europe.  He  is  looking  out  for 
the  regularity  of  his  party.  He  may  become  a  member  of  our  Assem- 
bly yet.  Never  neglect  to  acknowledge  a  wrong.  Health  and  length 
of  life  go  together.  What  will  become  of  Johnnie  and  Katie  if  you 
should  go  away  for  anv  length  of  time?  They  would  feel  uneasy.  / 
was  remarking  that  she  was  neglecting  her  duty.  If  he  should  say 


5Q  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

anything  nobody  •would  ever  know  it.  / shall  \>e  too  busy  in  Janu- 
ary  and  February  to  help  you  any.  Knowledge  is  power  and  health 
is  wealth.  They  can  never  match  my  nag. 


LESSON  VIII. 
THE  BREVE-SIGNS. 

149.  Number  of  Breve-signs. — There  are  twelve 
principal  breve-signs  used  in  phonography,  the  forms  of 
which  are  here  shown: 


Of  these  signs,  Nos.  6  and  7  are  shaded ;  all  the  rest  are 
made  light. 

150.  How  to  Write  the  Breves. — The  breve-signs 
are  struck  as  follows:   Nos.  i,  6,  and  7  are  always  written 
downward,  and  No.  5  always  upward.     Nos.  2,  3,  8,  and 
9   are   usually   written   downward,  and  4,   10,  and  n, 
usually  from  left  to  right.     No.  12  is  usually  struck  from 
the  right  over  to  the  left — that  is,  with  a  movement  op- 
posite to  that  of  the  hands  of  a  clock. 

151.  Names  of  the  Breves. — Convenient  names  for  the  straight 
and  curved  breves  may  be  formed  by  adding  the  suffix  aid  (meaning 
"  like  ")to  the  sounds  of  the  consonant-stems  which,  as  regards  form^ 
direction,  and  shading,  the  breves  resemble.     Thus,  the  first  eleven 
breves  at  149  are  named  respectively  as  follows  :  Choid,  Toid,  Poid, 
Koid,  Roid,  Joid,  Doid,  Thoid,  Soid,  Noid,  and  Moid.     The  name 
of  No.  12  is  Iss. 

152.  Striking  Breves  Backward. — The  learner  should  practise 
writing  all  the  breves,  except  Choid,  Roid,  Joid,  and  Doid,  back- 
ward as  well  as  forward,  as  in  practice  they  are  written  both  ways. 
The  arrow-heads  in  the  following  cut  show  the  directions  of  pen- 
movements  : 


PHRASEOGRAPHY.  5  I 


153.  Names  of  Back-stroke  Breves.  —  The  back-stroke  hreves 
may  be  called  Up-Toid,  Up-Poid,  Left-Koid,  Up-Thoid,  Up-Soid, 
Left-Noid,  and  Left-Moid. 

POSITIONS  OF  BREVE  AND  DOT  SIGNS. 

154.  Although  dot  word-signs,  within  the  definition  just  given,  are 
not  strictly  breves,  for  the  sake  of  convenience  the  rule  for  their 
positions  will  be  stated  here,  in  connection  with  that  for  the  breves. 

155.  Rule    for    Breve-signs.  —  The    positions    of 
Breve-signs  are  as  follows: 

First  position.  —  The  height  of  a  Tee  above  the  line. 

Second  position.  —  On  the  line. 

Third  position.  —  Justbeiow  but  not  touching  the  line. 

156.  Rule  for  Dot-signs.  —  The   positions   of  dot- 
signs  are  as  follows: 

First  position.  —  The  height  of  a  Tee  above  the  line. 
Second  position.  —  Just  above  and  close  to  the  line. 
Third  position.  —  Just  below  and  close  to  the  line. 

PHRASEOGRAPHY. 

157.  In   writing   sentences   phonographically,    often- 
times two  or  more  words  are  joined   together   in  one 
sign,   without   taking  off  the  pen;  very  much  as  some 
rapid  penmen  connect  words  together  in  writing  long- 
hand.     This  method  of  grouping  words  together  into 
single  shorthand  outlines   is    called   "  Phraseography,  " 
and  is  of  great  practical  utility  to  any  phonographer,  but 
more  especially  to  the  verbatim  reporter. 


52  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

158.  Rule  of  Position. — As  a  general  thing,  in 
phrase-writing,  the  outline  of  the  first  word  of  a  phrase 
is  written  in  the  position  it  would  occupy  if  standing 
alone,  and  the  outlines  of  all  subsequent  words  are 
joined  on  after,  in  the  order  of  their  occurrence.  Ex- 
amples: 


->- 


by-which  take-them  to-me  long-ago  may-be  in-my 
159.  Exceptions. — There  are  some  exceptions  to  this  general 
rule,  in  which,  for  special  reasons,  the  outline  of  the  first  word  of  the 
phrase  is  not  written  in  position,  but  is  raised  or  lowered  so  as  to 
permit  the  outline  of  a  subsequent  word  (usually  the  second)  to  be 
written  in  its  proper  position.  Examples  of  these  exceptions  will 
be  given  farther  on. 

1 60.  Position  with  Breve  Phrase-Signs. — When 
a  phrase  is  composed  entirely  of  breve-signs,  the  general 
rule  at  158  is  followed,  the  first  breve  being  written  in  its 
proper  position  and  the  others  joined  on  after  in  the 
order  of  their  occurrence. 

161.  Position  with  Breve  and  Stem  Phrase- 
Signs. — When  a  phrase  begins  with  a  breve-word,  but 
also  contains  a  stem  word  or  words,  the  breve-sign  at  the 
beginning  is  sometimes  written  in  its  proper  position  and 
sometimes  it  follows  the  position  of  the  first  stem-word 
in  the  phrase  ;  as  is  more  fully  set  forth  in  the  next 
paragraph. 

162.  The  breve-words   that   at   the  beginning  of  a 
phrase  follow  the  general  rule  and  are  always  written  in 
their  own  positions  are  who,  have,  how,  without,  when, 
with,  what,  would,  and  is.     The  breve-words  that  at  the 
beginning  of  a  phrase  lose  their  own  positions  and  follow 
that  of  the  first  stem-word  in  the  phrase,  are  a,  an,  and, 
/,  of,  he,  we,  you-r,  and  as. 


PHRASEOGRAPHY.  53 

163.  Breve  for  "  A,"  "  An,"  or  "  And."—  In  phrase- 
writing,  any  one  of  the  words  a,  an,  or  and  may  be  written 
with  the  breve  Poid,  usually  struck  downward,  but  some- 
times upward.     Examples: 

L_   r.    /  .e.   .<:  i 

a-check          and-all        which-a        on-a  and-a        at-a 

REMARK.  In  writing  the  phrase  and-a  (Poid'-Up-Poid)  the  upper 
half  is  made  first,  being  struck  downward  to  the  right,  and  the  lower 
half  is  then  added  with  an  upward  stroke  to  the  left. 

164.  Breve  for  "The."  —  The  may  be  written  with 
either  Choid  or  Roid  at  the  end  or  in  the  middle  of 
phrases,  but  never  at  the  beginning.     Examples: 


pay-the      think-the        do-the    with-the          among-the-many 

165.  "  Ing-a,"  etc.  —  The  breve  Poid,  detached  and 
written  in  the  place  of  the  Ing-dot  or  stem  Ing,  denotes 
either  ing-a^  ing-an,  or  i;ig-and. 

166.  "  Ing-the."  —  The  breve  Choid,  detached  and 
written  in  the  place  of  the  Ing-dot  or  stem  Ing,  denotes 
ing-the. 

Examples: 


giving-a-n-d          leaving-a-n-d  thinking-the       moving-the 

167.  "  I  "  and  "  Of"  in  Phrases  may  be  written 
with  either  Roid  or  Choid,  according  to  which  makes 
the  best  junction.  Examples: 


'  \    n   <-    ^>— 

I-take          I-hope  I-can       I-think  T-make         T-was 


54  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

//•  —  \ 
-*_— 

of-a-n  of-the         of-you-r         of-which       of-my        of-our 

168.  "  Have  "  in  Phrases  is  written  usually  with  Joid 
or  Roid,  but  occasionally  with  the  stem   Vee.     Before 
the  words  /,  a,  an,  we,  you,  your,  z«  or  not,  have  is  written 
with  the  breve  Roid.     Examples: 

*  ^  1  A  ^  *>  V 

_...       .....  .  ......  _  .......  »r..m. 

have-the   bave-our    have-I      have-a     have-we         have-you-r 

169.  "  He  "  and  "  Him  "  in  Phrases  are  usually 
written  with  their  regular  signs,   Toid  and  Doid;    but 
both  of  these  words  may  be  written  with  Koid  when  that 
will  make  a  better  junction  than  the  perpendicular  breves. 
Examples: 

~     ._.      w,     .-,.    .1     .u. 

he-may         he-could         for-him     he-did        he-shall       to-him 

170.  "We"  Alone  and  in  Phrases.  —  We,  when 
standing  alone,  is  written  with  the  stem  Way3.     But  in 
phrases  we  is  generally  written  with  the  breve  Thoid  or 
Soid.     Examples: 


we-do      we-shall        we-could      we-know      if-we        should-we 

171.  Hook-breve  for  "  We."—  The  hook-breve  may 
be  used  for  we  before  Lee,  as  in  the  phrase  we  will. 

172.  "Way,"  "Away."  —  At  the  termination  of  a 
few  phrases  ending  in  way  or  away,  in  which  it  is  incon- 
venient to  join  the  stem  Way,  the  breve  Thoid  or  Soid 
may  be  used  instead.     See  121. 

173-     "You"    and    "Your."  —  In    phrases    both 
you   and  your   are   generally    written    with    the    breve 


PHRASEOGRAPHY.  55 

Noid  or  Moid;  except  that  at  the  beginning  of  phrases 
your  is  more  frequently  written  with  the  stem  Yays.  Ex- 
amples : 

•™     -I-     -/=•-     --      •-»-     -J 

you-can     you-think    you-will     thank-you     in-your     should-you 

174.  "You,"  "Your,"  and  "Would"  Added  by 
Enlarging  Breve.  —  Enlarging  Thoid  or  Soid  indicates 
that   the   word    represented    by  the    breve  (as  without  \ 
when,  with,  what,  or  would)  is  immediately  followed  by 
you  or  your  ;  and  enlarging  Moid  or  Noid  indicates  that 

the  word  it  represents  {you)  is  followed  by  would  ;  thus,-- 

cz 

.....  f.cz..  ....... 

cz 
without-you-r  when-you-r  with-you-r 

•=> 

"=5-  "0" 

what-you-r  would-you-r  you-would 

175.  "From  —  To."  —  When  from  is  followed  by  a 
word  occurring  twice  with  to  between,  both  from  and 
to   may   be  omitted  and  yet  indicated  by  writing  the 
outlines  of  the  repeated  word  twice  close  together  or 
joined. 

1  76.  "  To  "  or  "  Too  "  may  be  omitted  and  indicated 
by  dropping'the  outline  of  the  succeeding  word  entirely 
below  the  line.  This  is  called  the  Fourth-Position,  and 
is  half  the  length  of  a  Tee  below  the  Third-Position  of 
any  given  stem  or  outline. 

Examples: 


from-day-to-day        from-time-to-time         to-be  too-much 

177.  Caution.  —  Words  written  with  horizontal  stems,  as  come,  go, 
five,  make,  etc.,  should  not  be  written  in  the  Fourth-Position. 
Before  such  words,  to  is  generally  best  written  with  Tee3. 


56  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

178.  "Are"  Written  with  Ree  or  Er—  Are  is 
written  with  either  Ree  or  Er,  according  to  the  follow- 
ing rules: 

I.  Whether  standing  alone  or  joined  at  the  beginning 
of  a  phrase,  are  is  always  written  with  Ree  in  the  first 
position. 

II.  When  joined  in  phrases,  other  than  at  the  begin- 
ning, are  is  sometimes  written  with  Er,  but  never  with 
Ree. 

Examples: 


are  are-a  are-the          how-are-you       what-are 

179.  "Were"  always  Written  with  Ree.  —  Were 
is  always  written  with  its  abbreviation  Ree.  It  is  put  in 
the  third  position  when  standing  alone  or  at  the  beginning 
of  a  phrase,  or  when  it  is  the  second  word  of  a  phrase 
that  begins  with  a  breve-word  which  loses  its  own  posi- 
tion (see  162).  In  all  other  cases  were  is  joined  on  after 
the  preceding  word,  without  regard  to  position  (see  last 
six  phrase-signs  below).  Examples: 


•*X-     vX     -V- 

KEY.  Were,  were-they,  were-the  (or  I),  were-a,  were-he,  and- 
were,  he-were,  I-were,  we-were,  you-were,  it-were,  which-were-they, 
where-were,  how-were,  what-were,  who-were. 

REMARK.  Were  is  written  in  the  third  position,  instead  of  the 
second  to  which  it  naturally  belongs,  to  distinguish  it  as  much  as 
possible  by  difference  of  position  from  are  (Ree1). 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


57 


V 


c^.  ^ .^.:.  <•  K    ..(-{...• 


.10 


r«        v  i*     r^c 

s  •     \     .:.  \      -         L — .          i 

I  ^ 


x- 

U 


,- 

'• 


58  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.     Figures  in  parentheses  refer  to  paragraphs  of  this  book. 

I-thank-you  for  giving  so-much  time  to-my  boy,  and  I-hope  he- 
will  do  well  (125).  Where-were-you  ivhen-the  fire  -was  raging  at- 
my  home  ?  I-never  saw  anything  \\ke-tAem  to-my-knowledge  in-my- 
life.  That-was  so-long-a.go  that  I-can  remember  nothing  that  I-did. 
They-zvere  here  /<7«£--enough  to-do  (176)  much  damage  to-our  (176) 
park.  fFzV/vj'tftt-look-at  the  lady  from  Canada  and  say  what-yoM 
(174)  think  of  her  ?  You-were  saying  tAat-you-may-be  here  tomorrow 
to-take  (176)  tea  -with  me  and-my  family  ;  /-wish  jjv«-would  (174) 
come  so  early  that  we-may  enjoy  the  day  together.  Who-were  -with- 
you(l74)  when-you.  came  to-A'ezv-  York  (176)  from  Nevada  in  No- 
vember a  year-ago  ?  We-think  v\.-would-\>e  well  to-go  and  live  on-a 
farm  for  a  month  or  so.  Have-you-ever-had  an  opportunity  to-see 
(176)  how-m\ic\i  you-cottld  do  in-a  day  when-yon  were  well  and  hearty 
("5)? 

LESSON  IX. 
HOOKED  STEMS. 


P\ 

(J 


180.  Hooks,  Initial   and    Final.  —  Hooks   may  be 
made  at  either  end  of  any  of  the  consonant-signs  of  the 
alphabet.     When  made  at  i\\e  finish  of  a  stem,  they  are 
called  "  Final-hooks  "  ;  and  when  made  at  the  beginning, 
they  are  called  "  Initial-hooks."     They  may  be  made 
on  either  side  of  straight  stems,  but  on  only  one  side, 
the  inner  side,  of  curved  stems. 

181.  Hooked-stems.  —  Stems  with    hooks   attached 
are  called  "  Hooked-stems." 

182.  How  to  Write  Hooked-stems.  —  A  hooked- 
stem  is  always  made  with  one  continuous  movement  of 
the  pen  from  the  beginning  of  the  stroke  to  its  end.     It 


THE   EN-HOOK.  59 

is  not  proper  to  first  make  the  stem  and  then  afterwards 
add  on  the  hook  by  a  separate  operation  of  the  pen. 

183.  Two  Sizes  of  Hooks. — There  are  two  sizes 
of  hooks  used  on  stems,  being  called  "  Large-hooks" 
and  "  Small-hooks." 

REMARK.  The  learner  should  form  the  habit  of  making  the  large- 
hooks  of  a  uniform  and  quite  large  size,  and  the  small-hooks  of  a 
uniform  and  quite  small  size  ;  so  that  there  will  never  be  any  doubt 
as  to  which  size  is  intended. 


FINAL-HOOKS. 

184.  Vowel  Read  before  Final-hook. — Any  vowel- 
sign  written  to  a  stem  with  final-hook,  whether  it  stands 
before  the  stem  or  after  it,  must  always  be  read  before 
the  hook.  Consequently  when  a  word  terminates  with  a 
vowel-sound  its  outline  cannot  end  with  a  final-hook. 


THE  EN-HOOK. 
/  J  \ 

/  J  \ 

r        C         v^ 
c       (        ^ 


60  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

185.  N  may  be  added  to  any  consonant-stem  by  a 
small  final-hook.  On  straight  stems  it  is  turned  on  the 
left  side  of  downstrokes,  and  on  the  under  side  of  right- 
strokes.  On  curved  stems  it  is  turned  on  the  inner  side. 
Examples : 

/I    j-     *     „.    x-1'     C     5± 

join          tone  open  gain  run  then  fine 

even  known          shun          one         mine         hen         lean 

\  N 


/ 


taken        ribbon         organ        machine          punish        remaining 

186.  Compound-stems  and  their   Names. — Compound-stems 
are  formed  from  the  simple-stems  in  three  ways,  as  follows  :  (i)  By 
the  addition  of  hooks  to  stems,  (2)  By  variations  in  the  length  of 
stems,  and,  (3)  By  both  the  addition  of  hooks  and  variations  in  the 
length  of  stems   combined.      The   names   of   compound-stems   are 
usually  formed  by  combining  the  short  vowel-sound  /  with  the  con- 
sonant-sounds represented  by  the  compound-stems,  in  such  a  way  that 
in  each  case  it  will  best  facilitate  the  pronunciation  of  the  entire 
group.     There  are  a  few  exceptions  to  this  rule  which  should  be 
carefully  noted.     They  are  the  names  of  the  downward  and  upward 
stems,  Ish,  Shee,  El,  Lee,  Er,  Ree,  and  of  Ith,  Ing,  and  Ess,  each 
having  a  hook  attached. 

187.  Names  of  En-hook  Stems. — The  names  of  the  En-hook 
stems,  respectively,  are  as  follows:  Chen,  Jen,  Ten,  Den,  Pen,  Ben, 
Ken,  Gen  (G  hard  as  in  "again"),  Ren,  El'n  (downstroke),  Yen, 
Ith'n,  Then,  Fen,  Ven,  Nen,  Ing'n,  Sheen  (upstroke),  Ish'n  (down- 
stroke),  Zhen,  Ess'n,  Zen,  Ern,  Wen,  Men,  Hen,  and  Leen  (upstroke). 

188.  "  Simple-end  "  and  "  Hook-end."— The  simple-end  of  a 
stem  is  the  end  which  has  no  hook  or  other  attachment.     Both  ends 
of  any  of  the  stems  of  the  Phonographic  Alphabet  are  simple.     The 
stem  of  the  word  join  has  its  upper  end  simple  and  its  lower  end 
hooked. 


THE   EN-HOOK. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.  Whenever  in  the  Writing  Exercises  a  word  is  inclosed 
in  brackets,  [  ],  it  means  that  the  outline  of  that  word  may  be  found 
in  the  corresponding  Reading  Exercise,  and  that  it  is  a  guide  to  the 
writing  of  the  word  next  preceding  the  bracketed  word.  See  the 
last  words  in  each  of  these  two  exercises. 

189.  June,  atone,  done  or  dun,  pain,  been  or  bin,  coin,  gown,  run, 
thin,  than,  fun,  vain  or  vein,  shown,  arraign,  wine,  men,  moon,  loan 
or  lone  ;  token,  turn,  deaden,  domain,  pigeon,  obtain,  beacon,  burn, . 
kitchen,  cotton,  gallon,  retain,  refine,  orphan,  famine,  enjoin,  shaken, 
remain,  awaken,  mutton,  marine,  legion,  laden,  linen  ;  pardon,  bar- 
gain ;  Danish,  county,  finely,  window,  penman,  condign.  Allen, 
Byron,  Newton,  Macon,  Martin,  Raritan,  Hancock,  Camden,  Yadkin, 
Barnum,  Morgan,  widen,  weaken,  hidden,  haven,  human,  Hampton, 
Whedon  [wheaten]. 


62  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

THE  EFF  OR  VEE  HOOK. 
/  I  X  _^ 

I  t  X          _^ 

190.  Either  /  or  v  may  be  added  to  any  stiaight 
stem  by  a  small  final  hook  turned  on  the  side  opposite 
the  En-hook.  This  hook  is  not  written  on  curved  stems. 
Examples: 


_£..     I'      N,       ^     [>' 

chief        deaf        pave          rough          turf         define        poverty 

191.  Names  of  Ef  or  Vee  Hook  Stems.  —  The  names  of  the  Ef 
or  Vee  Hook  stems  are  as  follows:  Chef,  Jef,  Tef,  Def,  Pef,  Bef, 
Kef,  Gef  (G  hard  as  in  "  gaff"),  Ref. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

192.  Chafe,  tough,  dive,  cave,  reef,  rave,  tariff,  toughen,  outfit, 
ievote,  divide,  define,  devisee,  cover,  referee,  reefer,  roughly,  rival 
or  rifle,  adverb,  divinity,  devourer,  beverage,  rivalry,  revolve,  cavalry, 
riffraff.  Gough,  Tiffin,  David,  Dover,  Baffin. 


HOOKS   IN   PHRASE-WRITING.  63 

193.     En-hook  Abbreviations. — The  following  ab- 
breviations contain  the  En-hook: 


began       begin        begun       beneficial-ly      between        financially 


general-ly         heaven         opinion         pecuniary         phonographer 


phonographic  phonography  republican  within 

194.  Ef  or  Vee  Hook  Abbreviations.  —  The  fol- 
lowing are  abbreviations  that  contain  the  Ef  or  Vee 
Hook: 


before         develop        differ         endeavor       govern         refer-ence 

HOOKS  IN  PHRASE-WRITING. 

195.  Besides  the  use  of  the  hooks  to  represent  con- 
sonant-sounds in  writing  words  standing  alone,  they  are 
also  sometimes  employed  in  phrase-  writing  to  indicate 
one  or  more  entire  words. 

196.  En-hook  in  Phrases.  —  The  words  an,  and, 
and  own.  may  be  written  with  the  En-hook.     The  En- 
hook  is  also  used  for  than  after  comparatives,  and  some- 
times for  been. 

197.  Ef  or  Vee  Hook  in  Phrases.  —  The  words  of 
and  have  may  be  written  with  the  Vee-hook. 


64 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


EXAMPLES  OF  EN  AND  VEE  HOOK  PHRASES. 


at-an 


to-have 


if-an 


could-have 


off-and-on 


out-of 


t 


part-ot 
t 


which-have         who-have 


I-have 


198.  Vee-hook  on  Curved  Stems.  —  A  large  final- 
hook  on  curved  stems  is  sometimes  used  for  v.  But  such 
use  of  this  hook  (which  is  identical  in  form  and  size  with 
the  Shun-hook  on  curves)  is  limited  to  writing  the  words 
have  and  of  and  the  termination  ever  (353).  Examples: 


may-have  know-of       they-have          way-of          will-have 


HOOKS   IN   PHRASE-WRITING.  65 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

199.  In  my  opinion,  ivithin-a  minute  of  ^a//"-an-hour  (196)  ago, 
Vaughan,  the  phonographer,  began  taking-^fo  talk  down  in  phonogra- 
phy with-a  phonographic  pen.  Martin  Chapman  of  Camden  began 
phonography  the  beginning  (148)  0/"June  a  year-ago,  and  now  ^-has 
become  a  fine  phonograp her,  and  can  take-down  all  that  Rev.  Reuben 
Newton  of  Orange  can  say  in-a  2O-minute  talk,  from  opening  to- 
finish  (176).  One  evening  in  June,  between  nine  and  ten,  Ellen 
Logan  began  running  up-and-down  (196)  the  corn,  thinking  (148)  it 
fine  fun  ;  -when  Nathan  Allen  ran  out-of  his  barn  with-a  long  rattan 
which  he-had  hidden  (115)  and  had  handy;  and  now  the  foolish 
maiden  will  remain  within  her  kitchen  window,  in  high  dudgeon, 
moaning  and  repining  at  mundane  venom  and  villainy,  and  wishing 
she  could  go  to-a  nunnery. 


66  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  X. 
THE  SHUN-HOOK. 

i  (j  \>  -3 

L  I  NO  _- 

Cr       0 

c      c 

c^  0 

^         0 


200.  The  syllable  shun  or  zhun  may  be  added  to  any 
consonant-stem,  either  straight  or  curved,  by  a  large 
final-hook,  turned  on  the  Ef-hook  side  of  straight  stems, 
and  on  the  inner  side  of  curved  stems.  Examples: 


option          auction         effusion         ovation        notion        Parisian 

201.  In  the  common  orthography  these  syllables  are  written  with 
various  combinations  of  letters,  as  shown  in  the  following  words  : 
na-iion,  ten-sion,   fu-sion,  mi-sston,   arte-stan,    apti-fian,    cu-sSiion, 
Plio-fion,  gen-tian,  etc. 

202.  Names  of  Shun-hook  Stems.  —  The  names  of  the  Shun- 
hook   stems  are   as   follows  :    Cheshun,  Jeshun,    Teshun,   Deshun, 
P&hun,  Beshun,  K^shun,  Geshun  (G  hard  as  in  "  gash"),  Reeshun, 
Elshun  (downward),  Yeshun,  Ithshun,    Dheshun,  Feshun,  VSshun, 
N^shun,  Ingshun,  Sheeshun  (upward),  Ishshun,  Zheshun,  Es-shun, 
Zeeshun,  Ershun,  Weshun,  M&hun,  Heshun,  and  Leeshun  (upward). 


TER  OR  THER  HOOK.  67 

THE  TER  OR  THER  HOOK. 
</  J  ^  -7  ^ 

(/  J  ^  ^>     ' 

203.  Any  one  of  the  syllables  ter,  tor,  ture,  or  ther  may 
be  added  to  any  straight  stem  by  a  large  final-hook 
turned  on  the  En-hook  side. 

204.  Name. — This  hook  is  usually  called  the  "  Ter-hook." 

205.  There  is  no  Ter-hook  on  curved  stems.     See  260. 

206.  Names  of  Ter-hook  Stems. — The  names  of  the  Ter-hook 
stems  are  as  follows :    Chetter,  Jetter,   Tetter  or  Tether,   Better, 
Fetter  or  Pether,  Better  or  Bother,  Ketter,  Getter  or  Gather,  and 
Retter  or  Rgther. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

REMARK.  Note  that  all  words  ending  in  ation  belong  to  the  sec- 
ond position. 

207.  Caution,  gather,  Russian,  writer,  petition,  chapter,  vocation, 
victor,  ambition,  embitter,  location,  lecture  [rupture],  dictation,  dic- 
tator, additional,  dictionary,  vision,  motion,  allusion,  attention,  ad- 
mission, invasion,  assumption,  population,  redemption,  injunction, 
invention,  visionary. 


68  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

208.  Shun  and  Ter  Hook  Abbreviations. — The 

following  are  abbreviations  which  contain  the  Shun  and 
Ter  hooks: 

L          "°  '         \ 

generation  objection  recollection  publication 


representation  revolutionary  altogether 

209.  Ther-hook  in  Phrases.  —  The  words  there, 
their,  and  other  may  be  written  with  the  Ther-hook. 
Examples  : 


but-there  at-their  each-other  can-there          by-their 

READING  EXERCISE. 
1  "X-        (      /       /-    '  -± 


,.v,, 


J-  \  ...  .<?. 


INITIAL-HOOKS. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

210.  /-have-no  objection  to-Ats  paying  much  attention  to-their  edu- 
cation. They-have  a  notion,  in  vacation,  to-buy  (176)  a  dictionary 
at  auction.  7-have-a  recollection  that  additional  objection  waj-taken 
io-his  publication  as  being  altogether  revolutionary.  Would-yoM 
rather  be  a  writer  of  national  renown  than  an  actor  of  aspiration, 
and  have-a  regular  invitation  to  cater  to-one  generation  of-lhe  Ameri- 
can population  in  daily  representation  of-a  highly  emotional  comedy  ? 
On-one  occasion  an  admission  was-taken  that  led  to-a  motion  for  re- 
jection of -his  invention.  My  daughter  is-a  better  writer  of  fiction 
than  she-zV  arithmetician  or  debater. 

LESSON  XI. 
INITIAL-HOOKS. 

211.  Order  of  Writing  and  Reading. — Although 
initial-hooks  are  written   before   making  the   stems   to 
which  they  belong,  yet  they  are  read  after  such  stems. 

212.  Vowels  and  Initial-Hook  Stems. — Vowel- 
signs  written  to  initial-hook  stems  are  read  as  follows:  If 
placed  before  the  stem,  the  vowel  is  read  before  both 
stem  and  hook ;  if  placed  after  the  stem,  it  is  read  after 
both  stem  and  hook. 

REMARK.  It  will  be  remembered  that  a  vowel-sign  placed  after  a 
stem  with  a  final  hook  is  read  after  the  stem  and  before  the  hook 
(184). 


7O  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

EL  AND  ER  HOOKS  ON  STRAIGHT  STEMS. 


n 
r  i 


213.  Either  I  or  r  may  be  added  after  any  straight 
stem  by  a  small  initial-hook.  For  /  it  is  turned  on  the 
right  side  of  downstrokes,  and  on  the  upper  side  of 
rightstrokes.  For  r  it  is  turned  on  the  side  opposite  the 
El-hook.  The  following  examples  illustrate  the  use  of 
the  El  and  Er  hooks,  and  show  them  in  contrast  with 
each  other  : 


plea      pry         ugly          agree         clue        gray         apply          ably 


V,. 


prayer 


breath 


globe         betray          voucher       teacher 


topple       robber       joggle        richer         regal        rigor        ladder 

214.  Imperfect  Hooks.—  When  hooks  occur  in  the  middle  of 
outlines,  it  is  not  always  possible  to  shape  them  perfectly.  Some- 
times the  tip  of  one  stem  will  form  a  part  of  a  hook  on  another  stem  ' 


EL  AND   ER   HOOKS   ON   STRAIGHT   STEMS,      JT. 

and   at  other  times  a  mere  offset  or  shoulder  will  be  all  that  can 
readily  be  indicated  as  constituting  a  hook.     Examples : 


rabble        joker       riddle        euchre       ladle        escrow        needle 

215.  The  Diagrams  of  the  Hands. — By  holding  up  the  Left 
hand  before  us,  and  bending  the  end  of  the  first  finger,  we  get  the  L 
hook.  By  holding  up  the  Right  hand,  and  bending  the  first  finger  in 
the  same  way,  we  get  the  R  hook. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

216.  Blow,  brew,  clay,  crow,  able,  apple,  odor,  pledge,  prairie, 
trial,  truck,  climb  or  clime,  crumb,  blemish,  clothing,  triumph,  table, 
dicker,  double,  paper,  girl  [curl],  fiber,  vocal,  wager,  waddle,  employ, 
labor,  label,  trouble,  broker,  blown  [plain],  brain,  brief,  glove, 
platter,  traitor,  decline,  improve,  plunge,  Browning,  attraction, 
tribune. 


72  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

EL  AND  ER  HOOKS  ON  CURVED  STEMS 

tf^C      0  C 

cr     CC 

00 
0) 


217.  Either  /  or  r  may  be  added  after  any  curved 
stem  by  an  initial-hook,  the  hook  being  made  large  for  / 
and  small  for  r.  Both  hooks  are  written  on  the  inner 
side  of  the  curve.  Examples: 


fly          fry          Ethel          through  either         honor         only 


error      oral      flame        frame        channel       tenor       laughingly 
READING  EXERCISE. 


EL  AND   ER   HOOKS   ON   CURVED    STEMS.         73 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Flee,  free,  awful,  offer,  author,  easel,  flood,  Friday,  thrive,  flung, 
energy,  shrub,  flurried,  French,  joyful,  dinner,  bushel,  final,  shiver, 
manner,  lover,  woeful,  frighten,  freeman,  fraction,  ownership, 
pleasure,  flavor,  grammar,  floral,  framer,  thrown,  ranger  [granger]. 

218.  The  Names  of  the  Er-hook  Stems  are  as  follows:  Cher, 
Jer,  Ter,  Der,  Per,  Ber,  Ker,  Ger  (G  hard),  Reer,  El'r,  Yer,  Ther 
or  Ith'r,  Dher,  Fer,  Ver,  Ner,  Ing'r,  Sheer,  Ish'r,  Zher,  Es'r,  Zer, 
Er'r,  Wer,  Mer,  Her,  Leer.     The  names  of  Er-hook  stems  which 
also  have  final  hooks,  as  the  outlines  of  brain,  brief,  crave,  Grecian, 
traitor,  etc.,  are  formed  thus:  Br£n,  Bre"f,  Krev,  Gr£shun,  Trotter, 
etc. 

219.  The  Names  of  the  El-hook  Stems  are  as  follows  :  Chel, 
Jel,  Tel,  Del,  Pel,  Bel,  Kel,  Gel  (G  hard),  Reel,  El'l,  Yel,  Thel  or 
Ith'l,  Dhel,  Fel,  Vel,  Nel,  Ing'l,  Sheel,  Ish'l,  Zhel,  Es'l,  Zel,  Erl, 
Wei,   Mel,  Hel,  Leel.     The  names  of  El-hook  stems  which  also 
have  final  hooks,  as  the  outlines  of  clean,  blown,  bluff,  blotter,  flown, 
etc.,  are  formed  thus  :  Klgn,  Bl^n,  Bl£f,  Blotter,  FleX  etc. 

220.  Breve-hay  before  Initial-hooks.  —  Breve-hay  may  be  joined 
before  any  stem  with  initial-hook,  and  in  practice  the  following 
plan  is  found  to  be  best  :  Before  any  downward  stem  with  initial- 
hook,  use  Toid  ;  before  any  rightward  stem  with  initial-hook,  use 
Koid  ;  before  Mel,  use  Up-Toid.    Examples  : 


hobble         Hebrew          hover  Henry        hammer        hovel 

221.  Stenotypy.  —  Phonographic  characters  and  outlines  may  be 
represented  by  the  ordinary  printing  letters  in  the  following  manner  : 

1.  All  stem-signs  are  represented   by  capital  letters,  —  (a)  down- 
strokes  and  horizontals  by  ROMAN  CAPITALS,  and  (l>)  upstrokes 
by  ITALIC  CAPITALS. 

2.  All  other  signs  that  are  used  for  consonants,  as  breves,  hooks, 
etc.,  as  well  as  the  signs  for  the  simple  vowels,  are  represented  by 
lower-case  or  small  letters.     The  diphthongs,  however,  are  repre- 
sented by  small  capitals. 

3.  A  hyphen  between  two  stenotypes  indicates  that  the  signs  they 
represent  are  to  be  joined  together  in  writing. 


74  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

REMARK.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  stems  Shee,  Lee,  and  Ree, 
which  are  upstroke  stems  slanting  to  the  right,  are  represented  by 
capitals  that  slant  to  the  right  (SH,  L,  X).  See  Alphabet,  page  x., 
fourth  and  eighth  columns,  and  paragraph  51.  The  double  letters 
ZH  and  DH  are  used  respectively  for  the  heavy  mates  of  Ish  and 
Ith,  and  TH  is  given  exclusively  to  Ith. 

Examples :  CH,  J,  T,  D,  P,  B,  K,  G,  R,  L  (El  as  in  fail),  Y, 
TH,  DH,  F,  V,  N,  NG,  SH  (Shee  as  in  bushy),  SH,  ZH,  S,  Z,  R, 
W,  M,  H,  L  (Lee  as  in  lay,  follow) ;  Pn,  Fn,  Tf,  tfv,  Kshn,  Nshn, 
Vzhn,  Ptr,  .tfthr,  PI,  Pr,  Fl,  Fr,  Kw  ;  B-K,  N-M,  Pn-NG,  Dv-N, 
P-Pr;  h-M,  h-D,  w-CH,  w-K,  y-M,  y-TH  ;  Pa  (fay),  Ma  (ma), 
Boi  (boy),  Bra-K  (break),  Bl-oM  (bloom). 

LESSON  XII. 
SPECIAL  VOCALIZATION. 

222.  An   ordinary    vowel-sign — dot,    dash,    or   diph- 
thong-angle— placed  after  a  stem  with  an  initial-hook,  is 
read  after  both  stem  and  hook  (212).     Hence  it  follows 
that  in  writing  such  words  as  toil,  tire,  pail,  power,  fail, 
fire,  etc.,  their  outlines,  to  be  capable  of  being  vocalized 
in  the  usual  way,  must  be  formed  of  stem-signs,  and  the 
El  and  Er  hooks  cannot  be  used. 

223.  But,   for   the  purpose  of    securing  briefer    and 
better  outlines  for  a  considerable  number  of  words,  some 
of  which  are  of  frequent  recurrence,  by  the  use  of  initial- 
hook  stems,  even  when  there  is  a  distinct  vowel-sound 
between  the  consonants  they  represent,    a  method   of 
special  vocalization  is  provided,  by  which  such  vowels 
may  be  indicated  so  as  to  be  read  between  a  stem  and 
its  initial-hook.     It  is  as  follows: 

I.  The  Six  Dot- Vowels  are  written  with  a  small 
circle  put  in  the  three  regular  vowel-places  at  the  side 
of  the  initial-hook  stem;  being  usually  written  before  the 
stem  for  the  long-vowels,  ah,  a,  e,  and  after  the  stem  for 


SPECIAL  VOCALIZATION.  75 

the  short-vowels,  a,  e,  t.  But  if,  because  of  the  form  of 
the  outline,  it  is  more  convenient  to  write  the  circle  on 
one  side  of  a  stem  than  on  the  other,  it  may  be  placed 
on  that  side,  whether  the  vowel  is  long  or  short.  See 
the  word  cheerful^  in  which  the  circle  is  placed  after  the 
stem  for  the  long-vowel  e. 

II.  Dash-Vowels  and  Diphthongs  are  written  with 
their  ordinary  signs,  and  in  their  usual  positions,  but  are 
struck  across  or  at  the  end  of  the  initial-hook  stem. 

Examples: 

I1- _.._. 


car       care        Yale       tell         shear         till  yarn        cheerful 

,<  --        -    -  /c 


call     roll       null       full       wire      yowl      cure       learn      warn 
READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

224.  Carbon,  shell,  mark,  church,  more,  yawl,  shore,  harm,  Nor- 
way, journal,  harbor  [Harper],  normal,  curb,  lurch,  torture,  para- 
graph, sharp,  Fulton,  full,  termination,  valve,  hark,  attorney, 
marble. 


76  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

REMARK.  The  primary  use  of  the  initial-hooks  for  /  and  r  is  to 
represent  these  two  liquids  when  they  occur  after  certain  consonants 
with  which  they  blend  and  form  double-consonants,  which  are  uttered 
by  a  single  effort  of  the  voice.  They  are  so  employed  under  the  fol- 
lowing circumstances  :  (r)  When  there  is  a  vowel-sound  heard  after 
the  liquid,  but  none  immediately  before  it, — as  in  the  words  play, 
pry,  tree,  clay,  black,  grope,  betray,  flee,  fray,  throw,  shred,  defray, 
apply,  ugly,  only,  kingly,  etc.,  and,  (2)  when  there  is  no  vowel-sound 
heard  after  the  liquid  in  the  same  syllable,  and  the  only  vowel-sound 
heard  immediately  before  it  is  the  slight  sound  that  is  produced  by  or 
during  the  sounding  of  the  two  blended  consonants  themselves, — as 
in  the  words  apple,  able,  addle,  odor,  acre,  ogle,  double,  tunnel,  neigh- 
bor, favor,  bushel,  etc.  Therefore,  the  employment  of  initial-hooks 
for  /  and  r  when  distinct  vowel-sounds  immediately  precede  them, 
instead  of  the  stem-signs  for  these  consonants,  in  the  manner  just 
explained,  is  a  matter  of  license  merely,  and  as  such  is  subject  to  con- 
siderations of  expediency  only,  and  is  to  be  regarded  altogether  from 
the  standpoint  of  the  practical  shorthand  writer  and  his  needs  ;  and 
so  it  would  seem  that  ifo  general  rule  governing  their  use  is  possible. 
Attempts  have  been  made,  however,  by  teachers  of  phonography  to 
devise  rules  which  will  enable  one  to  always  determine  when,  in 
writing  words  of  this  class,  the  El  and  Er  hooks  should  and  should 
not  be  used,  but  heretofore  without  satisfactory  results.  Either  the 
rules  have  not  been  in  harmony  with  the  practice  of  experienced 
phonographers,  or  the  exceptions  have  been  so  numerous  that  the 
rules  were  of  no  value.  The  reason  of  this  is  that  there  are  so  many 
conflicting  elements  in  the  problem  that  it  is  impossible  to  make  a 
rule  that  will  cover  even  a  majority  of  the  cases.  Each  stem  is  a  law 
unto  itself.  If  the  stem-sign  of  a  liquid  does  not  join  easily  after  a 
particular  stem,  then  the  hook  is  apt  to  be  used, — otherwise  not. 
Thus,  to  illustrate,  the  downstroke  Er  does  not  make  a  good  junc- 
tion with  Kay,  so  in  nearly  all  outlines  containing  the  consonants 
kr,  with  intervening  vowel-sound,  the  hook  is  used  (Kr) ;  while,  on 
the  other  hand,  the  same  stem,  Er,  does  make  a  good  junction  with 
Tee,  and  hence  we  find  that  the  hook  is  sparingly  used  for  tr  when 
there  is  an  intervening  vowel.  And,  besides,  it  may  be  added,  often- 
times the  necessity  of  avoiding  the  use  of  like  outlines  for  conflicting 
words  has  something  to  do  with  determining  when  the  hooks  may 
and  may  not  be  so  used.  The  author  is  of  the  opinion,  therefore, 


SPECIAL   VOCALIZATION.  77 

that  the  student  will  find  it  easier  to  learn  separately  the  various 
word-outlines  coming  under  the  head  of  "  special  vocalization,"  than 
to  attempt  to  apply  to  them  any  rule  or  set  of  rules  that  has  as  yet 
been  suggested.  To  illustrate  what  is  meant  in  the  foregoing  state- 
ment, and  to  assist  the  learner  in  the  work  of  memorizing  outlines, 
the  following  list  of  words  is  given,  with  directions  as  to  the  proper 
way  to  write  them:  Use  CHI  in  '  challenge,  child,  children,  chil- 
blain,'—CH-L  in  '  chill,  chilled,  chilling,'— CH-Z  in  'chilly,  chilli- 
ness,'— CHr  in  '  charitable,  charm,  charter,  chairman,  cheerful, 
chirp,  church,  churn,' — CH-R  in  '  char,  chart,  chair,  cheer,  chore,' — 
CH-A*  in  '  chary,  cheery,  chirrup,' — Jr  in  '  jargon,  German,  germain, 
George,  journal,  journey,  jurisdiction,' — J-R  in  'jar,  jeer,' — Tl  in 
'  tell,  telegraph,  telephone,  telescope,  till  (prep,  or  conj.\  told,  tol- 
erable,'— T-L  in  '  tall,  tale,  tile,  till  (v.  or  «.),  toil,  toll,  tool,' — Tr 
in  '  term,  terminate,  torment,  toward,  towards,  torture,  turtle,' — 
T-R  in  '  tar,  tare,  tire,  tore,  tier,' — T-J?  in  '  tarry,  terrible,  torch, 
torpid,  tory,  tariff,' — Dr  in  '  dark,  dear  (in  phrases),  direct,  dirk, 
dormant,  duration,  during,' — D-R  in  '  dare,  dear  (not  in  phrases),  deer, 
dirt,  door,' — D-A*  in  'darn,  dearth,  derange,  derrick,  dirty,  Doric,' — 
PI  in  '  palpable,  palpitation,  pilgrim,  political,' — P-L  in  '  pal,  Paul, 
pile,  pole,  pool,  pull,' — P-Z  in  '  paltry,  pulley,  pillage,' — Pr  in  '  para- 
graph, parcel,  parliament,  parlor,  partial,  particle,  partner,  per,  per- 
ceive, perfect,  pervert,  perhaps,  perjury,' — P-R  in  'par,  pare,  pour, 
purr,  poor,' — P-A3  in  '  pure,  parch,  parry,  perish,' — Kl  in  '  calamity, 
calculation,  call,  calumny,  Calvin,  coal,  cold,  collect,  college,  col- 
umn,'— K-L  in  '  coil,  keel,  kill,' — Kr  in  '  car,  care,  core,  cure,  occur, 
cornice,  corporation,  cur,  curb,  curve,  curtain,' — K-A?  in  '  carry, 
curry,  corn,  current,  curly,' — Gl  in  '  galvanic,  gold,  Gould,  gulf,' — 
G-Lin  'Gaul,  guile,  gale,  goal,  gull,' — G-Zin  'galley,  gully,  gallop,' 
— Gr  in  'garden,  gargle,  garland,  garlic,  garment,  garnet,  garnish, 
gorgeous,  gormand,  guard,  guardian,  regard,  gurgle,' — G-R  in  'gear, 
gore,' — G-A? in  'garret,  garrison,  geared,  gored,  gorge,  Gerry,  gory,' 
— A'lin  '  rail,  roll,  real,  rule,  realm,  realty,  relapse,  relative,  relevant, 
relief,  rely,' — A'-L  in  '  roil,  royal,' — R-L  in  '  rally,  relay,' — Yl  in 
'  yawl,  Yale,  yell,  yowl,  yield,  Yule,' — Yr  in  '  yarn,  yard,  yearn, 
yerk,  yore,' — THr  in  'thermometer,  third,  thirst,  Thursday,' — DHr 
in  '  their,  there,' — Fl  in  '  full,  fully,  philosophy,  fulcrum,  fulgent,' 
— F-L  in  'fall,  file,  foil,  foul,  fail,  fell,  feel,  fill,'— F-Z  in  'fal- 
low, follow,  folly,  fulsome,' — Fr  in  '  farther,  far  (in  phrases),  farth- 


78  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

ingj  ferment,  fertile,  fervent,  forge,  forger,  former,  formidable, 
fortify,  fortune,  furbish,  furnish,' — F-R  in  '  far,  fare,  fire,  fore,  fur, 
fear,  farm,' — F~J?  in  '  farrow,  farina,  ferry,  ferocious,  fury,  fern,'— 
VI  in  'value,  valve,  velvet,  volcano,  volume,  vulgar,' — V-L  in  'vile, 
vale,  veal,  ville,' — V-Z  in  'valley,  volley,  vilify,  villany,  volition,' — 
Vr  in  '  very,  verb,  verbatim,  verge,  verify,  virtue,  vortex,' — Nl  in 
'  null,  nullity,  nullify,  analogy,  analytic,  enlighten,  only,  enlist,' — 
N-L  in  '  Nile,  nail,  kneel,  knell,  knoll,' — N-Z  in  '  Nelly,  newly, 
inlay,  annually,' — Nr  in  '  narcotic,  narrative,  near,  nerve,  enrich,  nor, 
normal,  north,  nourish,  nurse,  nurture,' — X-R  in  '  nigher,  ne'er, 
newer,' — SHI  in  'shawl,  shell,  shelf,  shoulder,  shield,' — SHr  in 
'  share,  sharp,  shark,  sheriff,  shirk,  shirt,  shore,  short,' — Sr  in  '  assort, 
assortment,  assert,  assertion,' — Wl  in  '  while,  whale,  wheel  (234), 
awhile,' — Wr  in  '  war,  ward,  wear,  wore,  warm,  warn,  wire,  word, 
work,  worm,' — Ml  in  'male,  mail  (».),  mile,  malpractice,  maltreat- 
ment, melancholy,' — M-L  in  '  mail  (v.),  mailed,  mailing,  mill, 
maul,' — Mr  in  '  marble,  mark,  marshal,  mercenary,  merchant,  more, 
morgue,  morn,  mortgage,  mourn,  murder,  murmur,  mere,  merely,' — 
M-R  in  'mar,  mare,  mire,' — M-,/?  in  '  margin,  March,  marsh,' — Hr 
in  '  harbor,  hard,  hare,  heark,  harm,  harmony,  heart,  hire,  hurt,' — 
Toid-J?  in  '  harness,  hardy,  hearty,  harp,  harvest,' — Lr  in  '  lard,  lark, 
learn,  lord,  lurch,  lurk,' — Z-R  in  '  lower,  liar,  leer,  allure.' 

WAY-HOOK  ON  STRAIGHT  STEMS. 

225.  The  sound  of  Way  may  be  added  after  any 
straight  stem  by  a  large  initial-hook  on  the  El-hook  side. 
Examples: 


tweak        quill        quasi        guava          twain        dwarf         inquiie 
226.  Names  of  Way-hook  Stems. — These  stems  may  be  named 
by  inserting  the  sound  of  Way  into  the  names  of  the  respective  sim- 
ple stems,  thus,  Twee,  Dwee,  Pwee,  Bwee,  Kway,  Gway,  etc. 

REMARK.  In  phrase-writing,  a  large  initial-hook  on  the  Er-hook 
side  of  straight  stems  may  be  used  to  indicate  that  the  sound  of  Yay 
follows.  This  is  called  the  Yay-hook,  and  its  use  will  be  explained 
farther  on. 


INITIAL-HOOK   ABBREVIATIONS. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


79 


,ru.C.  "TT  ^  V  ^ 

•  I  f~» 

^  y  ±u  M: 

^  f. . 

IT.TT. "v^r.. _ J rr 'T:.. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

227.  Twig,  twill,  dwell,  quiet,  quake,  query,  equal,  quash,  queer, 
quench,  twine,  queen,  Gwynn,  quaff,  equator,  twinge,  quotation, 
quibble,  quaker,  unequal,  liquid. 

228.  Initial-Hook  Abbreviations. — Each  of  the 
following  abbreviations  contains  an  initial  hook: 

already  belief-ve  belong  brethren  brother  capable  children 
collect  correct  degree  deliver  Dr.  during  dwell  Jr. 
language  larger  Mr.  number  people  practicable  practical 

\  \      ^v 

-v-    -y    -^ --•- 

practice      principal-le       privilege     probable-y      qualify      religion 

229.  El-Hook   in  Phrases. — The  words  all  and 
will  may  be  written  with  the  El-hook. 


go  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

230.  Er-Hook  in  Phrases. — The  words  are,  our, 
and  or  may  be  written  with  the  Er-hook. 

Examples: 

,1 HQ_      C        7   _^..>_J^. 

at-all    it-will    for-all    they-will  which-are    you-are    by-our     on  or 

231.  "There,"   "Their,"   "Other,"  and  "At- 
all." — The  words  there  and  their  are  written  with  the 
stem  Dher  in  the  second-position,  and  the  word  other, 
with  Dher  in  the  first-position.     According  to  the  general 
rule  of  position,  there  and  their  belong  to  the  first-posi- 
tion, and  other  to  the  second.     But  because  of  the  liabil- 
ity in  rapid  writing  of  the  word  there,   if  written  with 
Dher1,  to  conflict  with  the  phrase  at-all  (Tel1),  there  and 
their  are  made  to  exchange  positions  with  other,  as  the 
latter  word  does  not  so  conflict  with  that  phrase. 

232.  "  Over"  and  "Owner." — Also,  for  practical 
reasons,  the  words  over  and  owner  are  written  in  the  first- 
position  (Ver1  and  Ner')  instead  of  the  second.     See 
over  and  own  in  List  of  Words  and  Phrases  Specially 
Distinguished. 

233.  "Very." — The  word  very,  because  of  its  fre- 
quency, is  written  with  the  single  stem  Ver,  and  not  with 
the  two  stems  Vee-Ree. 

234.  "While,"  "Whale,"  "Wheel."— The woids 
while,  whale,  and  wheel  are  written  with  the  stem  Wei  in 
the  first,  second,  and  third  positions  respectively. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


INITIAL-HOOKS  IN   PHRASES. 


8l 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Dr.  Draper,  /^  preacher,  can  portray  [Pr-Tr]  treachery  with 
proper  grammar  and  much  fervor  [Fr-Vr].  Michael  Brady,  a  big 
brawny  trooper  from  Dublin,  can  play  both  the  bugle  and-the  fiddle 
in-a  manner  that-is  very  trying  to-a  neighbor.  My  teacher,  Mr. 
Tucker,  -will  take  dinner  every  [Vr]  Friday  in  April  -with  Honorable 
Henry  Humphrey.  You-are-sure  to-call  on-or-before  Friday  morn- 


62  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

ing.  An  erasure  \n-his  ledger  gave  the  book-keeper  much  torture 
[Tr-CHr].  Already  the  children  that  belong  to-poor  people  can  have- 
a practical  education  w/iicA-wiil  qualify  them  for  any  labor  of  life, 
and  make  them  capable  of  doing  work  that-v/\\\  bring  greater  pay  than 
ever  before.  As  Patrick  is  utterly  incapable  [see  capable]  of  telling. 
the  (166)  truth,  no-one  will  believe  him  at-all.  He-should  acquire 
religion; — it-would-be  the  correct  thing  to-do.  Oliver  Jeffrey  has 
trouble  wilh-his  liver.  It-will  require  a  quire  of  paper  for  Mr. 
Cragin  0/ Quebec  to-make  a  will  [Weel]  thai-will  bequeath  his  prop- 
erty in-an  equitable  manner  to-all  his  twenty  [Twn-T]  children. 
Mr.  Huber,  the  hammer  maker,  and  Mr.  Hubbell,  the  owner  of-a 
very  fine  heifer,  will  higgle  and  haggle  over  a  penny. 

PLURAL-VOWEL  SIGNS. 

235.  Directions  have  heretofore  been  given  (93)  for  writing  Con- 
current-Vowels, both  between  stems  and  otherwise,  with  their  regu- 
lar dot  and  dash  signs  ;  and  it  may  be  added  that  it  is  entirely  proper 
to  always  write  them  with  those  signs.  There  are,  however,  certain 
groups  of  vowels,  of  quite  frequent  occurrence,  in  which  one  element 
is  always  the  short  vovrel  I,  for  which  special  signs  are  provided,  each 
of  which  represents  a  single  group ;  hence  they  are  called  "  Plural- 
Vowel  Signs."  A  simple  vowel  is  a  sound  produced  while  the  vocal 
organs  are  held  in  a  fixed  or  nearly  fixed  position.  A  diphthong  is 
a  sound  made  while  the  vocal  organs  are  passing  from  one  position  to 
another,  and  is,  therefore,  changing  throughout  its  entire  length.  A 
diphthong,  like  a  simple  vowel,  is  always  sounded  in  one  syllable ; 
while  a  double-vowel  is  always  divided  into  two  syllables.  The 
Two- Vowel  Signs  are  composed  of  two  ticks  or  breves,  joined  so  as 
to  form  acute  angles,  similar  to  the  signs  of  the  diphthongs,  I,  oi, 
and  EW,  as  shown  in  the  table  on  page  84.  It  will  aid  in  learning 
these  signs  to  note  that  signs  that  represent  all  dot-vowel  sounds 
open  either  upward  or  downward  (see  first  line  of  table) ;  and  signs 
which  stand  for  groups,  one  element  of  which  is  a  dash-vowel,  open 
either  rightward  or  leftward  (see  second  line  of  table).  As  will  be 
observed,  the  three  diphthongs  just  mentioned  fall  naturally  into  ap- 
propriate places  in  this  scheme  of  double-vowel  representation.  But, 
as  the  other  diphthong,  ow,  is  a  glide-sound  from  6  to  do,  it  lies  out- 
side of  the  scheme  ;  therefore,  the  author  devised  for  it  another  form 
of  sign. 


PLURAL-VOWEL  SIGNS.  83 

TWO-VOWEL  SIGNS. 

236.  The  diphthong-sign  I,  with  the  first  part  shaded,  represents 
the  long  dot-vowels  followed  by  K,  as  follows  : 

FIRST-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  a  it  represents  a-1,  as  in  hur- 
rahing. 

SECOND- PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  a  it  represents  a-I,  as  in 
grayish. 

THIRD-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  e  it  represents  e-K,  as  in  deity. 

237.  The  same  sign  inverted,  with  the  last  part  shaded,  represents 
the  long  dot-vowels  preceded  by  1,  as  follows: 

FIRST-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  a  it  represents  I-a,  as  in  piano. 

SECOND-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  a  it  represents  I-a,  as  in 
opiate. 

THIRD-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  e  it  represents  K-e,  as  in 
minutice. 

238.  This  same  reversed  sign,  made  light  throughout,  represents 
the  short  dot-vowels  preceded  by  I,  as  follows  : 

FIRST-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  £  it  represents  K-a,  as  in  piazza. 

SECOND- PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  £  it  represents  )(-£,  as  in 
acquiesce. 

THIRD-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  \  it  represents  K-T,  as  in  vary- 
ing. 

239.  The  diphthong-sign  01,  with  the  first  part  shaded,  represents 
the  long  dash-vowels,  followed  by  X,  as  follows  : 

FIRST-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  a  (aw)  it  represents  a-*,  as  in 
drawing. 

SECOND-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  6  it  represents  6-Y,  as  in 
showy. 

THIRD-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  o  (66)  it  represents  o-Y,  as  in 
Louis  (loo-l). 

240.  This  sign  reversed,  with  the  last  part  shaded,  written  in  the 
second-position  represents  Y-6,  as  in  folio. 

241.  This  same  reversed  sign,  made  light  throughout,  represents 
the  short  dash-vowels,  preceded  by  I,  as  follows  : 

FIRST-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  6  it  represents  Y-6,  as  in  peri- 
odic. 

SECOND-PLACE. — Put  in  the  plare  of  ii  it  represents  I-u,  as  in 
odium. 


84  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

THIRD-PLACE. — Put  in  the  place  of  9  (<56)  it  represents  X-o,  as  in 
few  (being  the  true  diphthong  EW). 

THREE-VOWEL  SIGNS. 

242.  The  vowel  \  may  be  joined,  either  finally  or  initially,  to  each 
of  the  diphthongs,  I,  Ol,  ow,  EW,  by  a  light  tick,  struck  at  a  sharp 
angle  to  the  part  of  the  sign  to  which  it  is  attached,  as  in  buying, 
toying,  vowing,  Dewey,  genii,  etc. 

TABLE  OF  PLURAL-VOWEL  SIGNS. 
12  3456789 

vl       vi       vl       1      *!       J      Ai       *!      j 

S-!         a-i         e-i          i-a        I-a         I-e        i-a        i-e        i-I 
10  11  12  13  14  15 

a-1  6-j  o-i  i-6  1-5  i-u 

16  17  18  19  20  21  22 

I-I  OI-I  OW-l  EW-I  l-I  i-OI  i-OW 

243.  Horizontal  Signs  Inclined. — The  horizontal  plural  signs, 
for  greater  ease  in  writing,  may  be  inclined  a  little  towards  the  slant 
of  the  stems  Chay  and  Ree ;  thus     (^,    drawing,  _^  showy,  ^Jf 
folio,  fS..  boyish. 

244.  License  in  Use  of  Plural  Signs. — As  a  rule  the  plural 
signs  are  intended  to  represent  groups  of  vowels  in  which  there  is  the 
constant  element  I.     And  yet  they  may  sometimes  be  used  with  safety 
and  advantage  for  groups  which  have  some  other  unaccented  short- 
vowel  in  place  of  the  1;  as  in  the  words  mayor  (No.  2),  theater  (No. 
3),  Noah  and  Owen  (No.   II),   vial  and  viol  (No.    16),   vowel  and 
avowal  (No.   18),  fuel  (No.  19),  etc.     So,  too,  in  a  plural  sign,  the 
breve  for  I  may  also  stand  for  the  long-vowel  e,  as  in  using  No.  4  for 
e-d  in  logo,  No.  5  for  e-d  in  creator,  No.  7  for  e-d  in  theatrical,  No. 
13  for  e-d  in  geometrical,  No.  14  for  e-d  va.  theology,  etc. 

245.  The  phonographer  will  find  all  of  the  plural  signs  given  in 
the  table  quite  useful  at  times  :  but  the  ones  that  will  occur  most 


MODIFIED   STEMS.  85 

frequently,  and  should,  therefore,  be  thoroughly  mastered,  are  Nos. 
a(a-l),  5  (l-a),  7  0-4),  io(a-i),  II  (6-1),  12  (9-1),  13  (K-6),  14  (1-6),  15 
(I-u),  and  19  (EW-f). 

READING  EXERCISE. 


01 


Xj 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

246.  Clayey,  gayety,  deviate,  create,  creation,  Amelia,  Assyria, 
Bolivia,  menial,  drawing,  sawing,  showy,  heroic,  shoeing,  shrewish, 
folio,  Ontario,  Gideon,  odium,  gluey,  vacuity,  Noah,  fuel,  riot,  vial 
or  viol. 


LESSON  XIII. 
MODIFIED    STEMS. 

247.  Definition. — A  stem  is  said  to  be  "  modified  " 
when  it  is  made  either  one-half  its  ordinary  length  or 
twice  its  ordinary  length. 

248.  Halving  Principle. — Halving  the  length  of  a 
stem  to  add  something  to  its  signification,  is  called  the 
"  Halving  Principle." 

249.  Lengthening  Principle. — Doubling  the  length 
of  a  stem  to  add  something  to  its  signification,  is  called 
the  "  Lengthening  Principle." 

250.  Order  of  Reading. — Consonant  sounds  that 
are  added  to  any  stem  by  means  of  either  principle  of 


86  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

modification,  Halving  or  Lengthening,  are  always  read 
after  the  stem  and  its  vowel-signs,  and  after  its  final- 
hook,  if  it  have  one.  It  is  the  very  last  part  of  the  word 
to  be  sounded.  Hence,  if  a  word  ends  with  a  vowel- 
sound,  its  outline  cannot  terminate  with  a  modified  stem. 

HALVING    PRINCIPLE. 

25 1.  "  T  "  or  "  D  "  Added  by  Halving.— Either  /  or 
</may  be  added  to  any  stem,  straight  or  curved,  simple  or 
hooked,  by  making  it  half  its  ordinary  length. 

252.  The  Names  of  the  Half-length  Stems  are  Chet  or  Ched, 
Jet  or  Jed,  Tet  or  Ted,  Det  or  Ded,  Pet  or  Ped,  Bet  or  Bed,  Ket  or 
Ked,  Get  or  Ged,  Ret  or  Red,  Elt  or  Eld,  Yet  or  Yed,  Thet,  Thed, 
or  Itht,  Dhet  or  Dhed,  Fet  or  Fed,  Vet  or  Ved,  Net  or  Ned,  Ingt, 
Sheet,  Isht,  Zhed,  Est,  Zed,  Ert  or  Erd,  Wet  or  Wed,  Met  or  Med, 
Het  or  Hed,  and  Leet  or  Leed  ;  Ghent,  Tend,  Bent,  Rent,  Fend, 
Vent,  Nent,  Essent,  Ernd,  Mend,  Lent,  Pgshunt,  Fgshund,  Enshunt, 
Chetterd,  Betterd  or  Bgtherd,  Plet,  Gled,  Tred,  Bred,  Flet,  Fred, 
Nerd,  Lerd,  Plent,  Trend,  Frend,  etc. 

Examples : 

I      I    _^_<^>^^J      jV^s^ 

Tee    Tet   Kay    Ket  Ef    Fet   Ing    Ingt   Den     Dent    Ven    Vent 

V'S-.'C.  c.   V  v    J      3     <U   <u 

Per    Pret    Vel    Velt      Plen     Plent    Tren     Trent    Fren     Frent 

253.  Order  of  Reading  Vowel-Sign. — A  vowel- 
sign  placed  after  a  half-length  stem  is  read  before  the 
added  /  or  d  (250).  Examples: 

vy    x\.               — »       iv                 _^            —5 
^-     ^                       \>      .,         \  v 

—  T*  » V»     ^ 

coat   fight   oft   hut  gaunt  dived  fund  cautioned    gathered  blood 

N     Qf    <L     j?  ..          V          3-         Si    .' 

braid  float   fret  shirt  twit  planed   drained   bluffed  drift   clattered 


HALVING   PRINCIPLE.  8/ 

254.  Hooks  Made  Smaller. — All  of  the  hooks,  both  large  and 
small,  when  added  to  half-length  stems,  should  be  made  considerably 
smaller  than  the  corresponding  hooks  on  lull-length  stems.  But 
the  general  proportion  between  the  two  sizes  should  still  be  retained 
(183  and  Remark,  also  266). 

255.  Positions   of  Half-Length    Stems.  —  The 

positions  of  half-length  horizontal  stems  are  the  same  as 
the  positions  of  full-length  horizontals  (43  to  45). 

256.  The  positions  of  half-length  upright  or  slanting 
stems  are  shown  in  the  cut  below,  and  are  as  follows: 

FIRST  POSITION. — Half  the  length  of  a  Tee  above  the 
line. 

SECOND  POSITION. — On  the  line. 

THIRD  POSITION. — Entirely  below  the  line. 

..>....>...      ^..^..J.^...^... 

<J     t     <^    r>  "s 

REMARK.  The  caution  at  177,  in  regard  to  writing  horizontals  in 
the  Fourth  Position,  applies  also  to  all  words  written  with  half-lengths 
of  any  direction.  The  reason  for  this  restriction  is  that  the  Third 
and  Fourth  Positions  of  all  such  stems,  being  both  entirely  below 
the  line,  are  liable  to  be  mistaken  one  for  the  other.  And  yet  it  is 
not  to  be  understood  absolutely  that  the  practised  reporter  may  never 
ase  the  Fourth  Position  with  such  words,  for  sometimes  when  hard 
pushed  by  a  speaker  it  comes  handy  to  do  so,  at  the  risk  of  a  little 
illegibility  ;  as,  for  instance,  in  writing  to  go,  to  make,  to  put,  to  treat, 
to  let,  too  bright,  etc.  But  the  beginner  should  always  use  T3  for  to 
or  loo  in  such  cases. 

257.  Ing-dot   after   Half-Lengths.  —  After  half- 
length  Tee,  Dee,  Pee,  Bee,  El,  Yay,  Em,  and  Hay,  the 
final  syllable  /#§"is  best  written  with  the  Ing-dot  (148). 

258.  Lee  after  Wet,  Met,  Het,  and  Leet.— After 
half-length  Way,   Em,  Hay,  and  Lee  the  stem  Lee  is 
generally  used  whether  a  vowel-sound  follows  or  not ;  is 
in  writing  wattle,  motley,  metal,  hotly,  hotel,  lately,  little^ 
etc. 


88 


MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 
READING  EXERCISE. 

r  ,        -  -  T- 


V 


X:    y 


.     : 
L/ 


REMARK.  Whenever  it  is  necessary  to  join  a  straight  half-length 
after  a  curve,  which  it  would  naturally  follow  without  an  angle  (87, 
88),  for  the  purpose  of  showing  the  exact  point  of  junction,  the  tip 
of  the  curved  stem  should  be  bent  in  a  little,  so  as  to  allow  the  half- 
length  to  start  with  a  slight  jog  or  angle.  The  outlines  of  the  follow- 
ing words  furnish  examples  of  such  joinings  :  mapped,  mobbed ',  esc  heat  t 
throbbed,  etc. 


LENGTHENING   PRINCIPLE.  89 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

259.  Jet,  tight  or  tide  or  tied,  date,  beat  or  bead,  caught,  ached, 
get,  rate,  thought,  fate,  void,  not,  note,  shut,  art,  met,  hat,  light, 
added,  await,  omit,  checked,  touched,  picked,  kept,  urged,  robbed, 
ranked,  failed,  moped,  armed,  lodged,  ticket,  adopt,  pulled,  pilot, 
acted,  gilt  or  guilt  or  gild,  repute,  elect,  voted,  noted,  estate,  as- 
sumed, merit,   alleged,   battle,  fatal,   esteem,  motive,  hotel,  little, 
punished,  return,  prompt,  attract,  tent  or  tend,  dined,  pound,  bond, 
find,  want,  mind,  hunt,  lent  or  lend,  paved,  patient,  battered,  event, 
arrived,  occasioned,   patent,   turned,   payment,   behind,  judgment, 
agreement,   country,  authentic,   prate,  dread,   freight,   fleet,  cord, 
rolled,  word,  offered,  injured,  Albert,  measured,  mortal,  candidate, 
rendered,  treatment,  shorthand,  plant  or  planned,  frowned,  friendly; 
putting,  trading,  meeting,  heading. 

LESSON  XIV. 
LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLE. 

260.  "  Tr,"  "  Dr,"  "  Thr,"  or  "  Ture  "  Added.— 

The  syllables  ter,  der,  ther,  and  ture  may  each  be  added 
to  any  curved  stem,  whether  simple  or  hooked,  and  to 
any  straight  stem  with  final-hook,  by  making  the  stem 
twice  its  ordinary  length. 

261.  The  Names  of  the  Lengthened  Stems  are  Ishter,  Zhet- 
ter,  Ester  or  Esther,  Zeeter,  Erter  or  Erther,  Wetter  or  Wither, 
Metter  or  Mother,  Hetter  or  He'ther,  Leeter  or  Leether  or  Leeder, 
Elter,  Yetter,  Ithter,    Dhetter,  Fetter  or  Father,  Vetter,  Enter  or 
Enther,  Ingter.  Sheeter,  Fender,  Fletter,  Fretter,  Chenter,  Renter, 
Renter  or  Render,  etc. 

Examples : 

En  Enter  Fen  Fender  Ken  Render 

262.  Order  of  Reading  Vowel-Sign. — A  vowel, 
sign  placed  after  a  lengthened  stem  is  read  before  the 
added  tr,  dr,  or  thr  (250).  Examples: 


90  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


father  nature  founder  meander  kinder  pounder 
REMARK.  The  principle  of  phonography  which  allows  straight 
stems  with  final-hooks  to  be  lengthened  to  add  /;-,  dr,  thr,  leads  to 
an  unimportant  conflict  with  the  outlines  of  a  very  few  words,  in 
which  a  straight  stem  is  repeated,  with  a  final-hook  on  the  last  stem, 
the  hook-consonant  being  sounded  last ;  as  in  the  outlines  of  pippin, 
bobbin,  baboon,  tighten,  Tiian,  Teuton,  deaden,  jejtine,  cocoon,  Triton, 
Dryden,  quicken,  and  Caucasian.  But  practically  the  words  of  the 
two  classes  never  interfere  with  each  other. 

263.  Positions  of  Lengthened  Stems. — The  posi- 
tions of  lengthened  stems  are  as  follows: 

I.  Of   horizontal  lengthened  stems,  the  same  as  the 
positions   of   single-length    and  half-length  horizontals. 
See  paragraphs  43  to  45  and  255. 

II.  Of  downward  lengthened  stems: 
FIRST  POSITION. — On  the  line. 

SECOND  POSITION. — Half  of  the  stem  above  the  line 
and  half  below. 

THIRD  POSITION. — One-third  of  the  stem  above  the 
line  and  two-thirds  below. 

III.  Of  upward  lengthened  stems: 

FIRST  POSITION. — Commencing  half  a  Tee-length 
above  the  line. 

SECOND  POSITION. — Commencing  at  the  line. 

THIRD  POSITION. — Commencing  half  a  Tee-length  be- 
low the  line. 

Examples  of  downward  and  upward  lengthened  stems 
standing  in  the  three  different  positions: 

L2..f.....\.  ..t C 


C-V-V: 


MODIFIED    STEMS.  9! 

SHORT    RULES   FOR   POSITIONS. 

264.  Half-Length  Stems. — For  the  three  positions 
a  half-length  stem  always  rests  on  the  same  level  as  its 
full  length;  thus, — 

\    \    (    <    /  x     C  c —  - 


265.  Lengthened  Stems. — For  the  three  positions 
a  lengthened  stem  always  begins  at  the  same  level  that 
its  single  length  does;  thus, — 


<  L.^l£ 


i  . 


2 


REMARK.  This  rule  does  not  interfere  with  the  direction  at  263, 
II.,  that  downward  lengthened  stems  in  the  first  position  should  rest 
on  the  line.  Both  rules  may  be  observed  by  making  the  lengthened 
stems  a  trifle  shorter  than  double  length. 

266.  Hooks  Made  Larger. — All  of  the  hooks,  both  large  and 
small  (particularly  the  former),  on  lengthened  stems,  are  made  some- 
what larger  than  the  corresponding  hooks  on  stems  of  ordinary  length 
(254). 

267.  Special  Vocalization  with  Lengthened  Stems. — When 
a  diphthong  occurs  between  the  two  consonants  added  by  length- 
ening, it  may  be  written  by  striking  its  sign  across  the  lengthened 
stem ;  thus,    -*-^-^    entire. 


92  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

268.  Exceptional  Use  of  Halving  Principle. — While  the  gen- 
eral  rule  is  that  the  Halving  Principle  should  not  be  employed  to 
denote  a  final  t  or  d  in  the  outlines  of  words  that  end  with  vowel- 
sounds  (250),  as  petty,  mighty,  gaudy,  pretty,  Brady,  etc.,  yet  there 
are  a  few  words  of  that  class  as  to  which,  in  order  to  secure  an  in- 
crease in  brevity  and  speed,  the  phonographer  is  allowed  to  violate 
the  rule  and  use  half-lengths  when  there  are  final  vowels.  The 
principal  words  of  this  sort  are  liberty  (Z,3-Brt),  majority  (M-Jrt1), 
quality  (Kw-Zt1),  equality  (Kw-Zts),  nobody  (N-Bd2),  and  anybody 
(N3-Bd).  Of  course,  it  is  always  proper  to  make  the  outlines  of  these 
words  according  to  the  rule,  ending  them  with  T  or  D,  instead  of 
half-lengths,  should  the  writer  prefer  so  to  do.  Furthermore,  it 
must  be  remembered  that  if  the  final  vowel  must  be  indicated,  the 
t  or  d  must  be  written  with  its  stem-sign,  as  you  cannot  write  a 
vowel  to  anything  but  a  stem. 

REMARK.  The  outline  of  equality  is  put  in  the  third-position  so 
that,  in  writing  unvocalized  phonography,  the  word  will  not  conflict 
with  quality. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


.^.  .^  c. 


MODIFIED   STEMS. 


93 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Fighter,  voter,  niter  or  neither  (nither),  neuter,  nature,  shat- 
ter, water,  motor,  mutter  or  mother,  hotter,  letter  or  leather,  after, 
oyster,  Easter,  order,  flatter,  yonder,  vender  or  venture,  winter, 
hinder,  offender,  flounder,  tender,  pointer,  banter,  gander,  render, 
laughter,  filter  (-Z.tr),  defender,  entertain,  thermometer,  inventor, 
decanter,  printer,  grander,  further,  feature. 

"MODIFICATIONS"  IN  ABBREVIATIONS  AND  PHRASES. 

269.    Half-Length   Stems  in  Abbreviations. — 

Each  of  the  following  abbreviations  contains  at  least  one 
half-length  stem: 


according       astonish-ed       captain        difficult-y    establish       fact 
...    ._          ^.</..  c/  __-^,_       _. ^^__ 

frequent        gentleman        gentlemen       history  immediate 

..rr!>...      v      ........    ^"^      • 

important         intelligent    '        particular          quality  world 

270.  Halving  Principles  in  Phrases. — The  words 
it,  the,  to,  and  had  may  be  added  by  Halving;  thus, — 

V         'L*>  -i 

>  ^ 

by-it    on-it  to-the    in-the    among-the    ought-to    able-to    we-had 

REMARK  i.  The  phrase  of -the,  standing  alone,  is  invariably  written 
with  Roid2-Choid  (166,  167).  And  in  the  middle  or  at  the  end  of 
phrases  of-the  is  almost  always  written  with  either  Roid-Choid  or 
Choid-Roid  ;  but  occasionally,  because  more  convenient,  it  is  written 
with  half-length  Vee.  See  the  phrases  most-of-the-time  and  one-of- 
the  in  the  List  of  Phrases. 

REMARK  2.  The  adding  of  had  by  halving  is  only  permitted  in 
connection  with  the  stem-signs  of  the  personal  pronouns  he,  we,  you, 
they,  and  she.  It  is  not  safe  to  adopt  it  as  a  general  principle.  Its 


94 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


most  frequent  use  is  by  the  reporter  in  writing  the  phrases  he-had^ 
•we-had,  &nA.you-had.  But  it  is  always  proper,  in  all  such  phrases  and 
everywhere,  to  write  had -with,  the  stem  Dee  ;  he,  we,  and.  you  in  that 
case  being  written  with  their  breve-signs.  See  169,  170,  and  173. 

271.  Lengthening  Principle  in  Phrases. — The 
words  there,  their,  they-are,  and  other  may  be  added  by 
Lengthening;  thus, — 


in-there       been-there      remain-there      on-their        can-have-their 


known-their  if-they-are  among-other  from-other  in-all-other 
REMARK.  It  is  allowable  to  write  of-their  and  of-other  with 
lengthened  Vee  in  the  first-position  ;  but  in  writing  the  latter  phrase, 
the  vowel  «  should  be  inserted.  In  fact,  it  is  well  to  make  a  practice 
of  inserting  the  vowel  u  whenever  other  is  added  by  lengthening. 
See  the  above  phrases  in  the  List  of  Phrases. 

272.  "Not"  and  "  Another."—  The  word  not  may 
be  added  by  the  En-hook  and  Halving;  and  the  word 
another,  by  the  En-hook  and  Lengthening;  thus,  — 


J 

J 


r^d-not     do-not      did-not       can-not      are-not      were-not      if-not 


shall-not       or-not      may-not      will-not      in-another      or-another 

273.  "  Did."  —  The  word  did,  when  standing  alone  or 
beginning  a  phrase,  or  when  preceded  in  a  phrase  only 
by  the  breve-sign  for  one  of  the  pronouns  /,  he,  we,  or 
you,  is  always  written  with  its  abbreviation  Dee".  In  all 
other  cases,  when  joined  in  a  ohrase,  did  is  written  with 
the  half-length  Ded. 


MODIFIED    STEMS.  95 

274.  "  That." — The  word  that,  when  standing  alone 
or  beginning  a  phrase,  is  always  written  with  its  abbre- 
viation Thee1.     But  when  joined  to  a  preceding  word 
that  is  always  written  with  the  half-length  Dhet. 

275.  "Old,"   "Older,"  etc.— In  writing   the   word 
old  and  its  derivatives,  the  initial  vowel,  d,  is  joined  at 
the  beginning  of  the  stem  Lee,  being  struck  downward 
in  the  direction  of  Bee  ;  thus,  old,  Boid'-Zeed  ;  older, 
Boid'-Zeeder,  etc.     In  practice  the  vowel-sign  may  be 
made  light  (Poida). 

REMARK.  By  prefixing  the  vowel-sign  in  writing  old,  older,  etc., 
these  words  are  distinguished  in  their  outlines  from  late,  lady,  later, 
latter,  and  elder  (Zs-Dr). 

276.  "Another,"   "Entire,"   "The-other,"  and 
"  Hereafter." — Both  the  words  another  and  entire  are 
written  with  lengthened  En  in  the  first-position,  and  the 
phrase  the-other  is  written  with  lengthened  Thee  in  the 
third-position.     Hereafter  is  written  ^?ftr8. 

REMARK.  The  principle  involved  in  the  outline  of  hereafter,  just 
given,  namely,  the  employment  of  the  Ef-hook  and  Lengthening 
principle  to  denote  after,  may  be  used  in  phraseography  in  writing 
such  phrases  as  week-after,  before-or-after,  Saturday-afternoon,  day- 
after-day,  etc.  See  these  examples  in  the  List  of  Phrases. 

READING  EXERCISE. 

<->  <    •       \  A  C       — 

•   ^     -A    '•    --    ~     *f    - 


.:.,    \     _ 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


7 


VI. 


.   c 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS.  97 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Kit  Mott  the  mate  of -the  yacht  "  Dot"  has  got  the  gout  in-the 
right  foot.  /  asked  him  if-it  ached  in-the  night.  He  laughed  and 
remarked  that  he  thought  it  did.  Ragged  little  Pat  Merritt  put  a 
rabbit  and-a  cat  \\\-his  coat  pocket,  and  also  took  a  pet  parrot  and 
went  up  in-the  garret  and  made  a-great  racket.  But  when-the  par- 
rot lit  on-Ais  pate  Pat  shut  his  left  eye  and  shot  for-the  gate ;  and-as 
he  got  there  he  uttered  a  bad  epithet,  which  made  the  refined  and 
gentle  madam  of-the  flat  hit  him  on-the  head  with-a  pint  pot,  and- 
the  cut  hurt  him  so  badly  that  he-had  a  fit  which  he  did-not  get  over 
until  midnight.  Albert  Pratt  and  Alfred  Platt  went  to-see4  Robert 
and  Richard  Egbert  in  Kentucky  in  October.  Hubert  Hubbard 
played  the part-ol  Hamlet  at-the  Detroit  Theatre  the-other  night. 

I-do-no\.-think  that  Leander  Winter  the  inventor  will  ever  attempt 
to  hinder,  delay,  or  defraud  any  creditor  out-of  his  hard  earned 
money.  A  terrible  wind  blew  down  the  tent  and-the  thunder  and 
lightning  so  frightened  the  crowd  that-\h&  meeting  broke  up  and  all 
went  home  for  shelter,  and  did-not  venture  out  again  until  Friday- 
afternoon.  Mr.  Hunt,  the  wonderful  hunter  of  Huntington,  went 
hunting  Monday-afternoon  and  for  a  wonder  killed  one  old  hen, 
thinking  he-had  shot  a  partridge  (Prt-).  The  young  and  tender 
children  of  Mr.  Pindar  now  go  to  kindergarten  (G-^t-N)  and-will 
remain-there  hereafter ;— they  ought  to-have  gone-there  before* 


LESSON  XV. 
CIRCLES   AND   LOOPS. 


277.  Two  Sizes  of  Circles  and  Loops. — There 
are  two  sizes  of  circles  and  two  of  loops  used  in  Phono- 
graphy, being  called  respectively  "  Small  Circle," 
"  Large  Circle,"  "  Small  Loop,"  and  "  Large  Loop  v 


98  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

SMALL   CIRCLE   ON   SIMPLE   STEMS. 


£ 

C 
C 
3 


<5~o 


<J 


278.  Circle  for  "  S  "  or  "  Z."— A  small  circle  joined 
at  the  finish  of  any  stem  adds  either  s  or  z.  Joined  at 
the  beginning  of  a  stem  it  adds  s  but  not  z.  On  straight 
stems  that  are  struck  downward,  as  Chay,  Tee,  Pee,  etc., 
it  is  lurried  on  the  right  side.  On  straight  stems  that 
are  struck  right-ward,  as  Kay,  Gay,  Ree,  it  is  turned  on 
the  upper  side.  On  curved  stems  it  is  turned  on  the 
inner  side.  It  may  also  be  turned  on  the  inside  of  any 
hook;  and  is  then  made  slightly  elongated  lengthwise 
of  the  hook.  Examples: 


/- 


f 


chose 


side          source         debts         sweets        spout        salt 

^.1^0^..     „ «u>         ...    .f -\1-          ^ 

enters       scimeter       trots       gloats       fruits        flutters        puffs 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS.  99 


r 


fines         faints         lenders       sputters       cycle       sinner        squeal 

REMARK.  A  brief  rule  for  joining  the  circle  to  simple  stems  is  the 
following  :  Write  the  circle  on  all  consonant-stems,  both  straight  and 
curved,  on  the  side  and  in  the  place  of  the  Shun  and  El  Hooks. 

279.  Order  of  Reading.  —  A  circle  at  the  beginning 
of  an  outline  is  read  before  everything  else;  a  circle  at 
the  finish  of  an  outline  is  read  after  everything  else. 
Therefore,  the  circle  cannot  be  used  for  s  or  z  in  such 
words  as  ask,  lasso,  rosy,  etc.,  which  either  begin  or  end 
with  a  vowel. 

280.  Name.  —  The  name  of  the  small  circle  is  Iss.     It  is  also  called 
"  Breve-ess  "  or  "  Breve-zee,"  according  to  which  sound  it  stands  for. 
These  names  are   also  printed  "Breve-s"   and   "  Breve-z."     The 
stenotype  of  Iss  is  "  s  "  or  "  z." 

281.  Names  of  Stems  with  Breve-s.  —  Stems  with  the  small 
circle  attached  are  named  Chess,  Jess,  Tess,  Pess,  Fess,  Sech,  Sef, 
etc.,  according  as  the  circle  is  final  or  initial.     The  names  that  are 
not  formed  in  the  regular  way  with  &  are  the  following  :  Rees,  Els, 
Ingz,  Shees,   Ishes,   Ess-Iss,  Zee-Iss,  Lees,  Iss-Ree,  Iss-Yay,  Iss- 
Shee,  Iss-Ess,  Iss-Zee,  Sway,  Iss-Hay,  Slee. 

THE   CIRCLE   BETWEEN   STEMS. 

282.  Rule.  —  The  circle  is  written  between  stems,  when 
they  are  simple  at  their  contiguous  ends,  in  the  following 
manner: 

I.  Between  two  straight  stems,  — 

1.  If  the  stems  do  not  form  an  angle  at  the  point  of 
junction,  the  circle  is  written  to  the  first  stem  just  as 
if  it  stood  alone,  and  then  the  second  stem  is  continued 
on  after  it. 

2.  But  if  the  stems  do  form  an  angle  at  the  point  of 


IOO  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

junction,  the  circle  is  turned  on  that  side  of  the  first  stem 
which  will  throw  it  on  the  outside  of  the  angle 
Examples  : 


\ 


Ps-P        Ts-D          Ks-G  Ts-K         Ps-J         Ds-B  tfs-K. 

II.  Between  a  straight  stem  and  a  following  curved 
stem,  the  circle  is  turned  on  that  side  of  the  straight 
stem  which  will  throw  it  on  the  inner  side  of  the 
curved  stem.  Examples: 


Ps-L        P-sR        Ds-N         B-sM          K-sR  .ff-sR          G-sS 

III.  Between  two  curved  stems,  or  between  a  curved 
stem  and  a  following  straight  stem,  the  circle  is  turned 
on  the  inner  side  of  the  first  stem.  Examples: 

s-    /*~>\ 
^-A—^     /— "6  1 

Ns-N         Ms-Z        Ms-R         Ns-M        Ms-NG      Ms-V      Vs-L 

n 


Zs-P  Fs-K  Ms-K         Vs-T     Ms-J      Zs-T 

REMARK.  Exception  to  III.  —  When  the  circle  occurs  between 
either  Ith,  Ef,  or  En  and  a  following  Lee,  it  is  easier  —  and,  therefore, 
allowable  —  to  turn  it  on  the  back  instead  of  the  inner  side  of  the  first 
stem  ;  thus,  — 


TH-sZ  F-sZ  N-sZ 

283.  Vocalization.  —  When  the  outline  of  a  word  con- 
tains a  circle  between  two  stems,  all  vowels  that  are 
sounded  before  the  circle  must  be  written  to  the  first 
stem,  and  all  vowels  that  are  sounded  after  the  circle 
must  be  written  to  the  second  stem.  Examples: 


CIRCLES   AND   LOOPS.  IOI 


disk          gusset        choosing          besom         disown  unsought 

284.  Hooks  with  Breve-s  Used  Medially.  —  Any 

of  the  hooks,  with  breve-s  included,  may  be  joined  to 
other  stems  ;  the  circle,  in  such  case,  always  being 
written  on  the  inside  of  the  hook.  But  sometimes,  when 
so  used  together  in  the  middle  of  outlines,  both  the  hook 
and  breve-s  have,  of  necessity,  to  be  formed  somewhat 
imperfectly.  And,  in  a  few  instances,  the  circle  must  be 
turned  on  the  back  of  a  curved  stem.  Examples: 


.x 

V 


display    peaceable    physical     subsequent     prisoner    venturesome 


explore     explosion      miscalculation      misapplication      misbelief 
READING  EXERCISE. 


r-.:f.A 


102 


V 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY 


CLp    I 


:.(„..% 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

285.  Choose,  its,  poise,  case,  eggs,  rice  or  rise,  yes,  those,  face 
or  phase,  news,  says,  ways,  miss,  lace  or  lays,  oppose,  office,  arise, 
such,  seat,  said,  sake,  sky,  south,  safe,  sun  or  son,  sore  or  soar, 
same,  sale  or  sail,  city,  sorry,  sunny,  sex,  source  or  sores,  suppose, 
box,  lungs,  force,  sketch,  swim,  smoke,  refuse,  Thomas,  hoax, 
heaves,  hogshead  (hSgse'd),  Sunday,  slowly,  propose,  defence,  wit- 
ness, abundance,  dress,  fleece  or  fleas,  worse  (223,  II.),  deeds,  acts, 
votes,  notes,  adopts,  traits,  lords  (223,  II.),  threats,  matters,  letters, 
woods,  washes,  stone,  summon,  surf  or  serf,  station,  scatter,  skate, 
signed,  sweet,  scattered,  slaughter,  slender,  simple,  submit,  spots, 
specimen,  caves,  proofs  or  proves,  fence,  gathers,  cushions,  nations, 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS.  IO3 

lands,   thunders,   settle,   suffer,   remains,  directors,   splint,   switch, 
swash. 

286.  Tuesday,  task,  risk,  missing,  lisp,  massive,  passage,  vessel, 
visit,  music,  resolve,  dispatch,  refusal,  positive,  muslin,  basement, 
trustee,  present,  uncertain,  justice,  December,  exposure,  excuse. 


THE   LARGE   CIRCLE. 

287.  Large  Circle  for  "  ss,"  "  sz,"  etc.  —  Two  s  or  * 

sounds,  when  they  occur  with  a  single  vowel-sound  be- 
tween them,  are  usually  written  with  a  large  circle, 
turned  on  the  same  side  of  a  stem  as  the  small  circle 
(278). 

288.  The  Name   of  the  Large   Circle  is   "  Breve-sez."     Its 
stenotype  is  "  ss,"  "  sz,"  or  "  zz." 

289.  The  Names  of  the  Stems  with  Breve-sez  are  formed  as 
follows:   Chesses,   Pesses,   Fesses,    Reeses,    Erses,    Elses,    Leeses; 
Sesstee,  Sesskay,  etc. 

290.  The   rules    just   stated,    governing   the   use   of 
breve-s,  also  apply  to  breve-sez,  except  that  the  latter 

cannot  be  written  inside  of  the  hooks. 

I 

291.  Vowel-Signs  within  Breve-sez.  —  In  practice 
it  is  seldom  necessary  to  write  the  vowel  included  in 
breve-sez.     But  when  it  is  desirable  to  do  so,  it  may  be 
done  by  putting  its  sign  within  the  circle.     The  dot  or 
dash  may  be  placed  in  the  upper,  middle,  or  lower  part 
of  the  circle,  according  as  it  represents  a  first,  second, 
or  third  place  vowel.     A  diphthong-sign  is  put  in  the 
middle  of  the  circle  without  regard  to  the  position  to 
which  it  belongs.     Examples: 


HP 


pieces       Moses        Bruce's        system       exhaustive       emphasize 


104  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Passes,  races  or  raises,  vices,  masses,  laces,  opposes,  taxes,  dresses, 
prices,  closes,  spaces,  sexes,  necessary,  excessive,  subsist,  basis, 
bases,  recess,  amanuensis,  amanuenses. 

292.  Abbreviations  with  Circles. — Each  of  the 
following  abbreviations  contains  one  or  more  circles  : 


\  \  .. 


c  /  \) 


KEY. — (1.  i)  As,  has,  is,  his,  possibl-y,  because,  horse,  insurance, 
United  States,  special,  spoke,  speak,  (2)  signify,  single,  similarity, 
similar,  remembrance,  sympathy,  something,  somewhere,  somewhat, 
December,  (3)  Massachusetts,  misdemeanor,  mistake,  mistook,  mis- 
taken, domestic,  aristocracy,  savings-bank,  circumstantial,  (4)  south- 
ern, suggestion,  subjection,  September,  satisfactory,  certificate, 
understood,  San  Francisco, 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS. 
READING  EXERCISE. 


10$ 


t     * 


.'^  ^.  j_.:. 


Lo, 


\ 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


i,  .*.  A  .,.  -^   -vo .:.  -? 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Miss  Rose  Hughes  arose  to  accuse  Miss  Rouse  and  Miss  Ives 
o/making-a  fuss  in-the  house  ;  but  Sarah  and  Sam  Snow  sat  in-their 
seats  and  said  not  a  word.  A  wise  man  sometimes  thinks  he  knows 
the  news  when-he  sees  it  in-a  newspaper.  James  and  Thomas  Fox, 
two  cautious  brothers  from  Elizabeth,  who-were  bound  for  Mexico, 
took  an  unsafe  vessel  whicA-Aas-not-been  seen  since  December. 

The  Misses  Dos-Passos  of  Texas,  nice  lasses  with  beautiful  faces 
and  very  (233)  fine  voices,  fiave-gone  (168)  to-the  (270)  races  with 
Ulysses,  riding  in  chaises.  The  Misses  Croesus,  with  their  laces  and 
gauzes  and  flounces,  turn  up  their  noses  at-their  nieces,  the  fascinat- 
ing amanuenses,  and  all-their  phrases  and  graces  and  vases  of  roses. 
The  crisis  that  now  exists  in  Mississippi  causes  a  schism  in-our  party 
that  may-be  decisive  of-the  election  this  season  ;  and  it-is  precisely 
that  wAiVA-makes  it  necessary  to-exercise  (176)  excessive  caution  to- 
sustain  (176)  those- who  \\o\A-the  offices,  until  success  blesses  tht 
country  by  reducing-M*  taxes. 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS.  IO? 

LESSON  XVI. 

OF  THE   LOOPS. 

THE   SMALL   LOOP. 

293.  Loop  for  "  st  "  or  "  zd."  —  Either  st  or  zd  may 
be  added  to  the  simple  end  of  any  stem  by  a  small  loop 
turned  on  the  circle  side. 

294.  Name.  —  The  small  loop  is  called  both  "  Breve-est  "  and 
"  Steh."     Its  stenotype  is  "  st  "  or  "  zd." 

295.  Names  of  Stems  with  Breve-est  are  formed  as  follows  : 
Chest,   Best,  Kest,   Reest,  Test,  Nest,  Elst,   Leest,   Erst,   Ishest, 
Sheest  ;   Stech,  Stet,  Steree,   Ster,    Stel,   Stelee  ;   Stepest,  Stetest, 
Stekest,  Stefest,  etc. 

296.  Size  of  Small  Loop.  —  Breve-est  should  extend  about  one- 
third  the  length  of  the  stem  on  which  it  is  written. 

297.  Where  Breve-est  is  Used.  —  The  small  loop 
may  be  used  at  the  end,  at  the  beginning,  or  in  the 
middle  of  words.  Examples: 


chest        feast 

REMARK,  When  the  consonants  of  a  word  consist  of  or  begin  with 
s-f-n,  they  are  generally  written  with  circle-s  and  stem  T  with  N- 
hook,  as  in  writing  stone,  stand  (sTnd),  stentor  (sTntr),  etc.  The 
principal  exceptions,  in  which  the  form  loop-st  and  stem  N  (stN)  is 
used,  are  the  following  words  and  their  derivatives  :  stencil  (stNs-L), 
stenography,  sting,  and  stink. 

298.  Breve-s  for  Breve-est.  —  In  a  few  instances,  occurring  in 
the  middle  of  words,  breve-s  is  substituted  for  breve-est,  when  the 
omitted  consonant,  in  ordinary  speech,  is  an  imperfectly  enunciated 
sound,  and  an  improved  outline  is  obtained  by  the  change.  See  the 
last  three  words  in  each  of  the  next  reading  and  writing  exercises. 


108  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


^    -P     tk~ 

______        I         .....        / 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

299.  Taste,  post,  cast,  rest,  vest,  west,  most,  last,  attest,  arrest, 
stage,  stop,  stag,  store,  stung,  steel  or  steal,  steady,  sticky,  noticed, 
taxed,  invest,  utmost,  storm,  stamp,  pastry,  vastly,  posterity,  distinc- 
tion, priest,  blessed  (bl^st),  closed,  twist,  druggist,  embraced,  jour- 
nalist, crystal,  spaced,  sufficed,  disgust,  stolen,  stupid,  stoops,  mostly, 
post-office,  postpone. 

READING  EXERCISE. 

</ 


\ 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS. 


r 


- 


/>.,  -A-  V  _  Sr-  : 


.  »/> 

,        ...     ^T^>    -^-     /         ......  ..        ... 


1>X    "V 

^  x     *  -     ------- 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

In  August  last  Mr.  Vest,  our  honest  guest  from-the  (270)  West, 
being  aroused  by-a  (163)  ghost,  just  stood  aghast,  his  eyes  (57)  all 
moist,  and  raised  his  fist  aw^said,  "  Avast  !  or  /-am  lost  zwVA  all-  the 
(270)  rest  !  "  The  steady  steed  came  to-a  (163)  stop  at-the  (270) 
stoop,  and  did-not  (272)  stir,  but  stood  stock  still  until  they  took-^zw 
(169)  to-the  (270)  stall.  Stephen  Stokes,  a  stalwart  stenographer, 
raised  a  storm  when-he  (169)  proposed  to-stop  (176)  taking  testimony 
and  postpone  the  trial  as-a  (163)  dishonest  witness  had  testified  io-a 


HO  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

misstatemerit.  The  tempest  burst  upon  our  staging  and  destroyed 
the  staircase  in-spite  of  -our  utmost  efforts  to-save  (176)  it.  Posterity 
•will  justify  those-  wfo  earnestly  and  honestly  seek  by  sturdy  industry, 
and  not  by  extortion  and  stealing,  to-make  (177)  and  invest  money. 

THE   LARGE   LOOP. 

300.  Loop  for  "  Str."  —  The  consonants  str,  with  in- 
tervening unaccented  vowel-sounds,  as  heard  at  the  close 
of  such  words  as  master,  castor,  moisture,  texture^  etc., 
may  be  added  to  the  simple  end  of  any  stem,  by  a  large 
loop  turned  on  the  circle  side  (278). 

301.  The  Name  of  the   Large   Loop  is   "  Breve-ster."     Its 
stenotype  is  "  str,"  or  "  sthr." 

302.  Names  of  Stems  with  Breve-ster  are  formed  as  follows  : 
Chester,  Reester,  Fester,  Ingster,  Elster,  Leester,  etc. 

303.  Size  of  Breve-ster.  —  The  large  loop   should 
extend  about  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  stem  on  which 
it  is  written. 

304.  Breve-ster  may  be  Used  at  the  finish  and  in 
the  middle  of  word  outlines.     Examples  : 


tester    poster      adjuster      coaster     fester    Gloucester  obstruct 

REMARK.  It  is  so  difficult  in  rapid  writing  to  make  a  large  loop 
on  the  first  end  of  stems  that  its  use  at  the  beginning  of  words  is  not 
allowed.  The  proper  way  of  writing  str  in  such  words  as  stretch, 
street,  strife,  strong,  stream,  etc.,  is  given  in  the  next  lesson. 

305.  Independent  Loops.  —  Either  of  the  loops  may 
be  made  without  having  a  stem-sign  to  form  one  side  of 
it.  Such  signs  are  called  "  Independent  Loops,"  and 
are  generally  slanted  in  the  direction  of  the  stem  Chay. 
They  may  either  stand  disconnected,  or  be  used  with 
other  consonant-signs  in  writing  word-outlines.  Ex- 
amples : 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS.  Ill 


instinct       instep       obstinate      unsteady      extinction      extract' 
REMARK.     "  Stated." — In  order  to  fully  distinguish  between  the 
outlines  of  stated  and  said  or  state,  slated  is  written  with  the  "  inde- 
pendent loop."     See  the  word  stated  in  list  of  "  Words  and  Phrases 
Specially  Distinguished." 

READING  EXERCISE. 


b-  NJ 


*&-l        ~v    -^fc-vu-** 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Duster,  pastor,  fester,  master,  lustre,  teamster,  Baxter,  register, 
blaster,  cloister,  throwster,  solicitor,  Winchester,  abstract,  district, 
destruction,  Chesterfield,  post-master,  extensive,  institution  [restitu 
tion],  indistinct,  extraction. 

306.  Abbreviations  with  Loop.  —  Each  of  the  fol 
lowing  abbreviations  contains  the  small  loop  : 

ri  ^-  _/°  •'""^ 

\=Jr0     ^7          ......  >^7  ...... 

distinct    youngest       first      next      longest      amongst       almost 

REMARK.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  word  first  has  two  abbrevi 
ated  forms,  Fst  and  detached  breve-est.  The  former  (Fst)  is  the  more 
natural  and  convenient,  but,  as  some  writers  find  difficulty  in  always 
keeping  that  form  distinct  from  the  abbreviation  of  next  (Nst),  an 
additional  or  optional  form  is  provided  for  their  benefit. 

307.  Breve-s  in  Phrases.  —  The  words  as,  has,  is, 
and  his  always,  and  us  after  prepositions  only,  may  be 
added  by  breve-s.     Leets  for  let-us  is  an  exception. 


112  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

REMARK.  Breve-s  for  us  should  be  used  very  sparingly  and  only 
by  verbatim  reporters.  It  is  always  proper  to  write  us  with  the 
stem  Ess. 

308.  Breve-sez  in  Phrases. — The  words  as,  has, 
is,  and  his  may  be  added  by  changing  breve-s  to  breve- 
sez. 

309.  Breve-est  in  Phrases. — The  words  the,  it,  and 
to  may  be  added  by  changing  breve-s  to  breve-est. 

REMARK.  Since  the  introduction  into  the  system  of  the  new 
breve-sign  for  the  (164),  aside  from  the  use  of  the  independent  loop 
for  as  the  and  is  the^  the  looping  of  the  circle  to  add  the  is  not  so 
much  used  as  it  was  formerly. 

310.  Breve-Ster  in  Phrases. — The  words  there  and 
their,  and  the  phrase  they-are,  may  be  added  by  changing 
breve-s  to  breve-ster.     The  words  store  and  stair  are  also 
sometimes  written  with  breve-ster. 

Examples : 


•"cro" 
'o'er' 


KEY.  (1.  i)  As  fast  as,  as  much  as,  as  well  as,  has  not,  has  been, 
it  is  not,  his  own,  as  has,  as  is,  as  his,  is  as,  is  his,  (2)  as  soon  as,  this 
has  been,  it  is  said,  as  the,  as  to,  as  it  is,  is  the,  is  to,  is  it  as,  it  is  the 
next,  that  is  to  say;  as  their,  as  there  is,  is  their,  is  there  not, 
(3)  because  there  is,  where  is  there  ;  book  store,  segar  store,  shoe 
store,  dry-goods  store,  clothing  store. 

REMARK.  In  writing  the  detached  circles  and  loops,  begin  at  the 
upper  right-hand  part,  and  move  the  pen  over  to  the  left.  The 
movement  should  be  opposite  to  that  of  the  hands  of  a  watch. 
The  phrases  as-fast-as  and  because-there-is  are  written  according  to 
the  rule  at  322. 


CIRCLES   AND   LOOPS.  113 

311.  "  Well  "  in  Phrases. — When  following  as  or  is  in  phrases, 
well  is  usually  written  with  Lee  or  El  without  the  hook.  But  at  the 
beginning  of  phrases,  and  generally  whenever  the  hook  can  be  easily 
made,  well  should  not  be  abbreviated.  For  examples  see  as-well-as 
under  310,  and  tnay-as-well,  it-is-well-known,  well-known,  very-well, 
etc. ,  in  the  List  of  Phrases.  In  writing  is  well  standing  alone,  it  is 
better  to  disjoin  well  and  write  it  in  full. 

READING   EXERCISE. 


Ve.^ 


1       vt  v.  .K.  -!s 

o"                            '^S  <5^. 
1?.      ^     .'  .     1      Q 

-0-      <£-*• 

ek 

_Vs> 

oft                            / 

>vf 

y<\ 


-Q^-x 


.  .^.    .^ 


114  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


..,;..     -S 


—  Acs  v^-   *'    -•  ^    "    ~J-  -b:- 

r.     ..fe  •  ^s      ~  b- 


.^m- 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Mr.  Lester  (or  Leicester),  the  barrister  of  Hester  Square,  is-a 
dabster  at  most  things  ;  but  he  is-not  called  the  Nestor  of-the  \Vest- 
chester  County  Bar.  Once  a  fine,  proud  rooster,  thinking  (148) 
that  he  surely  -was  master,  tried  to-administer  destruction  to-rt  big 
Gloucester  lobster  -with-a  green  coat  and  sinister  looking  eye ;  but 
now  the  poor  fowl  lies  on-a  bolster,  and  not  a  vestige  (305)  of-a 
feather  or  spur  can-he  muster  to  again  add  luster  to-Ais  now  extinct 
(305)  fame. 

LESSON  XVII. 

IMPLIED  EN  AND  ER  HOOKS  ON  STRAIGHT 
STEMS. 

312.  From  the  fact  that  the  circles  and  loops,  when 
joined  finally  or  initially  to  the  simple  ends  of  straight 
stems,  are  invariably  turned  on  the  side  and  in  place  of 
the  Ef  or  El  hook,  we  are  enabled  to  utilize  the  placing 
of  these  breves  on  the  other  side  of  straight  stems  in  the 
following  manner: 


IMPLIED   EN   AND   ER   HOOKS.  11$ 

313.  Rule  for  Implied  Hooks. — By  merely  writing 
a  circle  or  loop  on  any  straight  stem  on  the  side  opposite 
the  regular  circle  side,  that  is,  on  the  En  or  Er  hook  side, 
either  n  or  r,  according  as  the  circle  or  loop  is  final  or 
initial,  is  implied,  without  any  hook  being  actually  indi- 
cated at  all.     Examples: 

\   \  '  b     \     ^     X  N  <X    <\ 

pn        pns         pnss         pnst         pnstr        pr         spr       sspr        stpr 

314.  Names  of  Stems  with  Implied  Hooks. — These  two  sets 
of  compound  stems  are  called  respectively  the  "  Ens-series"  and  the 
"Sper-series."     The  names  of  the  individual  stems  are  formed  as 
follows :  Chens,  Dens,  Pens,   Reens,  Chenses,  Benses,  Denst,  Ken- 
ster ;  Stree,  Spree,  Skray,  Sdber,  Sester,  Stetter,  etc. 

315.  Vocalization  of  Ens-Stems. — Stems  of  the 
Ens-series   are  vocalized  the   same   as   En-hook  stems 
(184).     Examples: 


pines         rains  ponds          ganders          bounces          jounced 

316.  Vocalization  of  Sper-Stems. — Stems  of  the 
Sper-series   are   vocalized  the  same  as   Er-hook  stems 
(212). 

317.  Order  of  Reading. — When  a  vowel-sign  stands 
before  a  stem  of  this  series,  as  in  the  words  suitor,  cedar, 
saber,  stoker,   etc.,   the  circle  or  loop  is  sounded  first; 
then  the  vowel;  next  the  stem;  and,  following  that,  the 
implied  hook. 

Examples: 

r  vi 

J: Q  ...v- . ! <N    ...sv.. 

i.     °v       \  * 

strive        street       sprint        sprinter       cider       sabered         stupor 


Il6  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

ENS   AND   SPER   STEMS   IN    THE    MIDDLE    OF    WORDS 

318.  Rule  for  Ens-Stems. — Stems  of  the  Ens-series 
are  never  joined  before  straight  stems,  and  before  curved 
stems  only  when  the  junction  will  permit  the  circle  to  be 
turned  on  the  back  of  the  curve  (see  prancing,  John- 
sonian).    In  most  cases  either  the  hook  and  circle  must 
be  distinctly  formed  (see  dispensatory},  or  else  the  con- 
sonant n  must  be  written  with  its  stem-sign  (see  density}. 

319.  Rule  for   Sper-Stems. — Stems  of  the   Sper- 
series  are  not  often  joined  after  other  stems,  because 
usually  in  the  middle  of  words  it  is  easier  to  indicate 
both  the  circle  and  the  Er-hook  than  the  circle  without 
the  hook  (see  execration).     There  are,  however,  a  few 
outlines  of  this  dass,  in  the  middle  of  which  it  is  better 
to  turn  the  circle  so  as  to  imply  the  hook  (see  disagree). 

Examples: 


prancing     Johnsonian    dispensatory    density   disagree  execration 
READING  EXERCISE. 


IMPLIED   EN  AND   ER   HOOKS.  llj 


... 


V 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Chains,  dines,  opens,  gains,  tokens,  turns,  inference,  blackens 
[darkens],  clearance,  trains,  glance,  twins,  attends,  kinds,  torrents, 
painters  [tenders],  renders,  plants,  stains,  distance,  substance,  sec- 
onds, splints,  splendors,  chances,  glances,  danced,  bounced,  rinsed, 
glanced,  punster.  Stray,  cedar,  spry,  strike,  spring,  scrape,  strength, 
struggle,  sprain,  suppression,  sacrifice,  straight,  secretly,  strains, 
sister,  stopper,  pouncing,  ransom,  discretion,  prosper,  express. 

320.  License  in  Use  of  Implied-Hook  Forms.  —  In  the  for- 
mation of  the  outlines  of  quite  a  number  of  words,  some  of  the  com- 
ponent parts  of  which  taken  separately  would  be  written  with  stems 
of  the  Ens  or  Sper  series,  it  is  permitted  that  those  parts  be  joined 
together,  or  to  other  stems,  to  make  such  word-outlines,  although  by 
so  joining  them  their  circles  lose  the  implied-hook  power,  and  become 
simple  s-circles  again.  Sometimes  the  n  will  disappear,  sometimes 
the  r,  and  in  a  few  cases  both  the  n  and  r.  In  this  way  we  write 
the  words  transpose,  proscribe,  and  transgress  with  the  outlines  of 
traspose,  proskibe,  and  trasgess.  Examples  : 


fe. 


transpose       transaction      translation        proscribe        transgress 

REMARK.  Write  in  accordance  with  320  and  the  above  illustra- 
tions the  following  words  :  transpire,  transport,  transparent,  trans- 
mit, transmission,  transmutation,  translucent,  chancery,  chancellor, 
counselor,  Pennsylvania,  dispensary,  transgression,  transcribe,  tran- 
scription. It  is  better  to  use  the  stem  N  in  writing  the  following 
words  and  their  derivatives  :  transfuse  (Tr-Ns-Fz),  transfix,  transi- 
tory, chancel,  pencil,  council,  etc. 


Il8  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

CIRCLES  AND  LOOPS   JOINED   TOGETHER. 

321.  The  circles  and  loops  may  be  combined  together 
in  various  ways,  according  to  the  requirements  of  the 
ease  and  the  convenience  of  the  writer. 

322.  Breve-S  Joined  After.  —  The  small  circle  may 
be  added  after  the  large  circle,  and  after  either  of  the 
loops,  by  striking  it  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  stem. 
Examples: 


abscesses         joists        fists        posters        masters          canisters 

323.  Breve  es  or  est  Followed  by  a  Loop.  —  A 

loop  may  be  added  after  the  small  circle  or  another  small 
loop  in  the  manner  here  shown: 


nicest  wisest          loosest          grossest        densest    easiest 

324.  Breve-S  for  "  Ings."—  When  a  noun  ends  in 
ing,  which,  according  to  the  rule,  is  written  with  the  Ing- 
dot,  the  plural  ending  ings  is  written  by  putting  a  de- 
tached breve-s  in  the  place  of  the  dot.     See  the  last  three 
words  in  second  line  of  next  Reading  Exercise. 

325.  Abbreviations  with  Implied  Hook.  —  Each 
of  the  following  abbreviations  contains  a  circle  in  which 
an  En  or  Er  hook  is  implied  : 


CIRCLES  AND   LOOPS   JOINED   TOGETHER.      119 


KEY.  (1.  i)  Circumstance,  describe,  described,  description,  sur- 
prise, experience,  intelligence,  responsible,  responsibility,  indispens- 
able, (2)  superficial,  consequence. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


J. 


'-      \ 


:.  £. 


d 


)  ^j- 


„     )-  (•  I.  _;  \  r. 


-v 


120  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Possesses,  successes,  boasts,  fasts,  assists,  molests,  trusts,  frosts, 
jesters,  pastors,  musters,  registers,  down-stairs,  raisest.  Belongings, 
meetings. 

Mrs.  [Ms-S]  Jones  of  Queens,  one  of  -our  greatest  songsters,  always 
joins  in  and  chants  with-the  chanters  every  chance  she  gets.  With 
coins  for  counters  the  gamester  counts  the  points  of  -the  game.  Clar- 
ence Perkins  of  Glens  Falls  turns  an  honest  penny  by  making  dis- 
counts and  cutting  coupons  from  United-  States  bonds.  Lawrence 
Dickens  from  Kansas-City,  the  prince  of  punsters,  engenders  con- 
sternation as  he  pounces  on-you  with  his  puns  in  any  place  he  chances 
to  meet-you.  Let  us  stray  away  by-this  sparkling  stream  and  hear 
the  scream  of-the  screech  owl  and  strive  to  gather  strength  from-ihe 
fragrance  of-ihe  cedar  and-the  spruce.  It-would  surprise  and  possibly 
stagger  you  to-see  what-a  fine  stitcher  his  youngest  sister  is  getting 
to-be.  Just  speak  to-Aer  about-M<?  circumstance.  Jasper  Ransom 


CIRCLES   AND   LOOPS   JOINED   TOGETHER.      121 

has  mastered  the  art  of  making  alt/tost  every  mixture  known  to  ordin- 
ary chemistry,  and  he  surely  will  prosper.  The  fiercest  gnat  in-the- 
worlJ  infests  the  forests  and  molests  and  pesters  artists  and  tourists, 
and  possesses  the  power  to  annoy  even  the  beasts.  He  thrusts  his 
fists  against-M^  posts  and  still  insists  [Nss-Ts]  he  sees  the  ghosts. 
Captain  Foster  and  Lester  Dexter  are  both  great  boasters  as-well-as 
jesters. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


•r- 


,  .....     .  ) 

V 


i      I  e 

"  "  \>'  <j_X"  "    ^">. 


122  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  XVIII. 

CURLS  'FOR   THE    NASALS    EN   AND   ING. 
FINAL  CURLS. 

326.  The  En-curl.  —  The  consonant  n  may  be  added 
after  final  breves  es,  est,  and  ster,  by  continuing  the  circle 
or  loop  beyond  the  point  of  its  finish,  and  forming  a  curl 
on  the  opposite  side  of  the  outline  to  which  it  is  joined. 

327.  The  Ing-curl.  —  After  the  loops  this  same  curl- 
sign  may  also  be  employed  to  indicate  the  syllable  ing  as 
well  as  the  consonant  n. 

328.  Curl  for  "  ing  "  on  Final  Hooks.  —  The  use  of  the  curl  for 
ing  is  also  allowable,  in  a  few  cases,  in  connection  with  final  hooks, 
there  being,  of  course,  no  circle  or  loop  intervening.     It  is  turned 
on  the  outside  of  the  hooks.     See  referring,  apportioning  ;  etc.,  below. 

REMARK.  This  use  of  the  curl  on  hooks  for  final  ing  should  only 
be  resorted  to  when  the  position  of  the  hook  precludes  the  joining  of 
the  stem  Ing. 

Examples  : 


chasten     seizin   prison   Henderson   Peterson     Preston    western 


-TP   ...y.  .. 

coasting     feasting    mustering   masonry   dozens    Wilson's    listens 


puissance    castings    referring     serving    apportioning    pensioning 
INITIAL  CURLS. 

329.  Curl  for  "in,"  "en,"  or  "un."—  Before  the 
initial  breve-s  of  any  stem  of  the  Sper-series  (313,  314), 
and  before  an  initial  breve-s  on  any  curved  stem  that  is 
formed  by  a  movement  opposite  to  that  of  the  stem  En. 


THE   ISHUN   HOOK.  123 

as  Ish,  Es,  Er,  Em,  Lee,  etc.,  either  in,  en,  or  un,  may 
be  joined  by  a  curl  turned  on  the  opposite  side  from 
the  circle.  Examples: 

T 
LL 

instruct  inseparable  inscribe  unceremonious  unseemly     enslave 

THE  ISHUN    HOOK. 

330.  Shun-hook  and  Breve-s.  —  A  large  hook 
joined  after  a  final  breve-s,  and  turned  on  the  same  side 
of  the  stem  as  the  circle,  represents  the  terminal  syllables 
ishun,  izhun,  dshun,  and  eshun,  in  such  words  a.s  position, 
physician,  transition,  recision,  pulsation,  possession,  etc. 
Examples: 

n,        "0 


position  incision  taxation  dispensation  concession  procession 
331.  Name  of  Hook.  —  This  is  called  the  "  Ishun-hook."  It  may 
be  used  at  the  end  of  any  stem  with  a  final  breve-s  that  is  not  turned 
within  a  hook,  including  stems  of  the  Ens-series.  Its  stenotype  is 
"shn  "  or  "  zhn,"  and  to  avoid  confusion  with  the  preceding  "s"  or 
"  z",  it  is  always  printed  in  italics  ;  thus,  sNsj^w  (sensation),  Rszhn 
(recision),  Pzs/in  (position). 

332.  Curl  for  "  in,"  etc.,  in  Initial  Hooks.  —  When- 
ever at  the  beginning  of  a  word  the  syllable  in,  en,  or  un 
occurs  before  a  stem  with  a  large  initial  hook,  to  which 
the  stem  En  cannot  conveniently  be  prefixed,  the  syllable 
may  be  written  with  a  curl  turned  on  the  inside  of  the 
hook.  Examples: 


inflame      involve       envelop        unfledged       untwist       indwell 


124  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


4- 


•=•••=        =          -  \- 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

333.  Chosen,  Edison,  poison,  cousin  or  cozen,  risen,  Orson,  mason. 
moisten,  lesson,  arisen,  Jackson,  vixen,  Remsen,  treason,  messenger, 
Watson,  Samson,  Peterson,  Johnson,  posting,  infesting,  fostering, 
dozens,  fastens.  Instruction,  instrument,  inspiration,  inscribing,  in- 
security, unstrung,  insulted.  Position,  accession,  musician,  annexa- 
tion, proposition,  requisition,  supposition,  sensational.  Inflaming, 
inflammable,  inflict,  influx,  invalid,  unflagging,  involution. 

THE    CURLS    IN    PHRASES. 

334.  Final  En-curl.  —  The  words  than,  an,  own  and 
in  may  be  written  with  the  final  En-curl. 

335.  Initial  En-curl.  —  The  word  in  may  be  written 
with  the  initial  En-curl. 

336.  En-curl  in  Final    Hooks.  —  The  words  than, 
own,  and  been  may  be  written  with  an  En-curl  turned  on 
the  inside  of  the  Ter  and  Vee  hooks. 

Examples: 


THE   CURLS   IN   PHRASES. 


125 


KEY.     Less-than.  faster-than,  in-some,  rather-than,  by-their-own, 
may-have-been. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


5.     I 


• 


\ 


126  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

0,  listen  to-the  voice  of  reason,  and  not  be  wasting  your  time  in 
feasting,   jesting,   and  boasting,   and  possibly   sometimes   fostering 
and  assisting  in  treason.      The  person  who  struck  William  Patterson 
is  said  to-be  in  prison  at  Atchison.     Anson  Anderson  can,  talk  more 
nonsense  [N-N-]  than  any-other  person  on  either  side-of  Mason  and 
Dixon's  Line.     There-z'j  much  vexation  and  imposition  in-our  laws 
regarding  taxation,  and  unless-there-zV  a  cessation,  or  some  relaxa- 
tion, our  position  wi/I-be  very  unpleasant.     He  inflicted  a  severe 
castigation  (305)  upon-the  boy,  who,  being  enveloped  in  very  thick 
clothing  was  unflinching  in-his  manner.     They-have-been  beaten  by- 
their-own  tactics,  but  rather-than  admit  it  they-will  try  in-some-way 
to-cover  it  up. 

LESSON  XIX. 
PREFIXES  AND   SUFFIXES. 

337.  Definition  of   Prefix. — A  prefix  is  a  phono- 
graphic sign  placed  at  the  beginning  of  an  outline  (either 
joined  or  detached)  which  is  used  with  more  than  its 
ordinary  signification. 

338.  Definition   of  Suffix. — A   suffix   is   a  phono- 
graphic sign  placed  at  the  finish  of  an  outline  (either 
joined  or  detached)  which  is  used  with  more  than  its 
ordinary  signification. 

339.  "Com,"  "Cum,"  or  "Con."— When  a  word 
commences  with  either  com,  cum,  or  con,  its  outline  is 
generally  abbreviated  by  omitting  the  consonant-signs  of 
this  syllable,  and  simply  writing  the  rest  of  the  outline 
in  the  most  convenient  way.     The  omitted  syllable  is. 
however,  usually  indicated  in  one  or  the  other  of  the 
following  ways: 

1.  By  placing  a  light  dot  near  the  beginning  and  in 


PREFIXES  AND   SUFFIXES.  127 

line  with  the  first  stem  of  the  abbreviated  outline;  thus,  — 


combination        company       cumbersome         constable      congress 

II.  By  simply  writing  the  abbreviated  form,  without 
the  dot,  close  to  the  outline  of  the  next  preceding  word; 
thus,  — 

they-complained    it-contained     large-congregation     in-connection 
This  latter  mode  is  called  "  indication  by  proximity." 

REMARK.  It  is  entirely  optional  with  the  phonographer  which 
mode  of  indication  he  will  use  ;  and  one  may  be  employed  at  one 
time,  and  at  other  times  the  other  mode  may  be  adopted,  according 
to  which  best  suits  the  occasion. 

340.  In  the  Middle  of  Words  any  of  these  syllables, 
com,  cum,  con,  etc.,  and  also  the  syllable  cog,  may  be  in- 
dicated by  proximity;  thus,  — 


decompose        discontent       incomplete        inconstant       incumbent 

LN     J!~L  _/^>  .....    SC   .  At.  • 

disencumber      unconscious       recognition      reconcile       reconvey 

341.  And  sometimes,  in  the  middle  of  words,  even 
proximity  itself  is  omitted,  and  the  latter  part  of  the  out- 
line joined  to  the  first,  without  removing  the  pen  from 
the  paper;  thus,  — 


y... 
< 


accommodation       inconsistent      inconsiderable         circumference 

342.  "Cog"  at  the  Beginning  of  Words.  —  Al- 

though the  syllable  cog,  in  the  middle  of  words,  is  indi- 


128  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

cated  by  proximity  (339,  340),  yet,  at  the  beginning  o' 
words,  it  is  never,  like  com  and  con,  expressed  by  the  dot, 
but  is  always  written  in  full.  In  words  commencing  with 
cogn,  if  the  first  three  letters  are  pronounced  kog,  as  in 
cognomen,  the  syllable  is  written  with  Kay-Gay;  if  the 
entire  combination  cogn  is  pronounced  kon,  as  in  the 
word  cognizance  (as  pronounced  by  some),  it  is  written 
with  the  sign  Ken. 

REMARK.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  syllables  com  and  con  are 
indicated  by  the  dot,  regardless  of  whether  com  is  pronounced  kom, 
as  in  combination,  or  kum,  as  in  company ;  or  whether  con  is  pro- 
nounced kon,  as  in  condemn,  kun,  as  in  constable,  or  kong,  as  in 
congress. 

343.  Full  Outlines  Sometimes  Best. — When  a  word  begins 
with  con  followed  by  /  (cont),  the  use  of  the  half-length  Kent  will 
sometimes  give  a  better  outline  than  will  come  from  using  either  the 
dot  or  proximity.  See  the  outlines  of  the  words  contour,  contiguity, 
continent,  etc. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


•^  7-  ^  ..&.J. 


PREFIXES   AND   SUFFIXES.  129 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

344.  Commit,  convey,  compel,  confine,  contain,  condition,  com- 
petition, convention,  component,  composure,  communicate,  compete, 
compatible,    combined,    confound,    compose,    concise,   combustion, 
composition,  comply,  control,  compliment,  compromise,  conclusion, 
congressional,   conversation,    conclude,    complaint    or   complained, 
compartment,    constancy,    consent,    consist,    construe  (accented   on 
first  syllable) ;  reconstruction,  unconsciously    incumbrance,  uncon- 
ditional, circumlocution.     (343)  Contagious,  contents,  contused,  con- 
tortion (-v?shn),  contiguous,  continental. 

345.  Straight     Breves    and    Proximity. — The 

breves  for  a,  and,  I,  of,  the,  and  he  may  be  written  close 
to  the  beginning  of  a  word-outline  from  which  initial 
com  or  con  has  been  omitted,  to  indicate  respectively 
a  com  or  con,  and  com  or  con,  I  com  or  con,  etc, 

346.  Has  no  Position  of  its  Own. — In  such  cases  the  breve-sign 
does  not  have  any  position  of  its  own,  but  accommodates  itself  to  tht 
position  of  the  outline  which  it  precedes. 

347.  The  straight  breve-words  before  com  or  con  are 
written  as  follows: 

A  or  and  com  or  con,  always  by  Poid. 

I  or  of  com  or  con,  always  by  Roid. 

The  com  or  con,  always  by  Choid. 

He  com  or  con,  by  Toid  or  Koid. 

348.  Breve  Written  First. — The  breve-sign  should  always  be 
written  before  making  the  outline  of  the  succeeding  word. 
Examples : 

\      .  \0   \^Ls    ^  \    "  . 

a-    Vp V^-    andr  •„:*--' —p 


I-   'o^ 

/v-x'S 


the- 


^  '^   ,     V  '<S  '\  ^ 

..I....?..'*    >L,     he-..^..K^ -  >.  ."r.71-..  !_!_,. 


130 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


REMARK.  "  Ing." — The  "  Ing-dot,"  the  use  of  which  is  explained 
at  148,  under  the  definitions  given  is  properly  a  suffix,  the  same  as 
the  dot  for  com  is  a  prefix. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


.J  , 


.  \  s?..  U  , 


t  -  V 


V — 


v  j. 


so 


\- \- 


<5_P 
.-  X 


~c 


\ 


b  k 


PREFIXES   AND   SUFFIXES.  131 


°\  \ 

V     e-      \ 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

To-avoid  confusion  a«*/  conduce  to-the  comfort  0/-all  in-the  con- 
ference, members  of-the  commission  should  confine  themselves  to 
communications  /^a/-have  direct  connection  ivith-the  sufy'tct-m&tter 
concerning-7f^zV^  they-are  convened.  With  one  consent  they  con- 
cluded to  consult  together  arid-then  act  in  concert.  Confer  wilA-your 
companions  ««</-then  convey  to-the  Convention,  w^«-it  convenes 
again,  your  conclusions  about  reconstruction.  /  concur  with  every- 
thing contained  in-Ais  comments  on-the  constitutionality  of-the 
Consolidation  Act  ;  it-was  a  commendable  and  uncommonly  fine 
contribution  to-the  arguments.  The  compensation  of-the  Commis- 
sioner is  small  in  comparison  with  some  incomes  in  commercial  life. 
On-the  completion  of-the  work-of  reconstructing  the  old  Congrega- 
tional Church,  the  contractor,  after  consulting  in-a  conversational  way 
•with  some-of-the  congregation,  a«</in-consideration  of  certain  mutual 
concessions,  concluded  to-reduce  his  bill. 

349.  "  Ble  "  and  "  Ely."  —  Whenever,  in  writing  the 
terminal  syllables  ble  and  bly,  the  regular  form  Bel  can- 
not be  readily  joined,  as  occurs  in  writing  such  words 
as  attainable,  prwable,  fashionable,    reversible,   etc.,  the 
simple  stem  Bee  may  be  used  instead.     Then,  if  ever 
complete  outlines  be  required,  El  may  be  added  to  the 
Bee  in  writing  ble,  and  Lee  may  be  added  in  writing  bly. 
See  outlines  of  sensible  and  sensibly. 

350.  "Bleness,"    "Fulness,"    "Iveness,"  and 
"  Lessness."  —  These  terminal  syllables,  in  such  words 
as  teachableness,  usefulness,  combativeness,  carelessness,  etc., 
may  be  abbreviated  by  writing  them  respectively  with 
detached  Bess,  Fess,  Vess,  and  Lees. 


132  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

351.  "Ever"  and  "Soever"  in  Compounds.-- 

These  words,  when  not  standing  alone,   are  written  as 
follows : 

352.  Ever,  at  the  beginning  of  words,  as  in  everlasting, 
evermore,  etc.,  is  always  written  in  full  (Ver). 

353.  At  the  end  of  words,  if  not  immediately  preceded 
by  the  syllable  so,  the  termination  ever  is  written  with 
either  the  Vee-hook  or  the  stem  Vee. 

354.  Soever  is  usually  written   with   breve-s  and  the 
stem  Vee  (Sev).     But  if  the  primitive  word  ends  with 
breve-s,  stem  Ess  is  used  instead  of  the  circle.     See  out- 
lines of  whencesoever  and  whosesoever. 

355.  Position. — The   outline   of   the   first  word   of. 
every  compound  ending  in  ever  should  be  written  in  its 
proper  position,   without  regard  to  the  location  of  the 
primary  accent.     See  outlines  of  wherever,  however,  and 
forever. 

356.  "  For,"  "  Fore,"  and  "  Form."— The  syllables 
for  and  fore  at  the  beginning  of  words,  and  the  syllable 
form  at  the  end  and  in  the  middle  of  words,  as  in  the 
words  forbid,  forever,  foreknowledge,  foreshadow,  per- 
form, platform,  uniformity,  etc.,  are  frequently  written 
with  the  stem  Ef,  either  joined  or  disjoined. 

357.  "Magna,"  "  Magne,"  and  "Magni."— At 
the  beginning  of  such  words  as  magnanimity,  magnetic, 
magnificent,  etc.,  the  first  two  syllables  are  usually  written 
with  the  stem  Em,  disjoined  and  placed  over  and  near 
the  commencement  of  the  rest  of  the  outline.     This  latter 
part  of  the  outline  is  written  in  the  position  required  by 
the  accented  vowel. 

358.  "Mental-ly,"    "  Mentality."— The   termina- 
tions mental-ly,  mentality,  in  such  words  as  sacramental, 
supplemental,  instrumental-ly\  instrumentality,  etc.,  may  be 


PREFIXES   AND   SUFFIXES.  133 

written  by  the  stem  Ment,  disjoined  and  placed  after  and 
near  the  preceding  part  of  the  outline. 

359.  Position. — The  outlines  of  these  words,  except 
that  of  instrumentality ',  are  written  in  the  position  of  the 
primary  word. 

360.  "Ology"    and    "Alogy." — The   terminations 
ology  and  alogy,  as  in  the  words  theology,  pathology,  phy- 
siology, mineralogy,  etc.,  may  be  written  with  the  stem 
Jay,  either  joined  or  detached,  according  to  convenience. 
Sometimes  the  full  outline  is  used,  as  in  the  words  ety- 
mology, philology,  tautology,  etc. 

361.  "Self"  at  the  Beginning  of  Words.— In 
such   compounds   as   self-defense,   self-esteem,   self-same, 
etc.,  self  may  be  written  with  breve-s  on  the  line;  the 
rest  of  the  outline  being  placed  close  after  it,  and  in  its 
own  proper  position.     The  prefix  un  before  self  may  be 
written  with  the  En-curl  in  writing  the  word  unselfish 
and  derivatives. 

362.  "  Self"  at  the  End  of  Words  may  be  written 
with   the   full    outline,    Slee-Ef,    or   with   the   breve-s, 
usually  joined,  but  occasionally  detached   and   placed 
close  to  the  preceding  part  of  the  outline. 

363.  "Selves,"   final,   is   usually   written  with   the 
large  circle  (breve-sez)  joined. 

364.  "Ship." — The  suffix  ship  may  be  written  with 
the  stem  Ish,  and  either  joined  or  detached,  according 
to  convenience. 

Shus. — See  new  rule,  page  202,  paragraph  449. 

365.  "  With." — The  syllable  with,  wherever  it  occurs 
in  a  word,  is  written  with  the  stem  Dhee.     In  writing 
the  word  forthwith  the  stem  Ith  may  be  used. 

366.  "Worthy,"  wherever  it  occurs  in  a  word,  is 
written  with  its  abbreviation,  Thoid-Dhee. 


134  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

Lamentable,  attainable,  exceptionable,  defensible,  permissible-y, 
forcible-y,  reversible,  invincible,  serviceableness,  salableness,  favor 
ableness,  joyfulness,  painfulness,  doubtfulness,  hurtfulness,  use- 
fulness, fruitfulness,  combativeness,  destructiveness,  talkativeness, 
fearlessness,  worthlessness,  heedlessness,  helplessness,  evermore, 
whichever,  whichsoever  [wheresoever],  whithersoever,  whoever,  for- 
bidding, forbearance,  forget,  formality,  misinformed,  uniform,  fore- 


PREFIXES   AND   SUFFIXES.  135 

knew,  forethought,  magnetize,  magnify,  magnitude,  supplemental, 
sacramental,  instrumental,  phraseology,  pathology,  doxology,  ety- 
mology [written  in  full],  self-evident,  self-love,  self-confidence, 
myself,  yourself,  ourselves,  courtship,  lordship,  workmanship,  unship 
[in  full],  withdraw,  withstand,  withstood,  wherewith,  worthiness, 
blameworthy,  unworthy. 

REMARK.  The  following  Writing  Exercise  on  the  subject  of 
Phrenology  has  been  selected  because  it  brings  in  quite  a  number  of 
the  more  important  suffixes  that  have  just  been  explained.  In  the 
early  days  of  Phonography  in  this  country  the  reporting  of  "  charac- 
ters," from  the  dictation  of  professional  phrenologists,  was  one  of 
the  frequent  employments  of  shorthand  writers. 

WRITING  EXERCISE.     SUBJECT  :  "  PHRENOLOGY." 

367.  Vitativeness  Strong.  Set  a  very  high  estimate  upon  life  and 
will  resist  disease  to  the  last ;  with  the  other  propensities  strong,  will 
manifest  great  courage  in  self-preservation. — Executiveness  very 
Strong.  Are  extremely  aggressive,  active,  energetic  ;  can't  be  still ; 
delight  in  doing,  undertaking,  dispatching  work,  business,  study,  and 
whatever  is  to  be  done. — Acquisitiveness  Good.  Are  anxious  to  ac- 
cumulate, industrious  in  business,  sufficiently  economical ;  cannot 
bear  extravagance. — Secretiveness  very  Strong.  Are  very  reserved, 
sly,  non-committal ;  too  secretive  to  be  strictly  honest.  With  moder- 
ate Conscience  are  sly,  tricky,  foxy,  untrustworthy. — Amativeness 
Strong.  Are  very  loving,  warm-hearted,  and  affectionate  ;  a  great 
admirer  of  personal  beauty  as  well  as  intellectual  attainments  in  the 
opposite  sex. — Inhabitiveness  ve*y  Strong.  Have  an  extremely  strong 
attachment  to  one  place  ;  cannot  think  of  changing ;  prefer  the  old 
home  with  all  its  disadvantages  to  moving  to  a  more  favored  spot  with 
many  improvements. — Constructiveness  very  Strong.  Are  extremely 
fond  of  making  things  ;  have  great  natural  mechanical  ingenuity ; 
want  to  take  everything  to  pieces  to  study  its  mechanism  ;  are  always 
contriving  and  constructing  plans  of  some  form. — Mirthfulness  very 
Strong.  Are  extremely  fond  of  the  ridiculous  ;  are  always  laughing 
and  making  others  laugh. — Agreeablencss  very  Strong.  Are  extremely 
winning,  bland,  and  agreeable  ;  always  wear  a  pleasant  smile ;  say 
the  most  disagreeable  things  in  a  pleasant  manner ;  are  polite  and 
courteous  to  all. 


136 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

LESSON  XX. 


WORDS    COMMENCING    WITH 
"IL,"  "1M,"  ' 


"  IN,"    "  EN,"    "  UN,' 
IR." 


368.  When  the  prefix  in,  en,  or  un  is  added  to  words 
beginning  with  n  (as  in  nerve-innerve,  noble-ennoble , 
necessary-unnecessary],  or  the  equivalent  prefix  il,  ////,  or 
irt  to  words  beginning  with  /,  m,  or  r,  respectively  (as  in 
legal- illegal,  moderate-immoderate,  regular-irregular],  the 
outlines  of  the  derivatives  (tnnerve,  ennoble,  unnecessary, 
iilegal,  immoderate,  irregular,  etc.)  are  distinguished  from 
those  of  the  primitives  (nerve,  noble,  necessary,  legal,  etc.) 
by  repeating  the  sign  of  the  first  consonant  of  the  primi- 
tives. 

369.  Sometimes  the  rule  at  104,  for  the  use  of  downstrokes  and 
upstrokes  at  the  beginning  of  outlines,  cs  affected  by  the  absence  or 
presence  of  an  initial  vowel,  may  be  applied,  thereby  obviating  the 
necessity  of  duplicating  the  first  consonant;  as  in  the  outlines  of 
irrigation,  illustration,  illustrate,  irrelevant,  irreligious,  etc. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


RULES   FOR   PAST-TENSE   OUTLINES.  137 

WRITING  EXERCISE. 

370.  Unnatural,    unnavigable,   unnecessary,    unnoticed,    illegal, 
illegible,    immemorial,    immoderate,    immoral    (-M-^l),    immortal 
(-Mrt-Z),  irreverent,  irremediable,  irrefutable,  irregular,  removable, 
irremovable    [irremediable],   irrepressible,    irresistible,   irrespective, 
irrevocable.     (369)  Irruption,  irreligious  (R-Z-),  illumination. 

RULES  FOR  THE  FORMATION  OF  PAST-TENSE 
OUTLINES,  ETC. 

371.  The  phonographic  outlines  of  the  past  tense  of  regular  verbs 
are  generally  formed  from  those  of  the  first  person  of  the  present 
tense,  in  accordance  with  the  following  rules. 

RULE  I. — TERMINATIONS  IN  FULL-LENGTH  STEMS. 

372.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  consists  of  or  ends  with 
a  full-length  stem,  whether  simple  or  hooked, — usually  by  halving 
such  stem  (as  in  writing  etched,  viewed,  called,  fined,  cautioned,  at- 
tached, etc.) ;  but  occasionally  by  simply  adding  to  it  the  stem  Dee, 
especially  if  the  word  has  but  one  consonant-stem  ;  see  keyed,  rowed, 
annoyed,  laid,  etc. 

373.  When,  however,  the  form  of  the  present  tense  contains  more 
than  one  stem,  and  the  last  stem  cannot  properly  be  halved,  sometimes 
an  equivalent  stem  that  may  be  halved  is  substituted  (as  in  writing 
dash,  dashed  •  fire,  fired)  ;  but  in  most  such  cases  the  final  stem  is  not 
changed,  and  either  Tee  or  Dee  is  added  to  it  (as  in  evoked,  looked, 
bobbed,  etc.). 

RULE  II. — TERMINATIONS  IN  HALF-LENGTH  STEMS. 

374.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  consists  of  or  ends  with 
a  half-length  stem,  whether  simple  or  hooked, — by  making  it  full 
length  and  then  adding  Ted  or  Ded  (as  in  writing  cheated,  included, 
amounted,  etc.). 

375.  But,  in  case  the  present-tense  form  ends  with  a  hook  so  situ- 
ated that  in  making  the  past-tense  outline  the  final  Ted  or  Ded  cannot 
readily  be  added  to  it,  the  stem-form  must  be  substituted  for  the  hook, 
and  the  final  Ted  or  Ded  joined  on  to  that  (as  in  writing  anointed 
grafted,  etc.). 


138  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

376.  After  the  stems  Tee,  Dee,  Way,  and  Yay  with  simple  termi- 
nations, the  final  Ted  or  Ded  of  past-tense  outlines  must  be  detached 
and  lapped  (as  in  writing  doubted,  awaited,  treated,  dreaded,  etc.). 

377.  Sometimes  when  the  stem  Way,  Yay,  or  Hay  is  used  in  the 
present-tense  forms,  its  breve-sign  equivalent  is  used  in  the  past-tense 
forms  (as  in  writing  weigh,  weighed ;  wait,  waited  ;  heat,  heated,  etc.). 

RULE   III. — TERMINATIONS   IN    LENGTHENED   STEMS   WITHOUT  FINAL 
HOOKS. 

378.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  consists  of  or  ends  with 
a  lengthened  stem  without  final  hook, — either  by  simply  adding  Dee 
to  the  present-tense  outline,  or  by  changing  the  double-length  to  a 
single-length  stem,  and  then  adding  Tred,  Dred,  or  Dherd,  according 
to  which  is  required  to  be  added  by  the  particular  word  in  question 
(as  in  writing  feathered,  loitered,  shattered,  ordered,  withered,  etc.). 

RULE  IV. — TERMINATIONS  IN  LENGTHENED  STEMS  WITH  FINAL 
HOOKS. 

379.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  consists  of  or  ends  with 
a  lengthened  stem  with  final  hook, — by  changing  the  double-length 
to  a  half-length  with  the  same  final  hook,  and  then  adding  Erd  (as  in 
writing  pondered,  foundered,  blundered,  slandered,  etc.).    The  outline 
of  engendered  cannot  be  written  according  to  the  rule. 

RULE  V. — TERMINATIONS  IN  BREVE-S  NOT  INSIDE  OF  A  HOOK  OR 
CURL. 

380.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  ends  with  breve-s,  not 
written  inside  of  a  final  hook  or  curl, — by  changing  the  circle  to  a 
small  loop  (as  in  w riling  passed,  used,  chanced,  etc.). 

RULE  VI. — TERMINATIONS  IN  BREVE-S  INSIDE  OF  A  HOOK  OR  CURL. 

381.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  ends  with  breve-s,  written 
inside  of  a  final  hook  or  curl, — by  writing  the  hook  or  curl  consonant 
with  its  stem-sign,  and  changing  the  circle  to  a  small  loop  (as  in  writ- 
ing fence,  fenced ;  license,  licensed,  etc.). 

RULE  VII. — TERMINATIONS   IN  BREVE-SEZ. 

382.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  ends  with  breve-sez, — 
by  simply  adding  Dee  to  the  large  circle  (as  in  writing  emphasized, 
etc.). 


RULES   FOR   PAST-TENSE   OUTLINES.  139 

RULE  VIII. — TERMINATIONS  IN  BREVE-EST. 

383.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  ends  with  breve-est, — 
by  changing  the  loop  to  breve-s,  and  then  adding  Ted  (as  in  writing 
adjusted,  assisted,  etc.). 

RULE  IX. — TERMINATIONS  IN  BREVE-STER. 

384.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  ends  with  breve-ster, — 
by  changing  the  large  loop  to  a  small  one,  and  then  adding  Erd  or 
Red,  whenever  it  is  convenient  to  make  the  outline  in  that  way  ; 
otherwise,  it  is  done  by  changing  the  large  loop  to  breve-s,  and  then 
adding  Tred  (as  in  writing  bolstered,  pestered,  mastered,  etc.). 

RULE  X. — TERMINATIONS  IN  FINAL  CURL. 

385.  When  the  form  for  the  present  tense  ends  with  a  final  curl,— 
by  changing  the  curl  to  a  half-length  En  (as  in  writing  chasten, 
(hastened  j  fasten,  fastened,  etc.). 

386.  Past  Tense  of  Abbreviations. — The  past-tense  forms  of 
verbs,  which  in  the  present  tense  are  usually  written  with  abbrevi- 
ations, are  given  at  pages  151  to  154,  and  should  be  learned  as  there 
given,  because  they  are  not  always  written  in  accordance  with  the 
foregoing  rules  for  past-tense  forms. 

READING  EXERCISE. 


140  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

-^    •  —  l 


^     -I-...      ..x7.or..X7...          - 

«r>  *          'i       ^f    Vi 


.v 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

387.  (372)  Paid,  ebbed,  aimed,  played,  applied,  offered,  chained, 
rained,  fined,  assigned,  achieved,  battered,  motioned,  cleaned,  braved, 
rowed,  allowed,  foamed,  shaved,  coiled,  peopled,  saved,  waved  or 
waived,  waked,  yoked,  hemmed,  inclined.     (373)  Fire,   fired  (-^d), 
flocked,  lacked,  clucked,  gagged.     (374)  Shout,  shouted,  include,  in- 
cluded,  prompt,   prompted,    bond,   bonded,   plant,   planted,   invent 
(375),    invented.      (376)    Doubt,    doubted,    dread,    dreaded.      (377) 
Weight,  weighted,  heat,  heated.    (378)  Shattered,  altered,  furthered, 
withered.     (379)   Pondered,  rendered,   wondered,   blundered,   slan- 
dered.     (380)    Raised,    faced,    amused,    leased,    forced,    witnessed, 
pleased,  addressed,  bruised,  chanced,  glanced.     (381)  Fence,  fenced, 
silence,  silenced.   (382)  Criticised,  exercised,  possessed.   (383)  Posted, 
fasted,  arrested,  trusted.     (384)  Fostered,  bolstered,  flustered,  mus- 
tered.    (385)  Poison,  poisoned,  fasten,  fastened,  listen,  listened. 

FORMS  OF  PLURAL  AND  POSSESSIVE  NOUNS,  ETC. 

388.  The  outlines  of  nouns  in  the  plural  number,  ending  regularly 
in  s  or  es,  as  well  as  of  nouns  in  the  possessive  case,  are  formed  from 
the  outlines  of  the  singular  number  in  the  following  manner : 


FORMS   OF  PLURALS  AND   POSSESSIVES.        14! 

I.  Except  when  the  outline  of   the  singular   number  ends  with 
breve-s, — always  by  the  addition  of  breve-s. 

II.  When  the  outline  of  the  singular  number  ends  with  breve-s, — 
by  changing  the  breve-s  to  breve-sez.     If  the  final  breve-s  of  the 
singular  number  is  turned  within  an  n-hook  or  curl,  (as  in  fence  or 
license),  the  stem  En  must  be  substituted  for  the  hook  or  curl  before 
joining  the  breve-sez. 

389.  Certain  Verb  Forms. — The  outlines  of  verbs  in  the  third 
person  singular  of  the  indicative  present  are  formed  from  the  outlines 
of  their  roots  exactly  in  accordance  with  the  foregoing  rules  for 
plurals  and  possessives  ;  thus,  love,  he  lows, — hiss,  it  hisses, — lance, 
he  lances,— ^license,  he  licenses,  etc. 


READING  EXERCISE. 


WRITING  EXERCISE. 

390.  Days,  sheep's,  pins,  matters,  grounds,  painters  or  painter's  or 
painters',  men's,  funds,  infant's,  roofs,  passions,  nations  or  nation's, 
ancients,  writers  or  writer's,  scepters,  physicians,  incisions,  case, 
cases,  miss,  misses,  sources,  Jones's,  appearances,  fence,  fences,  lens, 
lenses,  processes,  posts,  rosters,  spinsters,  poisons,  lessons,  Wesson's, 
Watson's,  absence,  absences. 


142          MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

UNVOCALIZED  PHONOGRAPHY. 

391.  Assuming  that  the  learner  has  up  to  this  point  in  his  study 
made  it  a  rule  to  vocalize  pretty  fully  everything  that  he  has  written, 
he  must  now  be  familiar  with  all  the  principles  of  vocalization,  and 
have  become  quite  expert  in  placing  the  vowel-signs  to  the  outlines 
of  words.     He  may,  therefore,  now  begin  to  leave  out  those  signs  and 
to  write  nothing  but  the  consonant  outlines.     In  all  practice  from 
dictation  for  speed  the  vowel-signs  should  be  omitted.     This  is  called 
writing  unvocalized  phonography,  which  is  the  kind  of  phonography 
that  all  shorthand  reporters  and  amanuenses  write.     And  yet  every 
phonographer  must  sometimes  insert  a  vowel-sign  in  order  to  have  his 
notes  always  readily  legible  ;  so  it  will  not  be  well  to  give  up  entirely 
and  for  all  the  vocalizing  of  words.     A  little  special  practice  now  and 
then  with  vocalized  phonography  should  be  kept  up  so  as  to  keep  the 
hand  in.     But  the  sooner  one  learns  to  read  unvocalized  phonography 
the  better,  and,  with  the  exception  of  an  occasional  vowel  thrown  in 
for  safety,  the  outlines  should  be  left  entirely  without  vocalization. 
Some  phonographers  hang  on  to  the  vowels  too  long,  and  so  detract 
from  speed,  and  at  the  same  time  actually  endanger  the  legibility  of 
their  writing. 

MISCELLANEOUS   ABBREVIATIONS. 

392.  The   following  list   contains    all   the   miscellaneous   phono- 
graphic abbreviations  that  are  required  by  shorthand  writers,  even  in 
the  swiftest  verbatim  reporting ;  and  learners  should  not  adopt  any 
others.     Speed  in  writing  phonography  does  not  come  from  the  use 
of  a  great  number  of  contracted  forms.     And  yet  it  is  true  that  there 
are  times  when  the  reporter,  in  order  to  both  save  time  and  avoid  the 
labor  of  repeatedly  writing  the  long  outline  of  some  oft-recurring 
word,  will  improvise  an  abbreviation  for  it,  to  be  used  for  the  time 
being  only.     Then  again,  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  nothing  abso- 
lutely  compulsory  about   the   invariable   employment  of  all   these 
abbreviated  outlines.     If  the  reporter  chooses,  for  reasons  of  his  own, 
to  sometimes  use  the  full  outline  of  a  word,  instead  of  the  abbreviated 
form,  he  may  do  so.     But  the  author  recommends  that  every  writer 
of  the  system  adopt,  and,  as  a  rule,  use,  the  list  in  its  entirety. 


LIST   OF  ABBREVIATIONS   AND   INITIALS. 
LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS  AND  INITIALS. 


A. 

..  ./  archbishop 

A. 

1          architect-uri 

a 

1—,          architectura 

according  (to) 

^\.  are 

/  .    acknowledge 

^  .  .    aristocracy-1 

Urx_*w?.     administratrix 

.    .  .      artificial-ly 

/            advantage 

as 

»  advertise 

KTS         assemble-y 

advertisement 

astonish-ed 

*  ah 

awe 

_  almost 

•            ave  (ever) 

already 

V 

aye  (yes) 

altogether 

B. 

>—  <  among 

^   a              fttnOTlgSt 

OL   B' 

^~*^^        bank-note 

._  an 

^^        bankrupt 

and 

^—  ^\        bankruptcj 

•/            angel 

^"^        baptism 

.    vjx^        anniversary 

baptist 

another 

because 

antagonistic 

\  become 

_  any 

\          before 

anybody 

began 

anything 

begin 

.  ~^  ...  .    archancel 

rr^>  begun 

144 


MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 


s. 

belief-ve 

circumstantial 

--N---- 

belong 

P.  citizen 

beneficial 

.--<"          ..     collect 

XI? 

benignant 

...  —  come 

i 

between 

consequence 

—  j  
r 

beyond 

consequent 

bishopric 

1  contingency 

\ 

brethren 

M            controversy 

._.v... 

brother 
brother-in-law 

.  c  ..     correct 
could 

....V... 

but 

county 

c. 

.    cross-examine 

C. 

D. 

—  \ 

cabinet 

--L...        D. 

— 

can 

\ 
..  lj_.    .    danger 

-^ 

capable 

J^x         December 

—  ^ 

captain 

1            defendant 

~l 

catholic 

degree 

C? 

celestial-ly 

f           delinquent 

certificate 

P           deliver 

°/^ 

change 

democracy-tic 

„ 

characteristic 
charge 

—  t-N-...    democrat 

/I... 

children 

description 

/ 

Christian 

vv         develop 

-L. 

circumstance 

...1.-.  .    did 

LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS  AND   INITIALS.       145 


1 

differ-ence-ent 

-••^x_y  -  -    evangelical 

difficult-y 

c— 

ditmifv 

...L_.... 

dignity 
discriminate 

?Ny  —    experience 
-•--        -       extraordinary 

...i... 

distinct 

F 

I 

distinguishing 

.  .    V  F. 

,^ 

do 

^          fact 

1 

Dr.  (doctor) 

I               familiar 

r| 

doctrine 

X_/^N 

^^"^       familiarity 

*"  ~~     v 

dollar 

^_._..    February 

\^- 

domestic 

financial-ly 

'        1- 

during 

\o  or  0      first 

...P.  

dwell 

^_.        for 

E. 

•form 

E. 

found 

y^_ 

effect 

frequent 

r 

electric 

from 

•-J- 

--V-- 

electrical-ly 
electricity 
electro- 
endeavor 
episcopal 
equality 

0. 

...._+.._.  G. 
...  —  ...  gave 
—  V-  general-ly 
...  6  generation 
.  .  .    gentleman 

X 

es.pecial-ly 

(/.  gentlemen 

C 

establish 

.    srive-n 

146 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


..         fev, 

•--  —  3  —    govern 

iniportant-ce 

v_       governor 

—  e^V...    Great  Britain 

...'.  —  "\            indignity 

H. 

TO...J      indispensable-y 

....  x-x....    H. 

S.  ..     infer 

1  had 

v  —  \           infln^npp 

....         ..    half 

inscribe 

o 

..    has 

insurance 

or  have 

</           intelligence 

_.i..or  ^-^.  he 

y.  intelligent 

...  f\  health-y 

interrogatory 

~N          hear,  here 

is 

>o  heaven 

0 

J. 

held 

/          J. 

...  /_\  help 

'         January 

-...JT\  her 

7          Jr.  (junior) 

.  _  i  _or.  x^v.  him 

-....?-  jurisprudence 

his 

K. 

o 

—  *-s-...    history 
...  >^...   home 

...  K. 
kingdom 

\         hope 

knew 

horse 

'  _        knowledge 

I. 
—,..V          I. 

L. 

r      L 

s 

.    lansniaee 

LIST   OF  ABBREVIATIONS  AND   INITIALS.       147 


/^—  1 
...'....<  languish 

:^,:: 

N. 

N. 
neglect 
negligence 
negligent 
never 
nevertheless 
new 
New-York 
next 
nobody 
notwithstanding 
November 
now 
number 
0. 
O.  O,  oh,  owe 
ob'ject 
object' 
objection 
observation 
observe 
of 
opinion 
opportunity 
other 

'.  large 

? 
.'          larger 

*.           largely 

...  fl.  legislature 
^~~(  length-y 
loner  (adi.) 

M. 

....^-N...-   M. 
malignant 

,..—.. 

...  v_^.__ 

^o 

7T^  .  manufacturer 

-^ 

N 

—  X-N-...    member 

.  /  

L 

—  ^....   mental 

N  .... 

Ni.... 

„...  /'""fc-rr..  mistake 

^..... 

....V.... 

....   X    

mortgage 

....V- 

"jr 

^""^  "  i      mortfira;£f66 

.   movement 

148 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


....    over 

...<\/r<7>..    preliminary 

own 

.  .  .  .  j.  prerogative 

p. 

A^.  principal-le 

parliament 

>         privilege 

part 

X        probability 

particular 

x 
\  .        probable-y 

«s. 

.    \  .          peculiar 

.  .  .  'V  proportion 

.  .  .  .  rr~     .   peculiarity 

.  \..     .    public-sh 

\             pecuniary 

\ 
Q. 

:V  people  (n.) 

0. 

perform 

...    Qualify 

X- 
..  performance 

quality 

• 
^^....  perpendicular 

quarter 

—  \>  1--  perpendicularity 
phonographer 

....£—  ...    question 
ft, 

phonographic 

^\         E. 

...              phonography 

^         recollect 

X  —  plaintiff 

s?_  recollection 

.  .^_  plenipotentiary 

/            recover 

_X  .  .    popular-ity 

s^        refer-ence 

.      possible-y 

/             regular 

\ 
_T^_  .  .  practicable-y 

regularity 

\J 

_CT77.  .  .  practical-ly 

j         religion 

practice 

"~t/f" 

V^       remark 

LIST   OF  ABBREVIATIONS   AND   INITIALS.       149 


—  T\—  x.  ..  remember 

.  .  .TV-t,  .  .  .  remembrance 

...  /\  ____  represent 

...  /^\  ____  representative 

...  /\3  ____  representation 

,.S\  —  republie-sk 

.wrffS  ----  repugnant 

—  -A----  responsibility 

oo 

-----  °.  —  responsible-y 


) 


^ 


resurrection 
.../X_...   Rev.  (reverend) 
. . .  (?:. . ..   revolutionary 
...  /TA ...    Roman  Catholic 

8. 
S. 

San  Francisco 
satisfaction 
satisfactory 

— Vo. savings-bank 

N Savior 

^ send 

— ^— -• . .    September 

V several 

....r/..__.  shall 

....^) should 

......  significance 


C 

\. 
.\ 


...    signify 

similar 

similarity 

^^ single 

/^--  singular 

singularity 

..a    *~'.-.  something 

e^ somewhat 

.  _  <s~^/. . .    somewhere 

southern 

speak 

special-ly 

% specification 

N spoke 

A  ....  subject 

.Si subjection 

— Sk subjective 

subscription 
'..  suggestion 

.'S superintendent 

™--..  surprise 

_. swear 

-.--<7N\ ...  swore 

. . .  ,V« sworn 

O..._  sympathy 

p..,.  system 


150  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

T.  ./; were 

i             T                                          = 
—  -]---—•  _ what 

..,>..  .     thank 
,  c._ when 

.    that 

«;. where 

..    the  / 

/ which 

...A...   .    their,  there 

who-m 

-( them  «..„!.„..    whom 

-") these  ? 

t  (. width 

thing 

N — •  fT~. Will 

(. think 

„ with 

._.....,..    time  c 

without 

— .  —.-...   together 

i/- world 

transfer                                  /• 
.  k worth 

QS- —    trausubstantiation  ? 

.  V worthy 

I truth 

..j would 

U. 

...n.or___.    U.  Y. 

..  r'^^rr-j'. ..    understood  fT. Y. 

../T. uniform  (?J year 

(>.-..  United  States  (.. yet 

s:. universe  /_. young 

-J usual-ly  -v-  °*-(r...  you 

..^....  usury  (". your 

-Lf>—-  usurious  V.  X.  Z. 

w.  ^.-—  v< 

~"\       W  X 

._  was  .... "I Z. 


MISCELLANEOUS  ABBREVIATIONS.  !$! 

OUTLINES  OF  DERIVATIVES  OF  THE  ABBREVIATIONS. 

393.  In  the  following  collection  of  words  printed  in  phonog- 
raphy will  be  found  the  outlines  of  most  of  the  derivatives  of 
the  words  given  in  the  foregoing  List  of  Abbreviations. 


'52 

^7    .TV 

I'f     &- 


MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 


'--^v"" 


ID 


\^-^- 


V  \l  \    *T 


MISCELLANEOUS  ABBREVIATIONS.  153 

KEY  TO  DERIVATIVES  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 

394.  (line  1)  Accordingly;  acknowledged,  acknowledging, 
acknowledgment ;  advantageous,  advantageously,  advantageous- 
ness,  disadvantage;  advertised,  advertising,  advertiser;  an- 
gelic; (1.  2)  assembled,  assembling;  astonishing,  astonishingly, 
astonishment ;  awed,  awing,  awe-struck,  awful-ly ;  becoming, 
becomingly ;  (1.  3)  beforehand ;  believed,  believing,  disbelief, 
unbelief ;  belonged,  belonging,  belongings ;  capability,  inca- 
pable ;  changed,  (1.  4)  changing,  changeableness,  exchange,  in- 
terchange, interchanged,  unchangeable ;  charged,  charging, 
chargeable,  discharge,  discharged ;  (1. 5)  Christianity ;  col- 
lected, collecting ;  consequential,  consequently ;  corrected,  cor- 
recting, (1.  6)  correctly,  correctness ;  cross-examined,  cross-exam- 
ining, cross-examination ;  delinquency ;  delivered,  delivering, 
delivery,  (1. 7)  deliverance,  deliverer,  redeliver,  redelivery,  unde- 
livered ;  described,  descriptive ;  developed,  developing,  devel- 
opment, (1.  8)  undeveloped ;  differed,  differing,  differences, 
differential,  indifferent;  difficultly;  dignified,  (1.  9)  dignify- 
ing ;  indiscriminate ;  distinctness,  indistinct,  indistinctness  ; 
indoctrinate ;  dwelt,  dwelling ;  effected,  (1.  10)  effecting ;  elec- 
trify ;  endeavored,  endeavoring ;  established,  establishing,  es- 
tablishment ;  experienced,  experiencing,  inexperienced ;  ex- 
traordinarily ;  familiarize,  familiarized,  (1.  11)  familiarizing, 
familiarly,  unfamiliar;  firstly;  formed,  forming,  inform,  in- 
formed, information,  (1.  12)  informer,  informal,  informality,  re- 
form, reformation ;  frequented,  frequenting,  frequently,  infre- 
quent, unfrequented ;  (1.  13)  degeneration,  regeneration : 
going;  governed,  governing,  government,  governmental,  un- 
governable ;  having;  (1.  14)  healthful,  healthfulness,  healthily, 
healthiness,  unhealthy ;  hearing ;  heavenliness,  heavenly, 
heavenward  ;  beheld,  upheld,  withheld ;  (1.  15)  helped,  helping, 
helpful,  helpfulness,  helpless,  helplessly,  helplessness ;  histo- 
rian, historic,  historical-ly ;  (1.  16)  homeliness,  homely,  home- 
ward ;  horseman ;  immediately,  immediateness ;  importantly, 
unimportant ;  (1. 17)  inferred,  inferring,  inferable,  inferential;  in- 
fluenced, influencing,  influential,  uninfluenced;  (1.  18) inscribed, 
inscribing,  inscription ;  intelligibility,  intelligible,  intelligible- 
ness,  intelligently  7  largest,  largeness;  lengthwise;  longer, 


[54  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

longest ;  (1.  19)  non-manufacturing,  unmanufactured .  mistak- 
ing, mistaken,  unmistakable ;  neglected,  neglecting,  (1.  20) 
neglectful ;  newly ;  numbered,  numbering,  numberless,  out- 
number, unnumbered ;  objected,  objecting,  objectionable ; 
(1.  21)  opinionated,  self-opinioned ;  overcome ;  owed,  owing, 
owes ;  owned,  owning,  owner ;  parliamentary ;  parted,  parting, 
partly,  (1.  22)  counterpart ;  particulars,  particularly,  particu- 
larity, particularize ;  peculiarly ;  popularly,  unpopular ;  im- 
possible-y;  (1.  23)  impracticability,  impracticable,  practicing, 
practices ;  principally,  unprincipled ;  improbability,  improb- 
able-y  ;  disproportion;  published,  (1.  24)  publishing,  publica- 
tion, publicly,  unpublished;  qualified,  qualifying,  qualification, 
disqualify,  disqualification,  unqualified,  (1.  25)  inequality ; 
questioned,  questioning,  questionable,  unquestionable-y,  cross- 
question  ;  recollected,  recollecting ;  (1.  26)  recoverable,  irre- 
coverable ;  regularly,  irregular ;  irreligion ;  remarked,  remark- 
ing, remarkable ;  remembered,  remembering,  (1.  27)  disremem- 
ber ;  represented,  representing,  misrepresent,  misrepresenta- 
tion ;  republican,  republic ation,  republicanism ;  repugnancy, 
repugnantly ;  (1.  28)  irresponsibility,  irresponsible-y ;  dissatis- 
faction, satisfactorily,  unsatisfactory ;  significancy,  significant, 
signification,  insignificant,  insignificancy,  signified,  (1.  29)  sig- 
nifying ;  dissimilar,  dissimilarity ;  singularly ;  speakable,  be- 
speak, unspeakable,  bespoke,  spoken,  bespoken,  outspoken, 
unspoken ;  (1.  30)  surprised,  surprising ;  swearing ;  sym- 
pathized, sympathizing,  sympathetic,  sympathetically;  sys- 
tematic, systemize,  (1.  31)  systematize;  thanked,  thanking, 
thanksgiving-day ;  things,  something,  nothing ;  thinking, 
thinks,  bethink,  thinker,  (1.  32)  unthinking,  unthinkingly ; 
timely,  untimely;  truthful,  truthfulness,  untruth,  untruthful, 
untruthfulness  ;  (1.  33)  unusual-ly  ;  whatever ;  whenever,  when- 
soever; anywhere,  nowhere,  somewhere;  wilful-ly,  willing, 
willingly ;  (1.  34)  within ;  worldliness,  worldly ;  worthless, 
worthlessness ;  worthier,  worthiest,  worthies ;  years,  leap-year ; 
younger,  youngest;  yours. 


REMARKS   ABOUT   ABBREVIATIONS.  155 

REMARKS  ABOUT   ABBREVIATIONS,   ETC. 

395.  Initials  of  Proper  Names.— In  the  foregoing  List  the  first 
phonographic  character  under  each  letter  is  the  sign  for  that  letter 
when  used  as  the  initial  of  a  proper  name.     See  the  signs  opposite  the 
initials  A. ,  B. ,  C. ,  etc.     A  short  tick  may  be  struck  across  any  shaded 
consonant-sign,  used  as  an  initial,  to  make  sure  that  it  will  not  be 
mistaken  for  the  corresponding  light  sign.     See  B.  and  P.,  G.  and 
K.,  H.  and  M.,  Y.  and  L.,  etc. 

396.  This  tick  across  shaded  stems  may  be  used  to  distinguish  such 
words  as  got,  get,  bags,  etc.,  from  the  respective  conflicting  words 
caught,  cut  or  come,  box  or  boxes,  etc. 

397.  In  using  the  phonographic  initials,  no  attention  is  paid  to  the 
sound  of  the  first  letter  of  a  name.     Thus,  the  sign  at  A.  (a  heavy 
dot)  is  the  initial  of  Arthur  (a),  Agnes  (a),  Austin  (a),  and  Amos  (a)  ; 
the  sign  at  C.  (or,  if  preferred,  a  small  longhand  c  may  be  used  in- 
stead) is  the  initial  of  Clara  (k),   Christopher  (k),  Charles  (ch),  and 
Cyrus  (s) ;  the  sign  at  G.  is  the  initial  of  Georgt(})utA  Garret  (g  hard) ; 
the  stem  Pee  is  the  initial  of  both  Philip  (f)  and  Paul  (p) ;  the  stem 
Tee  is  the  initial  of  Theodore  (th),    Thomas  (t),  and  Titus  (t).     The 
stems  Chay,  Ith,  and  Ish  are  never  used  for  initials,  and  Yay  only  for 
Y.,  not  for  U.,  which  see  in  the  List. 

398.  Words  Written  out  of  Position. — Each  of  the  following 
words  of  the  List  is  written  out  of  the  position  it  would  occupy  if 
written  according  to  the  rule  at  82,  in  order  to  avoid  conflict  with  the 
word  or  words  placed  after  it  in  parentheses  :  Advantage  (large,  age)  ; 
almost  (most) ;  already  (well)  ;  altogether  (again)  ;  another  (no-other) ; 
any  (no)  ;    do  (did)  ;    equality  (quality) ;    for  (after,    of-their  when 
written  Vether1) ;  found  (find) ;  gentleman  (gentlemen) ;  go  (come) ; 
he,  him  (me) ;  held  (hold) ;  of  (I,  have)  ;  there,  their  (at-all) ;  other 
(there,   their) ;  over  (very) ;  own  (know) ;  send  (sent)  ;  truth  (true)  ; 
were,  where  (are)  ;  which  (each). 

399.  "Company." — Standing  alone  company  is  written  in  full; 
but  in  phrases  it  is  generally  contracted  to  the  stem  Kay.     Example 
in  List :  —  Insurance  company. 

400.  "  Cover." — When  standing  alone  or  beginning  a  word  cover 
should  be  written  in  full.     But  when  other  syllables  precede,  it  may 
be  contracted  to  Kev.     Examples : 


156  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


KEY.     Discover,    discovered,    discovering,    recover,    uncovering, 
irrecoverable. 

401.  "  Dollar." — When  used  generally,  that  is,  not  in  connection 
with  numbers  denoting  sums  of  money,  dollar  is  written  in  full. 

402.  "  People,"  when  used  as  a  verb,  is  written  in  full. 

403.  "  Will." — As  an  auxiliary  verb  will  is  written  with  the  ab- 
breviation Lee  or  with  the  El-hook.     As  an  ordinary  verb,  or  as  a 
noun,  it  is  generally  written  with  the  sign  Weel ;  but  sometimes  with 
Lee.     The  following  sentence  illustrates  in  part  the  meaning  of  the 
rule  :  "  By  his  will  (Weel)  he  will  (Lee)  certainly  will  (Weel)  his  es- 
tate to  his  son." 

404.  Ing-Ish  for  "nguish  "  and  "  nquish." — The  terminations 
nguish  and  nquish  may  both  be  written  with  Ing-Ish.     Examples : 


KEY.  Languish,  distinguish,  extinguish,  relinquish,  languished, 
relinquishes.  See  abbreviation  for  distinguishing  in  List. 

405.  Words  ending  in  "  ntial-ly  "  and  "  ficial-ly." — The  out- 
lines of  words  ending  in  ntial-ly  an&Jicial-ly  may  be  abbreviated  as 
follows : 

1.  Terminate substantial-ly ,  circumstantial-ly ,  consequential-ly ,  and 
inferential-ly  with  the  En-hook. 

2.  Terminate  other  words  ending  in  ntial-ly  with  the  stem  Ish. 

3.  Terminate  words  ending  \nficial-ly  with  the  stem  Shee  ;  except 
that  offidal-ly  and  judicial-ly  are  usually  written  in  full. 

Examples : 


REMARKS   ABOUT   ABBREVIATIONS.  157 

KEY.  Substantial-ly,  circumstantial-ly,  conscqucntial-ly,  inferen- 
tial-ly,  presidential,  credential,  prudential,  essential-ly,  penitential, 
reverential.  Artificial-ly,  superficial-ly,  official,  officially,  judicial, 
judicially. 

406.  "  Ly  "  added  to  Abbreviations. — The  syllable  /pis  usually 
added  to  abbreviations  with  the  stem  Lee,  which  is  sometimes  joined 
and  sometimes  disjoined.  Examples  : 


KEY.  (joined)  Consequently,  correctly,  extraordinarily,  firstly, 
immediately,  particularly,  popularly,  uniformly,  worldly,  yearly ; 
(disjoined)  accordingly,  differently,  distinctly,  frequently,  intelli- 
gently, peculiarly,  publicly,  regularly,  repugnantly,  significantly, 
similarly. 

407.  Omission  of  Hooks. — There  are  a  few  words  from  whose 
outlines  hooks  may  be  omitted,  thereby  shortening  them  considerably, 
and  yet  not  impairing  their  legibility.  Examples  : 


L  *       I 


KEY.  Identical,  atonement,  assignment,  consignment,  spend- 
thrift, adjournment,  landlord. 

408.  "Uation." — Breve-yay  (Noid)  and  the  Shun-hook  may  be 
blended  together,  to  represent  the  termination  uation,  in  such  words 
as  •valuation,  insinuation,  etc.,  in  the  manner  shown  in  the  following 
examples.  Its  stenotype  is  "ushun." 


C, 


KEY.     Valuation,  attenuation,  insinuation,  infatuation,  accentua- 
tion. 


158  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

REMARKS   ABOUT   WORD   OUTLINES. 

409.  "  Ingly." — The  termination  ingly  is  written  with  the  stem 
Ingl  when  it  will  join  readily ;  otherwise  it  is  written  with  Ing-El. 
After  abbreviations  ingly  is  written  with  disjoined  Lee  (ing  being 
omitted).  Examples : 


KEY.     Exceedingly,  touchingly,  smilingly,  surprisingly,  discern- 
ingly, everlastingly,  becomingly. 

410.  "  Ington." — The  termination   ington  may  be  written  with 
either  Ingt-En  or  Ing-Ten.     In  writing  the  outlines  of  Worthingion 
and  Farmington,  the  form  Ing-Ten  is  preferred. 

411.  Two  Consecutive  N-sounds. — Two  consecutive  n-sounds 
not  beginning  a  word,  are  usually  written  with  the  N-hook  followed 
by  the  stem  En,  instead  of  with  stem  En  and  final  N-hook  (Nen). 
The  outlines  of  canon  and  linen  are  exceptions.     Examples  : 


KEY. — Pinion,  genuine,  genuineness,  cannon,  cannonade,  com- 
panion, minion,  Athenian,  tenant,  tenancy,  lenient,  leniency,  canon 
linen. 

412.  En-hook  for  stem  Ing. — In  the  case  of  a  few  words,  in 
which  in  the  ordinary  spelling  the  letter  n  has  the  sound  of  ngt  it  is 
allowable  to  use  the  N-hook  for  that  sound  (ng)  instead  of  the  stem 
Ing.  Examples : 


C- 


KEY.     Frank,  Franklin,  Lincoln,  fungus,  flank,  thanked. 
413.  Stem  Ing  for  "ng-g." — Whenever  in  the  common  orthog- 
raphy the  letters  ng  have  the  double  sound  of  ng-g,  as  in  the  words 


REMARKS   ABOUT   WORD   OUTLINES.  159 

anger  (ang-ger),  tingle  (ting-gle),  etc.,  it  is  allowable  to  write  thetw( 
sounds  (ng-g)  with  the  stem  Ing  alone.     Examples  : 


KEY.  —  Anger,  angle,  English,  linger,  jungle,  finger. 

414.  Signs  for  Initial  R.  —  Generally  at  the  beginning  of  words 
r  is  written  with  Ree  (104,  II.).  But  before  Em  and  Hay  with  sim- 
ple beginnings,  initial  r  is  written  with  Er  (106).  If,  however,  the 
Em  or  Hay  following  initial  r  has  an  initial  hook,  Ree  is  used.  But, 
for  the  sake  of  securing  shorter  or  easier  forms,  the  stem  Er  is  used 
for  initial  r  in  the  following  words  and  their  derivatives  :  retire,  re- 
tort, return,  resume.  Examples  : 


xr 


v, 


KEY.     Rumor,   rehearse,   retired,   retorted,    returned,  resuming, 
resumption. 

"W"  AT  THE  BEGINNING  OF  OUTLINES. 

415.  As  the  consonant  w  at  the  beginning  of  outlines  may  be  writ- 
ten in  two  ways,  either  with  the  stem  Way  or  with  a  breve-sign,  the 
learner  might  sometimes  be  in  doubt  as  to  which  form  to  use,  but  for 
the  fact  that  such  outlines  are  so  classified  and  arranged  in  a  few 
groups  that  they  are  easily  acquired. 

416.  General   Rule.  —  The  following  general   rule   covers  most 
cases  : 

1.  Before  a  stem  with  simple  beginning,  the  breve-sign,  Thoid  or 
Soid,  is  used  ;  as  in  writing  watch,  walk,  wave,  wing,  etc. 

2.  Before  a  stem  with  initial  hook  or  circle,  the  stem  Way  is  used  ; 
as  in  writing  waddle,  waiver,  wasp,  etc. 

417.  "  W  "  and  "  Wh."  —  The  sound  of  h  in  wh  being  seldom 
indicated  in  phonography,  a  distinction  between  w  and  wh  may  fre- 
quently be  made  by  using  the  breve-sign  for  w  only,  and  the  stem 
Way  for  wh  ;   as  in  writing  weep,  whip,  wig,  whig,  etc. 

418.  "W-l."—  The  three  forms  for  w-l,  Well,  Weel,  and  Way- 
Lee,  are  used  as  follows  : 

i.  Well  (stem  Way  with  L-hook)  is  used  for  wh-lj  —  as  in  writing 
while,  whale,  wheel,  etc. 


l6o  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

2.  Weel  (stem  Lee  with  W-hook)  is  used  for  w-l ;  —  as  in  writing 
wall,  wail,  etc. 

3.  Way-Lee  is  used  for  w-l  when  there  is  a  medial  and  final  vowel ; 
—  as  in  writing  wiley,  willow,  etc. 

Examples : 


1  ! 


rr       "V^  v~v^  ^V 

^yd:  -:yr! 

KEY.  Watch,  wide,  walk,  week,  wary,  wife,  waive,  wing  ;  wad- 
dle, weekly,  waiver,  wasp,  weasel  ;  weep,  whip,  worry,  wherry,  wig, 
whig,  wax,  whacks  ;  while,  whale,  wheel,  whelp  ;  wall,  wail,  wool, 
wealthy  ;  wallow,  willow,  wily,  Willie,  wallet. 

419.  "Wild." — Wild,  standing  alone  and  in  most  of  its  deriva- 
tives and  compounds,  is  written  with  the  half-length  upstroke  Weeld. 
But  in    wildly,    wild-cat,    wild-gpose,    the   half-length   down  stroke 
Weld  is  preferred. 

420.  "  Wood." — The  word  wood,  by  itself,  is  written  with  Thoid- 
Dee  (117).     But  as  a  final  syllable,  especially  in  proper  names,  -wood 
is  occasionally  written  with   half-length    Way  (Wed).      Examples: 
Linwood,  Lidgerwood,  Wedgwood,  etc. 

421.  Outlines  ending  in"tl"  and  "dl."— The  /of  final  //,  in 
such  words  as  chattel,  title,  battle,  fatal,  etc.,  is  generally  indicated 
by  halving  ;  while  the  d  in  final  dl,  in  such  words  as  paddle,  fiddle, 
bridle,  etc.,  is  usually  written  with    the   stem   Dee.      Exceptions; 
total-ly  [T-T1],  shuttle  fSH-Tll. 


FESTIVAL   OF   ABBREVIATIONS.  l6l 

422.  Initial  L  before  M-P  or  M-B,  as  in  the  outlines  of  lamp, 
limbo,  lumbago,  etc.,  is  better  written  with  El  than  with  Lee  ;  thus, 

^~~~^.      lump, 

423.  K  and  P  sometimes  Omitted. — The  sounds  of  k  after  ng 
and/  after  m  are  sometimes  so  short  as  to  be  almost  imperceptible ; 
therefore,  in  such  cases  their  signs  may  be  omitted  from  outlines  ; 
thus     <**2     sanction,      "(    anxiety,  [^  tempt,   )j-.)   assumption. 

424.  Perpendiculars  Written  Upwards. — Sometimes  after  a 
final  hook  the  downstroke  half-length  Est  cannot  be  joined  ;  and  it  is 
then  allowable  to  strike  it  upward  ;  thus,    V  \   factionist.     In  like 
manner  the  stem  Tee  may  be  joined  at  the  end  of  the  outline  of 
affectionate  by  striking  it  upward  ;  and  in  writing  affectionately,  the 
stem  Lee  may  be  joined  at  the  top  of  the  Tee.     The  stenotypes  of 
these  exceptional  upstrokes  are  S\.  and  T.     Upward  Tee  occurs  only 
in  this  one  instance.     But  upward  Est  is  used  in  writing  quite  a 
number  of  words,  among  which  are  the  following  :  Emancipationist, 
elocutionist,  fashionist,  fusionist,  perfectionist,  annexationist,  extor- 
tionist, etc. 

FESTIVAL  OF  THE  ABBREVIATIONS. 

REMARK.  The  following  article,  entitled  "  Festival  of  the  Abbre- 
viations," contains  substantially  all  of  the  words  found  in  the  List. 
It  should  be  written  and  rewritten  until  thoroughly  mastered. 

425.  It  probably  will-be  a  long-time  [T-M]  before  there-is-another 
assembly  of  ladies  and  gentlemen  brought  together  here  which,  for 
dignity,  intelligence,  for  every  mental  quality,  and  for  moral  worth 
can  stand  on-an  equality  with  that  which-has  just  left  our  city.     The 
Festival,  the  object  of  which  was  to- celebrate  (176)  the  anniversary 
of-an  (163,  167)  important  event  in-the  (270)  history  of-the  (167,  164) 
American  republic,  was  held  in-a  (163)  large,  new  hall  of  great  archi- 
tectural   beauty,    which-is   situated   just   beyond    Madison    Square. 
Indeed  it-is-the  ( 1 64)  largest  assembling  (148)  place  in  New- York. 
The  architect,  who  I  hear  could  always  be  found  on-the  premises, 
did-not   neglect   an   opportunity   to-explain   (176)  the   architecture, 
giving-the  (166)  perpendicular  height  and  width  of-the  building  (148), 
to-all  (229)  who  had-a  certificate  of  membership  and  possessed  suffi- 


Ib2  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

cient  familiarity  with-the  (164)  subject  to  give  every  specification 
especial  attention  and  form  an  opinion  of  it  that-was-not  artificial 
but  practically  sound.  The  promoters  of-the  movement  held  two 
meetings  (324),  the  first  in  September  and-the  second  in  November, 
and  then  they  commenced  late  in  December  or  early  in  January 
to-regularly  (406)  advertise  it  by  putting  (257)  every  week  a  long  ad- 
vertisement in-the  public  prints  of  larger  circulation,  which- was  (439) 
different  in  form  each  time,  and  to-do  (176)  all  they  possibly  could  by 
publishing  (148)  such  preliminary  statements  as  are  indispensable 
to-develop  (176)  and  dignify  the  affair  to-the  (270)  utmost  degree; 
and  not  through  their-own  negligence,  or  any  negligent  act  of-their 
employes,  let  it  languish  and  go  where  there-is  danger  that-the  (270) 
gentlemen  who  represent  the  Press  may,  as  from  lack  of  sympathy 
they  usually  do,  send  it  or  any  similar  scheme  or  proposed  perform- 
ance, by  putting  in-the  manuscript  that-the  newspapers  publish  and 
republish,  an  objection  or  representation  that  it-is-not  practicable. 
The  brethren  began  to-assemble  (176)  in  February,  and  almost  every 
quarter  of-the  United-States  was  represented  (393).  A  distinguish- 
ing characteristic  of-the  gathering  was-the  (164)  great  number-of  (197) 
different  kinds  of  people  present  with-the  title  of  "  Doctor."  There- 
were  Dr.  Smith,  a  dentist,  Dr.  Jones,  a  regular  Old  School  physician, 
Dr.  Robinson,  a  surgeon  from  Bellevue  Hospital,  whose  regularity 
was  never  questioned  amongst  his  acquaintances,  Dr.  Root,  who-has 
practised  Homeopathy,  according-to  all  accounts,  with  beneficial 
results,  and-a  horse  doctor  named  Robert  Brown,  Jr.  There-had 
also  come  from  San-Francisco  a  Baptist  Doctor  of  Divinity,  the 
benignant  Rev.  Dr.  Waters,  who  spoke  very  earnestly  of-the  Saviour, 
of-the  Angel  Gabriel  and-the  Archangel  Michael,  of-the  advantage  of 
baptism,  of-the  resurrection  and-of-the  celestial  joys  of-the  kingdom- 
of-Heaven.  Next,  an  archbishop  from  Massachusetts,  whose  bishop- 
ric had  been  left  in-charge-of  (197)  another,  told  us  why  every  citizen 
should  belong  to-the  Roman-Catholic  Church  and  believe  in-the  truth 
of-the  doctrine  of  transubstantiation,  giving  in  distinct  language  his 
reasons  for-such  belief.  A  Protestant  Episcopal  bishop  from  western 
Pennsylvania  spoke  of-the  Christian-religion  and-of  Christianity 
in-general,  incidentally  speaking  (148)  of-his-own  church  as  "The 
Holy  Catholic  Church  of  America  ;  "  which  remark  caused  some 
surprise  among-the  members  of-other  (271,  Rem.)  evangelical 
churches. 


FESTIVAL   OF   THE   ABBREVIATIONS.  163 

I  recollect,  and-I  presume  you  all  have-a  remembrance  of-it  (270), 
that  during  our  sessions  the  capable  Governor  of  Wisconsin,  whose 
popularity  is  said  to-be  (176)  in  proportion  to-his  ability  (268)  in  pub- 
lic speaking,  and  who- was  present  from-the  beginning  (148),  told  us 
how  to  govern  both  a  state  and-a  large  family  of  children,  describing- 
the  (166)  difference  in  principle  between  those  two  kinds  of  govern- 
ment.  The  meeting  (257)  was  aristocratic  as- well-as  (311)  democratic. 
A  republican  representing-the  (166)  aristocracy  and-a  democrat  rep- 
resenting-the  democracy  had  a  controversy  about  Home  Rule,  making 
frequent  reference  to-the  license  question.  What  seemed  to  astonish 
people  most  was  that  they-\vould  differ  about  everything  ;  the  diffi- 
culty being  that  neither  would  acknowledge  the  importance  of  any- 
thing the-other  (276)  said,  or  that  it  could  possibly  be  true.  But  no 
indignity  was  offered  by  either.  A  phonographer,  who  had  practised 
phonography  in-the  legislature  for  a  year,  and  was  consequently  very 
familiar  with-the  art,  made  phonographic  memoranda  of  everything 
that  each  gentleman  said  and  did.  Now,  because  one-of  these  dis- 
tinguished gentlemen  gave  his  opinion  about  Great  Britain  and  her 
system-of  jurisprudence,  and  spoke  frequently  (406)  of  "plaintiff" 
and  "  defendant,"  "mortgage"  and  "mortgagee,"  and  of  "delin- 
quent jurors,"  and  would  dwell  on-the  importance  of  circumstantial 
evidence,  and  cross-examine  everybody,  (allowing  nobody  to-escape), 
by  putting  a-great-many  lengthy  interrogatories,  sometimes  saying 
"I  object,"  in-the  usual  way,  people  generally  were  led  to-infer 
(176)  that-he  might  be  a  representative  of-the  Bar,  and  said  they- 
would  (435)  thank  him  if-he-would  deliver  a  lecture  on-the  practice 
of-the  law. 

Captain  David  Emerson,  a-man  of  high  financial  standing  and 
large  pecuniary  responsibility,  and-of  much  influence  in  public  affairs, 
who-is  understood  to-be  president  of-a  savings-bank  as-well-as  of.  a 
bank-note  engraving  company  and-a  director  in  several  insurance- 
companies,  also  a  manufacturer  having-a  manufactory  somewhere  in 
southern  Illinois,  where  he-is  largely  engaged  in-the  manufacture  of 
woolen  cloths  principally  (393)  for  domestic  use,  and  who  does-not 
owe  anything  to  anybody,  spoke  in-favor  of-a  uniform  and  satisfac- 
tory bankruptcy  law  which-would  enable  people  who-are  (230)  bank- 
rupt to-recover  (176)  themselves  and  become  financially  responsible 
again  and-as-a  consequence  begin  life  over  as  others  have  begun  it 
before  notwithstanding  their  failure.  Usury,  he-said,  was  specially 


164  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

repugnant  to-him  (169),  and  he  took  satisfaction  in-the  fact  that 
malignant  creditors  could-not  collect  under-a  usurious  contract.  Mr. 
Johnson,  his  brother-in-law  or  half  brother,  I-don't  remember  which, 
though  yet  quite  a  young  man,  is  superintendent  of-an  electric  supply 
company,  and-has  probably  more  practical  knowledge  of  electricity 
and  electro-magnetism,  and  of-the  universe  in-general,  than  any  sim- 
ilar person  in-the-world,  embraced  the  opportunity  to-say  something 
on-those  subjects,  using  many  electrical  instruments  to  occasionally 
illustrate  a  peculiar  observation  or  suggestion  that  might  without 
them  be  somewhat  difficult  if-not  altogether  impossible  of  preserva- 
tion in  one's  recollection.  I-speak  the  truth  with  some  awe  when 
I-say  I-shall  ever  remember  the  extraordinary  and  singular  circum- 
stance of-his  saying  it-was  (439)  his  privilege,  aye,  his  prerogative 
to-endeavor  to-establish  by  a  single  subjective  description  the  proba- 
bility of-a  particular  theory,  the  immediate  effect  of-which,  if-it 
should-be  accepted  and  become  popular  would-be  quite  revolutionary, 
as  it-would  change  or  qualify  the  significance  of  much  that-we  per- 
form electrically,  and  help  correct  the  mistake  made  by-the  first 
generation  of  intelligent  and  worthy  investigators  who,  I-think,  knew 
not  one  thing  about-the  peculiarity  of  electricity  which  made  the 
telephone  possible. 

There-was  also  present  a  member  of-the  Canadian  Parliament, 
and  formerly  of-the  Cabinet,  a  fine,  healthy  looking  man,  whom  we 
frequently  mistook  for  our  minister  plenipotentiary,  so  striking  was- 
their  similarity  of  appearance.  It  may-not  signify  much  or  show 
great  singularity  of  conduct,  but  nevertheless  I  heard  him  observe, 
and  I  made  a  memorandum  of-it,  that  he  never  swore  in-his  life,  and 
never  would  swear  under  any  contingency  except  when  sworn  on-the 
Bible. 

Miss  Emily  Blank,  a  woman  of  large  experience,  who-has  already 
been  admitted  to-the  Bar,  took  the  principal  part  in-the  debate 
on-the  duties  of-an  administratrix  or  executrix.  She  could  discrimi- 
nate between  a  felony  and-a  (163)  misdemeanor,  and  their  consequent 
penalties,  and  was  especially  earnest  in-the  hope  that  all  who-are 
given  to  crime  will-be  brought  into  subjection.  Her  advice  to  every 
young  man  was,  "  Inscribe  your  name  in-the  Temple  of  Fame,  and 
there  let  it  stay  forever  and  aye  (a)." 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


I65 


Able  to.. S... 

about  that v.- 

about  which  there     ,  / 

above  all ... 

after  all  __: 

after  business  hours 

after  me 

again  and  again ... 

against  us..  — T»~  or... 

all  directions 

all  of       ^ 

all  our       ' 

all  right      ' 

all  such      ' 

r 


^ 


r 


all  the       r    <"•     ' 

/-- 
all  their 

alter  an 

although  there  is../7... 

/^~S  \o 
always  there  .....r. 

always  was  \ 

among  all  their.  _S^_»*<I 
among  its     vj> 
among  our    *^~s 
among  us   ^^^ 
an  alarming    . 
an  emergency 


LIST  OF  PHRASES. 

an  important    .T77/h 
and  as  there  has  ..r:. 
and  as  they  are  ..... 
and  that  ..A.. 
and  this  •-£-• 

and  yet    (T.. 

another  affair 
another  day 
another  point 

any  other   

any  other  time 

any  part  of  their 

any  statement 

anyone 

anyone  else  there      v_x-v 

anyone  there  _^  (j 

anything  about 

anything  else 

anything  less 


p 
—  £-* 


are  a  ...... 

are  all    ^ 

(/^ 

are  we  not   *•         * 

as  a  matter  of  fact 
as  early  as  .f\T?. 
as  far  as      ./rr\... 
as  far  as  they 
as  far  as  will 


i66 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


as  good  as  
as  great  as  .  .  a-P. 
as  if  .  .  ?  .  . 

at  their  own  .  ?.  . 

1           L 
at  your  .    or  .?.. 

Atlantic  Ocean     '^l~^. 

—          /^° 
as  lately  as    .  f..  .  . 

5. 

as  little  as        f^° 

Baptist  Church     / 

as  long  as         ^ 

be  there      \ 

as  long  as  the  other  .  ^T-- 

bear  in  mind  - 

Q  (^3    \ 

as  long  as  they  are  

bearing  in  mind  ?Y.     .  . 

as  other  -.:„ 

because  they  are   .  .  . 

as  our  ..5r. 

bwomfl  of  thfir      \  _    •> 

as  soon  as  •  - 

S      Q-> 
as  to  

been  there     -   V 

as  we  .  .Tx 

before  and  after     ..\ry.. 

as  well  as  .  .  o  _  . 
as  you    /^° 

before  another   \j  " 
before  any  other   x 

ask  you  .         w 

before  no  other    >>  

P 
at  all  events  ..IM> 

before  or  after          VT^ 

P  
at  all  times    i 

at  another    J 

before  us        >s 
began  an 

at  its  .   k 

begin  their 

n 

at  once     d 
P 
at  one  time  .  .  .  [ 
1         ^ 
at  or  .  .  .'.  . 

at  some  time  ..°~^~^ 

best  of  my  recollection  ^C~^: 
best  of  your  recollection  \T 
best  recollection       x^ 
better  and  (or  than)     o 

at  that  .  .   c  .  . 
at  the  same  time  .  :~~^ 

between  the    ..... 
J 
bill  of  exchange   .  \^~^. 

at  the  time 
at  their       .H.. 

bill  of  particulars  -V- 
-  •"•ST-     JT        S~ 

bill  of  sale  f    ^-\T>- 

PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


167 


but  lately  .  \S.  .  or  .  \  ff__ 

common  law      N~'^ 

but  little      V^~ 
but  we       X    OY   \ 

Constitution  of  the  U.  S.  . 
could  have  been    

bv  and  bv       \    , 

could  have  been  there 

by  its 
V 
by  other         ° 

by  that       C 
by  the  by  ^^ 
by  their  own       ^ 

could  there  be  _ 
couldnt  ..^..       ^ 
Court  of  General  Sessions  . 
Court  of  Sessions    c3 
cross  and   . 

C\      \> 

by  your        *  or 

a 

Can  be  seen  trrv.- 

D. 

Danger  of  ...U... 
I/    I 
day  after  day  ...1... 

can  that 

day  of  the  ...*...  | 

can  the  other  .  .TT7.  .  .  . 
can  there  be      \ 
can  this      .777... 

can  we         "   or      c 
can  YOU   ^~      °r 

day  of  the  date    t| 
day  or  two    I/I 
day  time  ..-.P-^... 
day's  afterward        b 
dear  sir  J--- 

can  you  tell         I 
cannot  say        ) 

1            1 

defendant's  counsel..  JTT?.. 

1    ' 

depend  upon  their   .  L.  

cannot  see   ..TR... 
can't      > 
cause  of  action 

did  you  ever  --.n--, 
did  you  give   f|  
did  you  have  M 

causes  of  action 

did  you  have  anything  0 

certain  extent  ...o^r-f... 
charge  of  anything     r^T^rr? 
charge  of  their      6 

did  you  remember    'T_^ 
did  you  see  me    0 
didnt  ..                }"* 

circumstances  of  the  case  .  QT?. 

J>P         1 
do  we      -I-  OT--  1— 

i68 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


do  you  believe ..  J... 
\n 

do  you  belong  J 

do  you  ever 

do  you  have        I 

do  you  know          1^, 

do  you  mean  to  be         l-^ 


do  yon  own 

do  you  recollect 

do  you  remember       I — - 

does  not     ._.  ks. .. 

doing  there  -  -  - 1^_^ 

don't    ...  J,— 

down  there  J... 

during  that  time../)... 
during  the  time      V-^'/r" 

E. 

Each  other    ...,/.... 
Eastern  States     —y— 

eight  or  ten . . .  Kl . .  p 

n 
eternal  life  -  J...... 

— \. 
everyone      ...V>.._ 

extra  session   _. .  y. . . 
F. 

False  and  . .  ./fc.        -— 

\^> 
fast  or  slow   . . .  r= 

faster  and  ..J?rL 
faster  than  .....S?. 
fellow  citizens 


-v- 


fifteen  or  twenty. .  /IT. 

first  time    . . ! 

five  or  six 

for  ever  and  ever 

for  his  own  account 

for  instance  ..  .V 

for  its 

for  that     V_ 

for  the  purpose  ...<~ 

for  the  sake  of  the 

for  their  ..  V  .. 

for  which  they  are     V_ 

four  or  five  • 

from  all  other 

from  day  to  day- 

from  generation  to  generation.,  u.. 

~*\\ 
from  hour  to  hour    .  .* .'. . 

from  place  to  place  ..  .\>\>._ . 
from  time  to  time    

' 0 

from  us       

from  week  to  week 

from  your  own  knowledge . . 
fuss  and  ...W.... 

Good  deal 

great  number  of  .'. . 
great  while  ago 
greater  or  less" ' 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


169 


H. 
Had  a      .J. 

had  been  done        \ 

I/"   \ 

had  or  not       v       J 

had  the   ....  or   _]•„ 
had  there  been 
had  therefore         \J_ 

House  of  Representatives  .x—°  .V. 
Houses  of  Congress     ...  P  ... 
how  do  you  remember  .  .  .  *•  —  ^  ..  . 
how  long  have  you 
/. 
I  am  therefore     A  
I  can        

had  they           / 

P    ^    J 

had  we             °*     * 

I  can  do             1 
I  could 

0        i 

had  you        '   or    l 
hadn't 
half  an  hour     ../•fTV.. 

1          1 
I  decline  to  say   ...<^... 

lever   ..^-..* 
I  find       ..'K 

x7^ 
has  it  uot             ... 

I  found 

e 

has  that 

i  ^ 
I  have 

has  there  been          ^.. 

I  have  another     

have  another        ^«_a 

/ 
I  have  found      ...V?.. 

have  seen          ./Trr^.. 

U^ 
I  have  not        

hftvft  th^rp         ;Si 

I'll        ^ 

he  can          

I  mean  to  be        --.!_=_•- 

he  could 

'X^ 

I  might  not   

he  should     ...~)  — 
he  stated           i 

I  say  that      ...  J... 
I  shall     .   -<.. 

A 
he  was    x-rv  .. 

he  was  there    .  .  x—  >. 
he'll  ...r...             ) 

I  should         --Jt-  - 
I  should  not        ...?.. 

c) 

I  should  not  be      ...)... 

here  and  there     .  .  rr-x-  .  . 
honor  to  be    .  T\        * 
hour  after  hour       rf^T. 

*\. 

I  stated     ..*(... 

I  suppose  they  are    .  .V^,.- 
I  want  it    ..f... 

170 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


I  want  to  ...p.. 

s  L 

I  was     .../ 

in  your  opinion    -  ^^4* 
instead  of  the  .  .vTtf.  .  . 

I  was  not 

insurance  company  -  -  

I  will  not 

is  it  not 

I  wish  there  was       .  .  ^  .  .  . 

is  that    - 

f 

if  there  be...  i..        j 

is  there 

if  they  are     V       v 

is  therefore 

in  another  manner 

it  has  been     1 

in  any  case  .  .  ---^      n 
in  consequence   ^_p  —  0 

it  has  not  been      1 
it  is  an        1                 o 

in  consideration  .  I/  .  . 

A> 

it  is  in           or      1 

in  full        or  ..ft  . 
in  its                   ( 

it  is  said     -  -  -  L-  - 
it  is  therefore  T.-.L.. 

in  March          ^_£  —  ^ 
in  or  about 

it  is  well  known 
it  therefore      J       <~_? 

in  order  that 

it  was   ...  0  .  .  .  . 

in  other  words    ^__^^~& 

it  will  be 

in  our      ^^ 

it  will  not  do         

in  point  of  fact     ^^^ 

its  OWn       1      or     | 

in  quest  .  .  .  d^  .... 

J. 

in  reference     ^^^? 

Just  as        v  . 

in  regard 

just  as  much  as     C/~y 

in  relation      ^_^/^ 

just  as  well  as     XD 

in  separating  .  .<K.  .  .  . 

K. 

in  some   ...'STT^... 

Kingdom  of  Christ  .  .  ..  c    ^- 

in  the  time 

Kingdom  of  Heaven 

^-1 
in  the  world  ^^ 

know  of..  :^-IP.  .  . 

~^^>\    °r    ^•"p" 
in  us           ; 

known  an  ...v._i?... 

PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


171 


L, 

Mr.  Chairman  rT^>.  . 

9 

Larger  than..X. 

Mr.  President   .f_\>  .... 

legislative  session.,  l.t/... 

Mr.  Smith    ..<7?57>. 

less  and      i 

much  more        ^  —  » 

less  than    ( 
let  an  ...  /f!  . 

much  more  than       A-^ 
must  be      '""~~?\. 

let  us      /° 
life  estate.....  .T... 
little  else  .  .  .  .Sfc..  . 
little  less        if 
little  while  after   J[      I 

must  have     ^"^ 
must  have  been      -^K» 
must  have  been  there     s~  R> 
must  not      /  —  1>^ 
my  dear  sir  .^   ""1    OT    .T?T... 

long  after.  T~\.     . 

^x^-^ 

my  own  opinion   ^ 

long  time        L-^ 
longer  than 

N. 
New  York  City     f 

lose  an     /"^ 

*                                                          ^  x^ 

New  York  State        *T 

M. 

nine  or  ten  ..^rr^V.. 

May  as  well     /  —  o..  .. 

no  change  ^^  

may  have      X~~H> 
may  have  been      s*~£> 
may  have  been  there  s~5 
mean  to 

no  one  else  ^  —  ^N/ 

c   • 

no,  sir    v  —  9 
Northern  States  

mean  to  be  understood 

*->*v« 

more  and  more    ^^—^ 
more  than      <e~~^ 
more  than  any     c^~^_^ 
most  likely    x-  —  b 

v  —  f               ^^~f 
nothing  else  .  .  .  U—  -.  — 

nothing  less                V^J 
nothing  was  said         ^~^\ 
notwithstanding  the  fact    1   .^5- 

.  .  -rT~&      . 

most  of  the  time 

now  and  then  ....C... 

172 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 
0.  one  side  of  the  .  .7^.. . 


Of  it  ...... 

of  its      ^ 

of  other.  X 

of  that  ..... 
of  their     ^_ 

of  us e... 

on  another  occasion 

on  its 

on  my  own  part 

on  my  part 

on  one  occasion         j-^> 

on  or  before      ">i 

on  our  account 

on  the  contrary      V 
^-j 

on  the  date 

on  the  day  I 
on  the  other  / 
on  this  --N~£-  - 

v, 9          v — 'N 

On  US  or  I 

once  in  a  while  ...3L_5N 

once  or  twice 
one  after 
one  evening  ~~^ 
one  of  the 
one  or  both 
one  or  more 
one  or  two 


ice    ~~X 
^       \> 


or  as  . . .  °. . 

or  have  been 

or  not 

or  other ....  j... 

or  our 

or  some  such     °^ 

or  something  like  that 

or  the  ^  OT      » 

or  you-r      " 

other  than  ...T.. 

other  than  that      \ 

ought  to  have  -•-[/"-,         , 

ought  to  have  been    w  or   L 


P       J 
or  ..4. 


ought  we or 

our  own 

our  own  business          >l_0 

out  of  town  ...  .H... 

vl 

over  and  above . 

own  a-n  

own  the 

own  use         fc^ 

P. 

Pacific  Ocean., 
part  of  a  .  .^ . 
part  of  the 

party  of  the  first  part 
party  of  the  second  part    °~C^ 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


173 


peculiar  cir'ces  of  the  case, 
per  annum . . 
per  cent.   \s 
personal  estate . . 
place  of  business 
plaintiffs  counsel.  V^-. 
point  of  view  ..  ^.. 
police  court  ..\x«r. . 
Postmaster-General  . . .  y^>. . . 
postage-stamp 
postal  card 

Presbyterian  Church -rNo_. 
President  of  the  U.  S.  _N>.._ 
prima  facie  case  .  . ^       ' — 
pro  rata  . .  Vil . . . 
promissory  note  . . 

Q. 

Quite  certain  77°. 
quite  sure  they  are 
quo  warranto 


Rather  than   . . ... . . 

read  the  second  time 
read  the  third  time 
real  estate     -  -<,/P-  -  - 
re-cross  examination 
re-direct  examination 


..  J. 


res  judicata..^. 
right  and  wrong     ££.. 
right  or  wrong 
Roman  Catholic  Church 

8. 

Said  and  done 
said  or  done    I 

sanction  their 

Saturday  afternoon  .*f.  I . . 
season  of  the  year    .-_..... 
Secretary  of  State .. o-f...C 
Secretary  of  War       cr^N 
seems  to  be      -^s:  - 
seems  to  have 
set  forth. .C^C...        l> 
shall  a    ...\... 
shall  do      r 
shall  have  been 
shall  have  been  there 
shall  not  .*?.. 

shall  not  be      '"A 

.  J 

shall  the   ^  or      * 

shall  therefore     ^—^ 
she  had  ...,  o 


she  is  an 
she  '11      n 
short  and  clear 
short  time     ^ 


r  ..j. 


174 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


shorter  than.._X. 
should  &...J... 
should  go      ) 
should  have  been         » 
should  have  been  there       i 

such  as  we  were  .  .  «4vx— 
such  other    C/ 
such  were    & 

sum  and  substance  ..  fT-^... 
<j  i 
Sunday  school    ---  A  ....    c 

surrounding  circumstances  ^^•"f— 

should  not  be  ...)... 
shouldn't    

T. 

Tako  p-arft  of  .  Lc-r?.  . 

since  there  is    -  

tain  oocMton  L  „  __^> 

^"6 
since  they  are 

take  part    !  i\ 

o     1 

six  or  seven      n      1? 
slower  than  .  .  .£^!\_ 
so  far  as..J... 
so  long  ago       )^ 
so  that      ) 
so  to  speak       ^) 

take  your  own     1 
takes  occasion     1     r..*^ 
tell  him..  C  ... 
tell  how  long     L  / 
tell  me     V—^ 

YO      *J 

ten  or  twelve  or  thirteen  fO  

softer  than  )>>-,  .. 

ten  thousand  dollars.  /J... 

some  one    .  c  ^ 

(                 ^H 
than  a   ..>  .                  (, 

some  time      <rv  —  N 

than  it 

some  way      a  —  ^ 

|Q 

Southern  States    L 

than  otherwise        Vr^ 
/        /        • 

than  the.V.oT..Vf. 

stand  still  ..(£.. 
state  of  facts  ..  1^  ... 
State  of  New  York      \ty 
such  another  ...y/t.. 

than  the  other      V 
than  their        1  x 
than  there  are     >r^ 
thank  the        \. 

/(/ 

f> 
such  as  we  have      **\ 

thank  you     A* 
that  a-n       ..i_ 

PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


175 


that  and    *   . 

there  is  no  .  .  \i_^r.  .  .  . 

that  day     \ 

there  the.  C  or   ^ 

that  had    S 

there  were    \S 

'  i 

that  has 

there  will     (/ 

that  has  ever  been    1^ 

there  wjll  be    v  \ 

that  have    v 

there  would      \ 

that  is  all         (° 

there  you      v> 

that  is  an     ^  OT 

they  are  .  .  v  .  . 

that  is  not 

they  are  able  to    I 

that  is  the    *  or  * 

X 

they  are  not     C 

that  is  to  say     ~) 

they  are  said       (p 

that  it      ( 

they  are  there  C 

(     \ 

that  it  has  not     ^ 

they  did     V 

that  its 

they  had    C 

that  that      C 

they  have      C 

that  the       or     V 

they  have  been    U 

that  there  is  .  A».  .  . 
that  therefore   --  V--. 

they  have  been  there    l^w 
they  have  not      0^ 

that  they  are  A... 

they  were  not     v-? 

that  was    \ 

they  were  there     \S* 

that  was  all       V- 
n    r 

they  '11      C 

that  will      > 

think  there  is  no../- 

that  will  be      V. 

think  they  are   /    *>~s 

their  own      v 

this  afternoon  \.(... 

then  there  were..  (--•,-- 

V 
this  date     /            N  —  ^2 

there  are  .  .C^.  .  - 

this  day         / 

'       C 
there  have  been     V) 

there  is     t> 

Y 

this  evening  '  ( 

this  morning    ^>—  '  (f-^^ 

MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


this  speech.  .A... 
this  time  /     / 
those  are    ^7^  .  tu-  -  - 

too  bright    
too  much   .^..  - 
took  charge  of  their..!... 

1       / 

those  circumstances     p 

•-7 
true  bill.  .0...             / 
<L 

three  or  four.  Cy\. 

true  or  not  .-1^/X 

toa..J... 

twelve  or  fifteen   12.  

to  a  certain  extent    \g 

two  or  three  ,J\... 

to  all    p 

W. 

to  all  intents 

Under  a    ;  -^  

to  an    1    or    1 
•J         u 

under  the  circumstances  >  ,-f 

to  be  ... 

U.  8.  of  America   <J~N/  .. 

\ 

to  get     

U.  8.  Senate  & 

to  give.,  l.... 

U.  8.  Senator  Q  ^ 

V    to  go   

unless  there  is  ..^^>... 

to  have    .'.  _i... 

unless  they  are    (^£2 

to  it 

until  there  is  .  ./?'-  . 

| 
to  make  

up  and  down  ___\.__ 

to  my  recollection    I       O 

up  or  down   \/J 

to  nature  

up  to  the  time      \ 

to  our     • 

upon  the  part  of  the  ^ 

to  reply       

upon  the  subject  of     \^ 

to  sell  .  1  .  .  . 

V. 

to  the  ...  or  ..l.. 

1               V 

Variety  of  .7^.  k 

to  the  end    i 

very  great  extent  .  Ve-f.  .  . 

to  the  time 

\^—^ 

very  lately  vyv     Or    V  —  (JT»., 

to  their      1 

very  little    v_r 

to  use       

very  seldom    \^ 

to  yourself        ">g*" 

very  shortly  after    V^XV 

PHRASEOGRAPHY. 


177 


very  6ure..K_«... 

we  shall  . 

very  well         v£ 
W. 
Wasa..<... 

we  will  ...  s~ 
we'll    (A 
week  after 

was  an   * 

week  after  week  . 

was  another.  ./).... 

week  or  ten  days          y\ 

was  he    r 
was  he  not 
was  he  there    ^  —  ^ 

was  it  ...  or    f 

V 

was  or  not  ^ 

well  done..  C]...            t 
well  known   0 
were  a  ../?>... 
were  it  
were  it  not    

was  or  was  not    ) 
was  said     3 
was  that       C 
was  the  ...  or    ' 

were  the..^.., 
were  they    /{ 
were  you  &w&re..S^... 
what  are  you  .  _V.  . 

was  there...  /..          . 

what  did  you  .... 

was  there  anybody    / 

what  do..l  

what  had   ' 

was  there  anything  said     <—  -v_J» 
Ways  and  Means    "^—  a 

what  of  it..T. 
what  of  that  .?(.. 

we  are  ..sx... 
we  are  ready   c>\//1 

what  of  the  ..T.. 
what  were  you 

we  believe     -x 
we  find  - 

where  did  you  go..  ,?^—.. 
where  the     s*" 

we  had  ....   or  .._•. 
we  have..  TN... 
we  regard       ?T^. 

where  there  has  been      ^\ 

4 

where  they  are      /^ 
where  was       C  — 

we  regret  .  .  -y^~ 

where  was  a     (/^ 

MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 


where  was  it     (S 

with  regard    (J~. 

where  was  the      C^m  C/* 
where  was  their      6^ 
where  was  your     Of  or  C^ 
where  we     C/  or    /c 
where  were  they      /^ 

with  relation    (  s? 
with  respect   /  X 
with  us  —£•.' 
without  that  .  '  .  . 

<B 

without  us  
witness-stand 

where  will     ^ 
whether  or  not    .  TT^V... 
whether  you  are    \ 
which  are  likely    '    r 

words  of  our  text  ,  .  **i   -~ 
Y. 
Year  after  year.  /T.  . 
year  and  a  half  (    s~ 

which  one..c/... 
which  were    f^ 
which  were  in    fiS*~ 
which  were  on    ^ 
which  will  not   i/1 
which  you  have     6 
why  is  it  .  \.. 

C 

year  or  two  x>i 

years  and  years     f~ 
years  of  age  /"  * 
years  old        f- 
yes  or  no   ..  .  &C^' 
yes,  sir  O  or     t^ 
yet  there  is  no.S^~ 

why  it  is 
why  the       or      * 
will  be  -./{"iv.. 

yOU  COUld    or  -^-.. 

you  found  
vou  had    ...  °r  ..' 

will  have    sj 
will  the  ....  or-.xr^. 
will  there  not  \>e../\.  .  .  .» 

you  have..xT. 
you  knew  
you  must  satisfy  .  .  i*?~$*.  . 

will  you  look     ^ 
with  all  that..  A., 
with  all  the  ....  w  ^ 
with  reference  .  .  C-^f.  - 

you  should  ..J...         ^~ 

your  Honor..  /rr.. 
your  own..  XT.. 

REMARKS   ABOUT   PHRASES.  179 

REMARKS  ABOUT   PHRASES. 

426.  "  Five  or  Six."— The  outline  of  this  phrase  is  the  only  ex- 
ception to  the  limitation  of  use  of  Vee-hook  on  curves  stated  at  198. 

427.  "  Give." — When  give  is  joined  to  a  preceding  stem  it  should 
have  its  vowel  \  inserted.     Examples  :  —  Did  you  give,  to  give. 

428.  "Of"  Sometimes  Omitted. — In  cases  where  the  presence 
of  the  preposition  of  would  necessarily  be  inferred,  as  in  writing 
dates  and  certain  set  phrases,  its  sign  maybe  omitted;  thus,  "  12 
May,"  "burden  proof,"  "preponderance  evidence,"  for  "  I2th  of 
May,"  "  burden  of  proof,"  "  preponderance  of  evidence."  As  a  rule, 
however,  of  should  be  written  with  its  proper  sign,  Roid*. 

429.  "  Of  the  "  by  Proximity. — Many  phonographers  are  in  the 
habit   of  generally   indicating  of-the  by  proximity  ;    thus,    r 

loss  of  the  money.  The  practice  is  not  a  safe  one,  especially  in  writ- 
ing technical  or  difficult  matter  ;  but  it  is  well  to  be  possessed  of  the 
expedient,  as  it  may  be  found  useful  in  very  rapid  plain  work. 

430.  "  One  "  with  Way-hook  and  En-hook : — In  a  very  few 
phrases  one  is  written  with  the  Way-hook  and  En-hook  combined. 
Examples  in  List : — At  one  time,  which  one,  etc. 

431.  "Stock." — The  regular  outline  of  the  word  stock  is  Ste"k. 
But  sometimes  in  phrases  and  compounds  it  is  better  to  use  Set-Kay. 
Examples : 


KEY.     In  stock,    common   stock,  preferred   stock,   rolling-stock, 
laughing-stock. 

432.  "What,"  "When,"  or  "We"  by  Hook-breve.— The 
Hook-breve  for  w  on  Lee  may  be  used  for  either  what,  when,  or  we, 
according  as  the  outline  is  written  in  the  first,  second,  or  third  posi- 
tion.    Examples : 

U                               W                              S                         s~ 
(j   L. 

KEY.     What  will,  what  else,  when  will,  we  will. 

433.  "  When  "  is  never  joined  in  phrases  except  at  the  beginning 


l8o  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

and  is  invariably  written  on  the  line.  Whenever  its  regular  breve, 
Thoid,  will  not  join  well  with  the  succeeding  stem,  Soid  is  sometimes 
used  for  when. 

434.  "What"  is  joined  freely  at  the  beginning  of  phrases  with 
Soid  above  the  line.     Aside  from  a  few  exceptions,  like  at-what^  of- 
whal,  etc.,  what  should  not  be  joined  after  other  words,   because 
of  its  liability  to  conflict  with  would. 

435.  "Would,"  at  the  beginning  of  phrases,  is  always  written 
with  Soid  below  the  line.     When  joined  after  other  words  -would  is 
usually  written  with  Soid  ;  but  in  a  few  phrases,  in  order  to  secure 
better  junctions,  Thoid  is  used  instead. 

436.  "  We,"  at  the  beginning  of  phrases,  may  be  written  with  the 
breve  Thoid  or  Soid  (170),  or  with  the  stem  Way3.     But  when  the 
use  of  Soid  for  we  would  interfere  with  phrases  commencing  with 
what,  the  stem  Way  3  should  be  employed  for  we.     Joined  after  other 
words  we  is  generally  written  with  a  breve-sign. 

437.  "With,"  written  with  its  regular  sign,  Thoid,  is  joined  in 
phrases  only  at  the  beginning,  and  is  always  written  below  the  line. 

Examples  of  "  When,"  "  What,"  "  Would,"  "  We,"  and  "  With," 
in  phrases  : 


—  *~  __=__.  -- 


^  ] 


/      ! 

KEY.  When  did,  when  is,  when  the,  when  a,  when  was,  when 
were,  when  they  ;  what  was,  what  do,  what  can,  what  kind,  what  a, 
what  the,  what  is,  what  is  the,  what  is  a,  what  is  your,  what  would 
you,  at  what,  of  what ;  would  be,  would  say,  which  would,  they 
would,  that  would ;  we  do  not,  we  think,  we  may,  we  can,  we  can- 
not ;  with  which,  with  that,  with  the,  with  a,  with  him,  with  his. 


REMARKS  ABOUT   PHRASES.  l8l 

438.  "With"  and  "Without"  in  Special  Phrases.—  To  facil- 
itate the  writing  of  a  few  expressions  of  frequent  recurrence  which 
contain  the  words  with  and  without  ',  special  phrase-signs  are  provided, 
as  follows  : 


KEY.     With  reference,  with  regard,  with  relation,  with  respect, 
with  or  without.     (See  437). 

439.  "Was"  with  Way-hook  and    circle.—  In  a  very  few 
phrases  was  is  written  with  the  initial  Way-hook  and  final  breve-z 
combined.     Examples  in  List  :  —  It  was,  where  was,  etc. 

440.  "We"  with  Way-hook.  —  We  is  sometimes  written  with 
the  Way-hook  (225).     Examples  in  List  :  —  Can  we,  do  we,  had  we. 

441.  "  You-r"  with  Yay-hook.  —  You  and  your  are  sometimes 
written  with  the  Yay-hook  (226,  Rem.).     Examples  in  List  :  —  Did 
you,  do  you,  had  you,  at  your,  etc. 

442.  "  Where-was-your."  —  In  the  List  two  forms  are  given  to 
this  phrase.    When  the  phrase  stands  alone,  your  is  best  written  with 
the  breve  Noid.     But  when  other  signs  are  joined  after  it,  either 
Noid  or  the  stem  Yay  is  used,  according  to  which  makes  the  best 
junction.     In  the  phrase  Where-was-your-place,  use  Yay  ;  in.  Where- 
was-your-business,  use  Noid. 

443.  "  Ing  "  followed  by  Breve-words.  —  The  method  of  indi- 
cating ing-a  and  ing-the  by  writing  the  breves  for  a  and  the  in  the 
place  of  the  Ing-dot  or  stem-Ing  (165  and  166),  may  be  extended  to 
other  breve-  words,  and  even  to  breve-phrases,  as  shown  below. 


KEY.     Thinking  of,  believing  he,  taking  him,  remembering  we, 
thanking  you,  parting  of  the,  remarking  I  would,  hearing  of  you-r. 

444.  The   "Thr,ee   I's."  —  The  frequently  recurring  objection, 
"  Objected  to  as  incompetent,  immaterial  and  irrelevant,"  may  be 
indicated  by  the  reporter  by  simply  writing  "3  I-Z,"  —  the  latter 
character  being  the  diphthong  I  and  the  stem  Zee  joined  (57). 

445.  "Sub-reception."  The  expression,  "  Same  objection,  ruling, 
and  exception,"  may  be  indicated  by  the  outline  "  sub-reception." 


182  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

WORDS  AND  PHRASES  SPECIALLY 

DISTINGUISHED. 

A, 

«...  a,..*.. an,.... the 

....c. .  abandoned,    V   abundant 
<..about  when,. .V  by  the  way 

\     above,  \>   before 

V^     . 
„ absence,.  V.       business 

..: Vj_... absolute,  ..^T.  obsolete  ; \/~. absolutely,  JT...  obsoletely 

— I 

account, amount, . . . .  y. .  cotton,  .77. .  kind 


...  ^...accusation. causation,    ^    : 

JTTTJ... acute.  .._„_..  cute 
l  i^  i 
adamant, ....  diamond, .  *?. .  demand 


.. .J. ...  or .. /.. . adjoin, ../.. .join 
\    or  f  adjudge,    /  judge 

I  I 

•[^^•j^-  administered,  administrate,   v—&  demonstrate,  V-^    demon 
strated 

\~~^6  administration,   V—&  demonstration 

!_/  1^1         t 

or    IX"  adultery.. Y..}.  or..*).. idolatry 

-../..  ad  vantage,. /.joy,    /  age 
.../....  advantageous,.. y. joyous 
.  J  ..adverse,  U.  diverse 

£     advert,  U>  divert 
p  •  - 

.,,..,,.  affirm,  Vv-^.  frame,T;rC7,  fo^m,S^v.;^confo^n,VSs^    confirm 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.        183 


affirmation,  v/'— 5  formation.x^^      conformation,  confirmation 

.  ^"^> 

.:\^....x  or. .„....."  affix, .y^.....^  fix 

L.     agent  (see  gentleman) 
..^7T...  all  the  tiine..!?^??..  from  the  time 

almost,  ^^  most 

..... . .'. .  altitude, . .0. .latitude 

altogether,    —   together,    -— >  again 

'C~^  or  .  ."rT^T.  amelioration,  c~^^  melioration 
an,. .-..a,. ...the 

. .  anew, new 

>: — 1  *• — i 

.^7^\.  anomaly,  .^rfr7T.  animal 

— r^.  or  .  ^r..   anterior,  rrr^^T'or  .^r. .  interior 

„ any,..v_^..no 

anybody, .  >rrA. .  nobody 


_  ......  .anyone,  .  .v_^_  no  one,    v_^    none 

o  ^  ___  , 

........  any  other,  .........  another,  v  --  '  no  other 

.........  anything,      v^  nothing 

..^...  apathetic,  N    pathetic 

\/3   appertain,  N.   pertain 

\  "2  -o 

..^...  apportion,  V^  portion,  \/   operation 

.  .  .7f  .  .  apposite,  ..JC..  opposite, 

../^..  apposition,  .^..opposition,  .\.j..  composition,  .^..position, 
.^...possession 

approbation,  *\     probation,  .?\^  .  .  .  prohibition 

^        <\      .      \i         ^s^ 
appropriate,  purport,  ...V/.I.  property,  ..>v..  propriety 


184  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


...Tr??.  approximate,  ....TTTjT...  proximate 
"*\  —  ro  approximation,   >  —  g—  }   proximation 
...„.„.  are,..  */..  where,  ..y?...  were 
_.  ?T77*.  army,  .  .  /T77^  .  .  arm 

~N  j/**^'  ~~\ 

........  or.  .......  .or  not,  ......  around 

*J     ashore,    J)  shore 
-..^....assure,  ...J)...  sure 

~  .J.  .  .  assured,  .....  or  .     7  .  shrewd  ;  .  .  .}.  .  .  .  assuredly,  .  ..£.  .  shrewdly 

\\s          n       I    L  1  v~ 

_.„....  at  our,.  ..'...  at  your,..  Sy.  at  her,  ..!..  at  or 

C  —  •»    atheism,  ..t  .....  theism 

(  — 

^      atheist,  ..r...  theist  ;  ..(.....  atheistic,  .  /  -  -  -  .theistio 

v  ^ 

_  sr.  ...  at  least,  .  .  Y...  .  at  last 

fe     atonement,  U>  attainment,   L_^»    tenement 


...  auditor,..  r...  doubter,  daughter,  ."^.auditory,  (see  editor) 

avert,  ^.   convert 

"?.  avocation,  ^  —  ^  vocation,  vacation 
..  avoid,..  S..  void  ;../n..  avoided,..  S  Avoided 

..^7...  avouch,  .^f...  vouch 

-.  ^-    avow,  .  _  .  .  .vow 


B. 

\     baby,  \      babe 


.  bank-note 


,  .  .  „  .  .  .  .  barley,  .  .       .  .  barrel 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.        185 

..^....  beatify,..    ...  beautify 

\ become,  \ — <-^    became 

\>     before,  \        above 
..\^... beheld,  >T*    behold 

\X    birth,  berth,  \    breath 
./Vv  .bribery,  ..TV  briber,  barber 

.  .^*| . . .  broad, .  „ . . .  bright 

. .  .Ov. .    brood,  .  .    brnte,  bruit 

I 

\_.  burned,  \/"  burnt 

...;*..  by  a,  ..^..or  \.by  the 
^.by  and  by,  ..Ns^  by  the  by 


a 

. . capital,   ;....p..capitol 
^  captain, .^ . .  cabin 

: '..  caricature,  ]". . . . .  ^. .  character 

causation, accusation,    s  accession 

.'...?..  .caustic,  ....TTT-... exotic 

. . . vT. . .  Charleston,  ..... .y ...  Charlestown 

<. /  chlorate,  c. — /I  chloride 

—i^  coalition,  collation,  f).  collusion, collision, 

rr-f. .  :*.  collapse,  .frrr\. .  eclipse 

No 

come, —w—x  came, go;    — o    comes  goes 

coming, ...  going 

_-— ^>  communication,  — z>  connection 


1 86  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

. .T\... . .  comparative, .  ?yV_ .  operative,  .~T^\^.  cooperative 

— -  ">  concussion,    r>  connection 

^—  Connecticut,   -a Kentucky 

.}.  Connor,    .  .^~^ .  Connelly,  J.  O'Connor, O'Connell 

n  0  >. 

„ consequent,  <H>  second ; ( . .  consequently,   °-/^~  secondly 

...[,...  or ...<\..   considerate,,      .considered 

—  y...  consign, .....  assign, ... . . .  sign ; ...  consigned, . . : . .  assigned, 

— ? 
signed  ; y. . .  consignee,.  A assignee ;  ...:?.  consign- 

~3  ^ 

ment, .  .*?.  assignment ; . . .  ."rrf . .  consignor, .  ?rrf.  .assignor  , 
..  '....  construe,  ..I.  consider 

-t,    content,   J    contend ;. 7^. .contents,    J   contends 
-*^>  contention,    L_^    continuation,    ^>  attention 

cork,  crack 

.T~r\...corn,  <r-^  grain 

.7^..  corner crossing 

^.  corporal,  c    \X  corporeal 


c correct,  « 1  corrected,  '...aggregate 

— =•     — t 

cost, '..caused 

countryman,  ~-S    *    countrymen 
\  crammcd,'.!7!7!7. . . cramped 


D. 

\~>r?. .  damnation,  I— »>  domination,    l-»O    condemnation 

I 

...Vl...  daughter,  doubter,  ..^..auditor 

...U    dear,..<J...truo 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.        187 

dedicate,  l_  deduct,  detect 
dedication,  l_^>    deduction,  detection 

.  .  L  . .  decease, . .  J.  disease ;. .  L  deceased,    I .  diseased 

Kl    / 
defer,    J     defray 

..  t....  delivery, ..|"..  delivering, ..t..  deliver 

U-a>    demonstrate, .  I.  .     ..administered 
\^~~~S 

V~>>    demonstration,    V-^_?    administration 
J-v^  desiccation,  c/    '   dissection,   J— ^    discussion 
I       destination...  L-,  distinction,    I   destine 
\\....  devise,  ..L_ .  advise,  advice 
..  .*?. .. diamond,  v1.  adamant,.;?.. demand 

.  did  you  ever,  ...L     do  you  ever, ...V^.. had  yon  ever 
diffract,  Q!       deflect ; .  Ir^..^. .  diflraction,    Q! ^ deflection 

. .  J. . . .  disease, .  I  . .decease ;  . .1. ..diseased, . .L..deceased 

•  )  1       ' 

K        disproportioned,    K       disproportionate 

JL.     dissipation,    J.  .   deception 

•  N  disturb,... L... distribute 

Uv     diverse,  divorce,.,  ^.adverse 
U,    divert,    ^    advert 
...J....do,  ..J.did,   !..had 
....'....  doctor  (Dr.),  I—,   conductor 

l~f>    domination,  ..vT>r?...  damnation,    I— o>    condemnatioD 
^| 

.. .x. .  doubter,  daughter, . .*rx. . auditor 

L^r^  drag-store,  l_-e  druggist,  .~^..  dry  goods-store 
v     duration.  . !.  derision,  \?  adoration 


1 88  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

E. 

~X_£T  earnestly,  ~\f*     erroneously 
....V...  easier, ../). .easily 
L     .editor,    J    debtor  (see  auditor) 

^ effect,    ^ affect, . .hi.,  fact 

(^°    else,    (**    less 
, — <— ^  emigration  (see  migration) 

V^_.    ever,  v_   every 
— SJ  exorcise,    — Y    exercise 

7f~^~  extensive,     ~j>       expensive,    \^.  expansive 

— v~-Z)  extenuation,    — -y^>  extension,  ....?!^r?..expansiou 

^....extract',        l_    extricate 

. extraction,        I D  extrication 

F. 

fact,    ^ effect,    ^ affect 

fairly,    \^    thoroughly 
^Jalsifier,  .^_^. .  philosopher 
..  falsity,  .M^.  falsehood 
...v~f...  fantasy,   ^... fancy 

{  I 

V^     favorite,   v^   favored 
.SrCJ,  finely,  .^-T.   finally 
^<=,     or   o   first,    ^-0    next 

fiscal,  ..^  .  .  physical 

flowed,    ci    float 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.        189 


fluency,  ^OL    frenzy 

foot,.,      feet 
./^TTT^.  form  (see  affirm) 
.Srr?>.  forms,  .Sf..  office 

I  fi  j-—  • 

.  «**^.  .  formal-ly,  .  .  V^TT!:  .  .  formerly 

C  I          £  -  •> 

.  .  75T77.  former,  ..  rf^.  ____  farmer 


.....  ...  foot,.,      feet 


forward,. .  \-_ry .  afterward 
or     V_  C     for  yourself,    V,.    for  use 
found,..:!.,  find 
.^,. . .fully, .  .Q_. .  full, .  .y. .full  (t>) 
. . .  funeral 


Illllllll. 

X, 


C         I 

garden,  ____  *  .  guardian 


.TTT^T.  garnet,  .  r...^..  granite 
../..,  gentleman,    J    gentlemen;    L  agent,  ......  giant 

.  .  .^"  .  gentlemanly,  ..(??..  jointly,     ^/    gentle-y,  .  ...^  .  .  genteel, 

.••-,-••  genteelly 
Ari    germane,   f->  German 
..T...  go,    —   come,    —  s~^    came;  ........  goes,    —  o    comes 


God,  ....'.  .guide 


gong,  --  coming 
«-     gold,  ._^_.  .  gilt,  guilt 

£    graduation,        U    gradation 
.:.  .....guide,..  T...  God 


JQO  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

H. 

...V:...  or have, ..V:.. halve 

haven't,  ..!7T..  have  not 


heartily,  ..£:....  hardly, ..!_....  mortally 
heavy,        v_^    heavier,         v_     heavily,    ...Vr.. active 
.........  held,    <r>    hold  (see  beheld) 

..„.}..  hereat,.!^.... whereat;  ..TX. herein,  .TV herecm 

..v^?...  hereof,  ...^c^..  hereafter, .._.  whereof 

.  .j-X]  -  -  -  hereto, .  .^X]  .whereto 

. .  .^xf .  -  herewith, .  ^*{-  •  wherewith 

...TT...  Highland, .  .TT^.  Holland 

....I....  or.,<— s..him, me 

himself, .  .^7?. .  or  ."TTTT.S: .  myself 
'. . .  -history, .  ."^L/C.  .  mystery 
". .  Holland,. .T. . . Highland 
.  honestly, . .  .7T. .  nicely 

"V-"i.  ^  >»-'  i 

-  -  .*. horse-racing, . . .  °  ./rTTT. .  horse  raising 

r—  H 

.. rir:.. or.. !*... however,. .V... how  far 
\  humble,  ^N    amiable 


/. 

I  cannot, I  am  not 

.^...  I  could  not,...^..  I  mean  to 

.('-•...  idleness,      J    dullness 

V"\          t          *-* 

...CT..1)    idolatry,    V^    or    t/   adultery 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED. 

s-^y  immaturely, .  .^^_^r.    immaterially 
^- ^—^/l  immerge,    s—~^f    emerge,  merge 


191 


immersion, 


emersion,  mersion  (rare) 


immigrate,    ,  —  <—    emigrate,  ..........  migrate 

.  immigration,    ,  —  .<—  ^>   emigration,  ............  migration 

impaired,  .  .T!7^  .  .  important 
J.  .  impassionate,  ......  ?\...  impassioned,   '~\j   impatient 

v->  —  ^   indication,       1  —  D    induction 

...T;...  indicted,  undoubted,   *-1    indebted,       Ij   undated 

^_^^  .....  in  effect,  ..........  in  fact 

........  or  .......  in  doubt,.        .indeed,  ......  in  him 

•  —  -\<-  —  1  —  f 

••<i_^--in  l"m'  ......  indeed,  ......  ^.or  ..^.^..'...iq  doubt 

ine  vitable-y,  .....  /Ti  .  .  .  u  na  voidable-y 

inform,   ^V_    notify 

notified 

—  r>   notification 
^^   notifying 
ingenious 


_____  /^TT.  informed,    ^ 

*~~\s~5  information, 
....  ^r:.  informing, 

ingenuous,  .." 
.....  .....inner,  .......  near 

V.innerve,       *    \^  unnerve,        v_  nerve 
v~\^>  innovation,      Vi  invasion 
v-v_2    intention,  v    Vj?     inattention 

...  interested,  ..  .s  ---  f....  understood 
v~—  —  f  I 

irruption,   ^^       eruption,    /\)    ruption 
.  island,  .  ......  land,  '.......  highland 


IQ2  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

J. 

...~f...  January, .../-..  June 
~J. . . -  Johnston, . .... .  Johnson 

K. 

~~/|..  kindred,   -S  country 

« — *-f  knowingly,  -~~~>     intentionally 

fL, knowledge, .. .  analogy 


L. 


/?...  latitude,.  .„!'.  .  altitude 


C     learned  (v),    C^    or   C    learned  (adj) 
../rr^..  leave, -./^V.  -  live 
.^TTT) .  licorice, .  .^rfrrf ..  liquors 
..^...literate,  ../^..-illiterate 

f?     loaned,    f9    lent 
(^~       luckily,.... likely 

M. 

..<*~!)..  machine, mission ;. 'T^X.  machinery,. .^-^.. missionary 

../T/r:  manufactory, ....T-Sr. manufacture, .  ..T^r^.  manufacturer 
.  fTT^T. .  marked, .  f~^/~.. .  market 
...t_i/s... maturely, .  .^^.xr:. materially 

.memoranda, memorandum 

migrate,    s—*-    emigrate, immigrate 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.        193 

..migration,    ^— <-^>  emigration,  . . . . . . . -y .  immigration 

'..  ministry,  ¥.. . .  monastery 

.TTP.-.min'ute,    '  ^"(     month,  ..r?>ri..  minute' 

r^rr*.  mixture, mixed 

T    or    o   mold,    s—s~    melt 


or  <\  molder,    s—f      melter 
mortally, .  *{.. . .hardly, . ...... .  heartily 


., misses 

murderess.        I  murderous,    c — -b   murders 


.......  my  own,  .  .....  mine 

..  C?.-  or  ^r£S.  myself,   -TV  himself 

K 

v  __  '     narrated,   c  —  .   quoted 

*-f 

____  "  .  .  .  New  York  ,  .  .>r-^\  ____  .   Newark 

^-4>    next,  v_^  —  "    annexed 
.7!  .vjXnot  necessary,     —  ^-D^    unnecessary 
.  .  .  nuisance,  .  .  ...  incense 

^ 


.    occupy,  .....  „..  copy,.  rTTtv..  keep 

occupied,  ........  copied,        X   kepf 

O'Connell,  ........  Connelly,  .....  A  .O'Connor,  ...  .'..  .  Connerj 

..  /™.of,..^-.for,  ./S  -----  after 

•/"    old,   r    late;    *        older,   rl  elder,    (        later 


194 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


or    V    oldest,    (~\    eldest,    <b    or    «°   latest 
on  the  whole,  .„:....  undoubtedly 


..^...opposition,  .^..apposition,  -'-Vy- composition,  -\^-- position, 

\i      possession 
~^C.. .  O'Reilly, . . ^f... .  Reilly 

rx^TTT.  O'Rourke,    ...//:. Rourke 

........  or  .....  or  not,  .^..around 

c  p 

other, .  .C . .  there,  their, .....  at  all 

.  .V. . . .  others, .  .v> . .  theirs 

.,  o 

......  our,  ~^\    her;  ..„.. ours,  ~^   hers 

'L  C 

..?^:..  over,    V_  very 

.^i;/.....  overdrew,  ./^..  overdraw 

On  ^  f~\ 

^r.. .  \ .  overlade,  .rr. . . .  overload 

.. overreach, overarch 

.  overrun,  ../r^:..  overran 

..^...  oversee,   .^..oversaw,  .^v^.. oversew 

'  ^ 

overshadow,  ..>?..  overshade 

overtook,  ^..  .   overtake  (    .?r[ overtaken) 

overthrew,  .Sr...  overthrow 

v O 

own,  \ — •    know;  ..^...owns,    — o   knows 

P. 

.-^rr.  panic,  .iSr^TTT.   bank 
..>...  part,  .Y .  apart,  \/\..  party 
..  partly,  ^...  happily,  .\.  haply 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY    DISTINGUISHED.        195 

\  % 

.  .  rrrf.  .  part-owner,  .  .  rrrf  .  partner 

.  .  7?  .  .  pasture,  .  .  „  .  .  pastor,    .  /*j  .  .  .  compositor 
.._..  pattern,    \o      patron 

\>     patient,     >j...  passionate 

.  .  ;*  :  .  .  paused,  .  .  ?*  .  .  passed,  past 

pellucid,  .^Y..  placid 


.\.  ____  pioneer 

people-(n),  ..\...  pupil,  people  (») 
s^ 

persecute,  ..\r..  prosecute 
persecution,  .  .<v  .  .-^  .  .  .  prosecution 
\/)    Persia,  *\J  or   N  Prussia 

Persian,  .x^p?..  Parisian,  \)    Prnssian 

personate,  per  cent.,  *\i^     present,  ..v^fe.  pursuant 

petrify,  ..\..--   putrefy 

petrified,..  \.----  putrefied 

petrifaction,  '  .N^-j.  .  putrefaction 


N^.      Pittsylvania,  X\^-s   Pennsylvania 
.^<T..  plaster,  ,TJ»..  blast;  .:*...  plastered,  .^...blasted 


plasterer,  ..^...blaster 

V 

plastering,  ..^...blasting 


.  plenary,      _^    plainer 
portend,  *N    pretend 

port«r,  .^:...  operator 

\  *7 
portion,    \s     operation,  ..^...apportion. 

.  possible,   «it,.  passable 


196  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

.......  predict,  <^_  protect,  *X      predicate,  .«h..  or  .^.product 

.......  prediction,  tV_T5   protection,   *\         predication,  *X     or 

^T^..  production 
VSA-  --  preeminent,     v—  x^   permanent,  ../TT/h..  prominent 

\r^    prefer,  ..  .  \K>.  .  proffer 

*V—  \ 

../^.premise,  ...;77?..  promise 

<\ 
,V_...  prescribe,   .  .*TT\.  ..  proscribe 

^ 

.  .  5s.  .  .  .  princess,  .  .  5s..  .  princes 

»«          *s. 

..A.,  product,   *\      predicate,  \_  protect,..^.,  predict 

"\     production,   *X         predication,   V_^i    protection 

prediction 

..\^<|...  property,     \\     appropriate,  purport,  ..^v...  propriety 
\       proportion,  \  ^    preparation,     \\       appropriation 

\        proportioned,    \        proportionate 
•\  ^ 

..•TTV...  .proscription,  ..\.  ......  prescription 

~ 


.^ 


..\^f..  pure,  .\..^.  poor  ;  .x^.-purely,  .\^..  .  .  poorly 

/ 

.\_X--purer,  ..X^...  poorer;  ..v/>r?u  pureness,  .NSii.  ____  poorness 


..  purest,  -Xi--  poorest 
V\>   purpose,   \       propose,  ..\  ..  perhaps 

pursuant,    \S"    personate,  per  cent.,    N^    present 
pursuer,    V^  oppressor 


Q> 

.  quality,         I    equity 

.or  .^rrrx.. queer,   frrTrrx.. clear 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.        197 

R. 
/$—"  recognize,   /'^—y   recommence 

/"    recollect, .  .<! . recall 

refinery, . .  .^Trrf.  refiner 

'u\  registrar,     /$      register,    xX/""'    registry 
.}r:  refract,/  reflect 

^refraction,  /          reflection 
./rr .  renewed, . ./-:. .  ruined 
X\J    representation,   /^    reputation 
^V;,,^.  resume,  --/S^.    reassume 
..{*..      rotten,       .^...  rotting 
A     ruddy.  A   red 

8. 

^-/"  safely,  1_  safer,   {f   very  weU 
. -j,. . . .  school,  .."^rpr... skill 

.?TT<r.  scorch, scratch 

...A...  secession,    w    cessation 
..  .?\.. ..  seize,  ..x.  cease 

seized,... V.  ceased 

....  send,  «->  sent 
«\     separate  (see  spread) 

\)     separation,    \?     suppuration,  A)    suppression 
...P...  settee,.. P..  seat,  city 
^     several,  ^/  severally 
..r^v.  shadow,  -J   or  J  shade 


[98  MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 

—/T.  shallow,       J    shoal,  shale,    -•?   shore,    3  shell 

6      situation,    \j    station 

'V-     sofa,   I    stove,    x_   safe 
. .  T. . .  society, . .  P. .  system 

„  c o  O 

\n       special  class,     * — o    sub-class 
^ol    special  committee,  \  I     sub-committee 
V} "-  special  contract,    \       sub-contract 

°\     spread,   "s.    separate,    °N    separated,    \/     support,  sport, 

\  \ 

...S... spared,    \^    suppurate 

staid,    I    steady 

Lstaidness,  t_p    steadiness 

P  P 

4      stated,    I    said,    I    state 

..•"?!..  statesman,  J-— ^    statesmen 

L      stove,  A^  sofa,   x.    safe 
^»     supposed,  \>    suppose 

A3     suppression,     \)    separation,    \^     suppuration 
\S    suppurate  (see  spread) 
<J^      suspend,    P    sustained 
— P...  system,. q... society 

T. 

L_^  tenable,   J      attainable 

[       test,    [     taste;    b'    tester,     b    taster 
...>....  thank  the, . .(. .  thought, .  .Y7. .  thanked 
..S...  thawetl, thought 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY    DISTINGUISHED.        199 
.......  the,..:.  .a,  .....  an 

t.  .  theism,   v—  -    atheism 
/ 
---(;-.-  1  heist,    ^     atheist 

tt  heistic,  .  .  f  ...    atheistic 
i-  r         a 

.  .  \  .  .  .  .   t  here,  their,  ..'...  at  all,  .  .  :  .  .  other 

V-_      there  are,   vX    there  were 
.  .  .  V  .  .  thereat,  ...(..  thereto 

C  r 

...P..    therein,..  r.   thereon,  \J   thereof 

....£..    thereinto,  ^—^    thereunto 

...V..  these,  ..^.  this,   v>   those 

I 
........  time,  .......  autumn 

.  .  .  I.  .  .  to  sell,  ...  to  use 

r  C 

—     together,  .  !7P.  .  altogether,    -^^  again 

.JL.JT..  or  .       .too  young,  ...  .to  you-r 

i  ^"'^ 

P      w   \s-  *ota^y' 

...I  .....  trinity,    L-i    eternity 

...I...  tnith,  ..T..  true 
1 

\r      turn,    J    train 


U. 

C-      ulcerate,  ........  lacerate;    C-3   ulceration,  f~*^     laceration 

unavoidable-y,       ^v    inevitable-y 
unceasin,   ^SL    incessant 


understood, interested 

.TV. . .   undoubtedly,  .„ on  the  whole  (see  indicted) 

M 


2OO  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

V. 

.  :£:  .  .  valiant,  .  ^C.  .  violent  ;    .  .  .?£•.  .  valiantly,  .  .V^?.  .  .  .  violently 

*  I    x"x. 

valuable,    ^-   available,  .7^7.  ?S..  voluble 

valuation,  V^/7  violation,    ^_    or   \^>  convulsion 
Vanderbilt,  Ss^j^.  .Vanderpoel 
very  well,  \J^    safely,  ^L_  safer 
..V...  void,  .Si.,  a  void;  ...S...  voided,  Si.,  a  voided 

W. 

»  —    wake,  woke,    1  —    awake,  awoke 
t  —  .,    waken,      i  —  ^   awaken 
..T!^..  we  are,  --(y--  we  will,  ..Y...  we  all,  what  will 
U      well  (when  will),  ..*:..  ill,  ..£...  already 
(/      well-bred,  ..^S...  ill-bred 
../f..  were,  ..^...  are,  ..x<T.  where 
..^...  were  not,  .../?)..  were  there 
)     what  was,     /     which  was,..  p..  it  was 


whether 


<      when,  ...:..  why,  "N 

^      when  did  you,    e     I      when  do  you,    t^    when  had  you 
s\  y,  * 

---  whereat,  .^...whereto;  ..„.!..  hereat,  ..^x]...  hereto 


...T^T..  whereof,..^,  hereof,  ..^/*..  hereafter 

.vx(...  wherewith,..^.,  herewith 

.../..   which,  ../...each 
...'...   wide,  ..y.  white,  ^   wet 
.^.^    .  woman,  -"^v-ii--  women 
--^-.    wouldn't       ..   .  .   would  not 


OUTLINES   SPECIALLY   DISTINGUISHED.       2OI 

Y. 

*      yes.  6    or  C^   yes,  sir 

_.£.,  yourself...^:,  use:... 6^_  yourselves... /r..  use* 
_^r?..  you  are.  .../rr.  you  will.  ..^..you  were 
"2, •••  y°u  are  not-  -^  you  will  not,  .^.. you  were  not 
...^...you  were  not,  .v^x?-- .you  were  there 
..frT?...  young  man,   £-^  young  men 

REMARKS    ABOUT    OUTLINES    SPECIALLY    DIS- 
TINGUISHED. 

446.  Outlines  for  First  Study.— It  is  not  expected  that  the 
learner  will  be  able  to  master  completely  the  foregoing  list  of  spe- 
cially distinguished  outlines  except  after  considerable  patient  study 
and  practice ;   therefore  it  is  recommended  that  attention  be  first 
paid  to  the  most  frequently  recurring  and  more  important  of  them, 
which  will  be  found  in  the  following  collection  selected  from  the 
list.     Only  the  first  word  of  each  group  is  given,  but  the  outlines  of 
all  the  words  that  follow  it  must,  of  course,  be  studied :  Above, 
absence,  account,  advantage,  all-the-time,  altogether,  any,  anybody, 
appertain,  at-our,  at-least,  become,  beheld,  broad,   come,  coming, 
concussion,  consign,  construe,  contention,  corner,  delivery,  devise, 
did-you-ever,  disturb,  diverse,  doctor,  drugstore,  easier,  ever,  for- 
mal-ly,  forward,  found,  fully,  gentleman,  gentlemanly,  guide,  heavy, 
held,  himself,  honestly,  however,  I-cannot,  I-could-not,  immigration, 
impaired,   inevitable-y,  inform,   informed,   information,    informing, 
interested,  leave,  loaned,  marked,  Mrs.,  my-own,  occupy,  occupied, 
old,  oldest,  other,  over,  own,  part-owner,  plaster,  porter,  portion, 
property,  proportion,  pure,  purer,  purest,  purpose,  pursuant,  registrar, 
seize,  send,  situation,  spread,  stated,  stove,  to-sell,  truth,  turn,  were, 
which,  woman. 

447.  A  Good  Way  to  Study  the  List.— A  very  good  and  in- 
teresting  way  of  studying  the  words  of  the  List  is  for  the  students  to 
themselves  construct  little  sentences,  each  embodying  all  the  words 
of  one  or  more  groups,  and  then  practise  writing  and  reading  them. 


202  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

The  following  are  samples  of  such  sentences :  In  his  absence  his 
brother  attended  to  his  business.  He  took  an  account  of  the  kind  and 
amount  of  cotton  goods  in  the  store.  Anybody  can  do  his  duty, 
nobody  can  do  better.  lie  cannot  appropriate  my  properly  with 
propriety.  I  saw  him  come  before  I  came,  and  he  keeps  coming  and 
going  all-the-time  from-the-time  he  gets  up  in  the  morning.  Fora 
heavy  man  he  is  quite  active. 

448.  "Deemed" — "Admit." — The  word  deemed  should  always 
be  vocalized  to  distinguish  it  from  admit,  not  vocalized. 

449.  Shus. — The  termination  shus  is  written  downward,  except 
after  the  stems  T,  D,  F  and  V,  with  simple  endings  and  the  s-circle 
written   with    the    "  over-to-the-left "    movement;    thus,    ambitious 
M-Bs-SHs,  suspicious  ssP3-SHs,  factious  FJ-K-SHs,  gracious    Gr- 
SHs2,  efficacious  F2-K-SHs,  fallacious  F  J-Z-SHs,  precious  Pr2-SHs, 
voracious  V2-^-SHs,  auspicious  S^-P-SHs,  luscious  Z2-SHs  ;  but  au- 
dacious  D3--S7/s,  fictitious  F3-K-T-5/7s,  atrocious  Tra-5//s,  vicious 
V3-S#s,  facetious  Fs3-5V/s,  vexatious  V2-Ks-.S7/s. 

450.  "  Snow,"    "  Snowy," — "  Sun,"  "  Sunny." — Snow    and 
snowy  should  always  be  vocalized  to  distinguish  them  respectively 
from  sun  and  sunny. 

451.  "Some"  —  "Same."— In   business   correspondence  same 
should  be  vocalized  to  distinguish  it  from  some. 

452.  Errors  from  Inexact  Writing. — Besides  the  errors  that 
flow  from  actual  conflict  of  outlines,  against  which  the  list  is  pro- 
vided, there  are  others  that  arise  from  inexact  or  careless  writing  of 
certain  outlines  which  if  properly  written  would  not  conflict.    Special 
care  should  be  taken  in  writing  the  words  of  the  following  groups  in 
order  that  such  errors  may  be  avoided: — dock,  deck; — track,  truck, 
contract ; — take,  dig,   pick  ; — taking,   digging,    picking  ; — evidence, 
affidavits,  papers  ; — report,  reiterate  ; — reported,  reiterated  ; — report- 
ing, reiterating  ; — adjudication,  allegation  ; — assignment,  demand  ; — 
Murphy,  Martha  ; — attracted,  directed ; — every-day,  Friday ; — elevate 
lift  ; — elevating,   lifting  ; — ope'n,    bent  ; — implied,   employed  ; — ad 
vance,  defiance,  defense  ; — clannish,  clownish  : — abolition,  ablution; 
— influence,   infuse  ; — name,    enemy  ; — duty,    deity  ; — admonition, 
diminution  ;  —  partner,    brother-in-law  ; — most,    must  ; — eyes,    eye- 
sight ; — endless,  needless  ; — cart,  car,  cargo  ; — land,  yard  ; — engaged, 
connected,    communicated  ; — pain,    bother  ; — would-say,   we-say  ;— 
what-can,  we-can  ; — numbers,  brothers. 


READING    EXERCISES. 


203 


KEADIXG  EXERCISES. 


SHORT  WORDS  ARE  BEST. 


--V-.    -1T 


>.r_..x._  _  _        _ 

f-^-f--]--'-^-  C '  -(,"'  --«-  - 

.Q....C    _/l 
"J      t-£~-l 

"~V"  \ 

c  ^  ^. .  s  <?.^1,  A.\..^.  * 
\  \.      •  ^ 


••f- 


204 


MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 


c.    7  1  c      ,  c  c 

S~S 

C7— *    -V 

E    — v--- (•—£-- 

f        ^       '   ^<-^ 

V      (o     ^    .<rrr^.._ 

_D 


I 


r 


\ 


READING   EXERCISES. 

O_  1        x  ^   i  / 

Jb 

l 
a  '-a     V 

^^.......^ ^. V. 


205 


"\ 

T 


r 


(  J 


L 


/ 


e=        /1_C 

b  N^P 

=        L(..^.Z 


\ 


-^l- 


2O6 


MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 


& 


X 


I  \       I       <r^~o  -./T7—  \D      /  I 


6         Ix 


\ 


l 


READING   EXERCISES. 


2O/ 


r. _^_.  \  .A...  .    ._,_,, 

/•  *r  -N     ^ 

p      1  v  \/~~         i 

---^— (..._.  ..^ 

__...W    ,      .!^._  xT..      I      \   . 

r         i  i  j          I 

I  ( 

V=  ~C-- 

—j- — •«— i     

,...:i..L..LLr 

/ ..  .v. 


L .., 


208 


MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 


/.  -,  \_  I 
T--^-~-j~-~-^ 

"\ °~ r  L~  "^sr* 

U — -x  /"        j^-   />  /  *V  ^^ 

I       ^      g_\         C     (        ^_ ^5-0^ 

1  V  I  ~^  ^\  ^ 


C\ 


.i. 


r   c 


READING   EXERCISES. 


2CX) 


BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE 


LETTER  No.  1. 


V/1 


L 

-•-  —  f. 


...  1...  r ........   .I...... 

T        <Ly 


J,        \ 


/ 


2IO 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


LETTER  No.  2. 

___r_>8^__^_i 

.  >- 

"  v 

_D 

XU  I  f 

f  '  _      I 

I     "  o 

~]~  •  ~<L^~~~ 

'   C.U. 

x   ___   J  _^ 

-\; 

LETTER  No.  3. 
os       ..-^SrT  ^         10  ^ 

u 

1U5_/_.tO 


READING   EXERCISES. 


211 


. 


^  _ 


L  V 


-7 

I 


-t- 


-t--^~ 


v/  /  (  - 

\  -T_j-«} 
.  ......  6 ..... 


t, 


^. 


\    155      _  i,    \  -, 

_- 


212 


MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


-tr 


LETTER  JNo.  4. 


«/    ._jv-/^--- 

0  f 

~2_9 


V 


— 1 .  I  _. 


READING  EXERCISES. 


213 


">    ^-  /        /     o  /\ 

-=v  t-- 7-^- 

<ry  --^  -    <</---— —^  ,- 

*       S7'      *         <\        ( 

1  __  ;v      ^^  jc±L*      V...L^  ^ 

i 

,_v=^..__._c_    _.., 

LETTER  No.  5. 

^    X, 


....s_  130 


100  J 


214  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

c_   ,*-*s_LA         l      "   ^  ( 

YH     ~~\~t 

/-  i     .,    -^  / 

J .___   7y  o_  \ 

8  A- 
.  k. 

•> 

I    '      ^     ^\     I 
b  2- \  J  — . 

9 

-f- 

LETTER  No.  6. 

30   r    i        ^    0_^^    /_      V__ 
fr^.s-   f  -— ^-^-~U«     — -r 


READING   EXERCISES. 


215 


-j—^— fl  *   -^^^^^ 

..re 


?  ^ ' 


L  .../ 


( 


--£-£-. 

x  \    : 

-t-  v  CA 


\   r 


LETTER  No.  7. 


./  .N    \ 


u 


is 


1 5 


-7 


-^ 
-±- 


2l6 


MUNSON    PHONOGRAPHY. 


5 


LETTER  No.  8. 

L 


r 


L  r 


.u 


-f 


READING   EXERCISES. 


217 


*4-1- 


n 


'  --fr* 

vF 

LETTER  No.  9. 

/—  X    ^ s 

r  _1_^_  <•  c_  ..H_..%  ^  '... 

^     JL^±- 1 

^    r 


218  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 


X ^— rl. 

._! ) 

Q_ 

o 

O 

^  '     r*          ^     J 

._b  vl  Ns~^ — •v i      /---/- 

/      \> 

>      '  l-'-V 

r^...  j 

V  b         <J 

x  •  -  -    -     y^--- 

LETTER  No.  10. 


READING   EXERCISES. 


219 


,    r 

-  —<^/-— 

c 
^^      v— 

x" 

-S_ 

^ — '^ 

V-          ^  V  ^  „  J 

U— v/ y^1. ^v.. 


LETTER  No.  1L 


/  ..L.i... 


0.0 


\ 


(/ 


220  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

5  05  \  ^  |  Q     x^v       5       ^^7^ 

•r  S      __ 

^  !; 

i     1     ^ 

^-^^N       "     

IN 
--J^T^) OXX^     --Nr--        -^ I-        *S     -- 

/i      J       o  _../^?x. o~~^    (o 

^     .       ^^        f 
\123> 


KEY   TO   READING   EXERCISES.  221 

KEY  TO   READING   EXERCISES. 

SHORT  WORDS  ARE  BEST. 

The  following  specimen  of  short  word  composition  is  from  an  ad- 
dress  delivered  by-the  late  Hon.  Horatio  Seymour,  at-a  State  Con- 
vention of  School  Superintendents,  held  quite  a  number-of  years-ago 
at-the  City-of  Utica,  in-the  State-of-New-York  : 

Through  life  we-will  teach  and  we-will  learn.  This  world  is-a 
great  school-house,  where  we-find  out  what-is  good  and  what-is  evil, 
and-thus  get  ready  to  act  in  some-other  sphere.  What  we-are  at-the 
end  of-this  life  we-shall-be  when-the  next  begins.  We-must  spare 
no  pains  then  when-we  teach  others  or  ourselves.  We-teach  ourselves 
in-our  thoughts,  others  by  our  words.  We-must  take-care  that-we- 
think  and  speak  in-a-way  so  clear  that  we-do-not  cheat  or  mislead 
ourselves  by  vague  and  hazy  ideas.  To-save  us  from  this  we-must 
learn  to-think  in  words.  We-must  get  a  habit  of  using  them  in 
thought  with- the  same  care  which-we  use  when-we  speak  or  write  to- 
others. Words  give  a  body  and  form  to-our  thoughts,  without-which 
they-are  apt  to-be  so  vague  and  dreamy  that  we-do-not  see  where 
they-are  weak  or  false.  If- we  put  them  into-a  body  of  words  we-will 
as-a-rule  learn  how-much-of  truth  there-is  in-them.  When  they-are 
in-that  form  we-can  turn  them  over  in-our  minds.  If-we  write  them 
out  we-find  that  in  many-cases,  when-we  put  them  to-this  test,  the 
ideas  we-thought  we-had  hold-of  seem  to-fade  away.  But  if-they 
prove  to-be  real  and-of  value,  they-are  thus  not-only  made  clear  to- 
us,  but  they-are  in-such-a  shape  that  we-can  make  them  clear  to- 
others. When  our  ideas  float  in-our  minds  in-a  hazy  way,  and  we-are 
in  doubt  about-them,  if-we  talk  with  others,  as-a-rule  our  doubts  are 
solved  by-the  fact  that  when-we  state  them  in-a-clear  way  we-see  the 
truth  at-once.  In  most  cases  what  we-say  to-others,  not  what  they 
say  to-us,  when-we  consult  them,  settles  our  doubts.  We-must-not 
only  think  in  words,  but  we-must  also  try  to-use-the  best  words,  and- 
those  which  in-speech  will  put  most  clearly  what-is  in-our  minds 
into-the  minds  of-others.  This-is-the  great  art  to-be  gained  by-those 
who  wish  to-teach  in-the  school,  the  church,  at-the  bar,  or  through-the 
press.  To-do  this  in-the  right  way,  they  should  as-a-rule  use-the 
short  words  which-we  learn  in  early  life,  and-which-have  the  same 
sense  to-all  classes  of  men.  They-are-the  best  for-the  teacher,  the 
orator,  and-the  poet. 


222  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

If-you-will  look-at  what-has-been  said  in  prose  or  in  verse  that 
comes  down  to-us  through  many  years  —  things  which-have  struck  all 
minds  and-that  men  most  quote  —  you-will-find  that  they-are  in  short 
words  of-our-own  tongue.  Count  them  in  Gray's  "  Elegy,"  which  all 
love  to-read,  and  you-will-find  that  they  make  up  a  large  share  of-all 
that-he  uses.  The  English  of-our  Bible  is  good,  but  now-and-then 
some  long  words  are  found  and-they  always  hurt-the  verse  in-which 
you-find  them.  Take-that  which-says  "  Oh  ye  generation  of  vipers- 
who  hath  warned  you  to-flee  from-the  wrath  to  come  ?  "  There-ib 
one  long  word  which  ought-not  to-be  in-it,  namely,  "generation." 
In-the  older  version  the  word  ' '  brood  "  is  used.  Read  the  verse  again 
with-this  term  and  you-feel  its  full  force.  When  Daniel  Webster 
made  a  speech  he  used  to-tell  those  who  put  it  in  form  for-the  press 
to-strike-out  every  long  word.  If-you-will  study  the  things  he-said  or 
wrote  you-will-find  they-were  mainly  made  up  of  short,  clear,  strong 
terms,  although  he  sometimes  used  those  of  length  for-the-sake-of 
sound.  No-other  man  could  paint  with-such  words  as- well-as  he. 
He-could  draw  out  a  scene  so  well  that-those-who  heard  him  felt  that 
they  themselves  had  seen  that  of- which  he  spoke. 

The  use-of  long  words  which  we-get  from  other  tongues  not- 
only  makes  our  thoughts  and-our  speech  dim  and  hazy,  but  it-has- 
done  somewhat  to  harm  the  morals  of-our  people.  Crime  sometimes 
does-not  look-like  crime  when-it-is  set  before-us  in-the  many  folds 
of-a  long  word.  When-a  man  steals  and  we-call-it  "  defalcation," 
we-are  at-a  loss  to  know  if-it-is  a  blunder  or  a  crime.  If-he  does-not 
tell  the  truth  and  we-are-told  that  it-is  a  case  of  "  prevarication,"  it 
takes  us  some-time  to  know  just  what  we-should  think  of-it.  No  man 
will  ever  cheat  himself  into  wrong-doing,  nor  will  he  be  at-a  loss  to 
judge  of-others,  if-he  thinks  and  speaks  of  acts  in  clear,  crisp  English 
terms.  It-is  a  good  rule  when  one  is  at-a  loss  to  know  if-an  act  is 
right-or-wrong,  to-write  it  down  in  short,  straight  out  English.  It- 
may-be-said  that  if-you  carry  this  thing  too  far  we-may  cramp  our- 
selves too-much  ;  that  our  language  has-been  made  rich  by  what  it-has 
gained  from  others,  and-that  we-ought-not  to-lose  the  use-of  words 
which- we  need  to-give  shades  of  meaning,  or  for  scientific  purposes. 
All-that-is  true,  but  still  \ve-should  take-care  to  make  our-own  tongue 
the  groundwork  of-our  thought  and  speech.  Many  things  are  gained 
by  doing  so.  He  who  will  try  to-use  short  words  and  to-shun  long 


KEY  TO   READING  EXERCISES.  223 

ones  will  in-a-little-while  not-only  find  that  he-can  do-so  with  ease, 
but  that  it-will  also  make-hitn  more  ready  in-the  use-of  words  of 
Greek  or  Latin  origin  when-he  needs  them.  If-he  tries  to-write  in 
words  of  one  syllable  he-will-find  that  he-will  run  through  his  mind 
a-great-many  words  to-get  those  he  needs.  While  he  may-not  at-the- 
time  use  them,  yet  they-are  brought  to-his  mind  in-his  search  for- 
those  that-he  wants.  It-is  a  good  way  to-learn  words  of-all  kinds. 
\Vhen-a  man  is  in  search-of  one  fact  he-may-be  led  to-look  at  every 
book  in-his  library,  and-thus  he  learns  many  things.  There-is- 
another  gain  when-we  try  to-use  only  short  words,  to-bring  them  in 
and  keep  all  others  out :  we-have  to-take  a-great-many  views  of-the 
topic  about-which  we-write.  In-this-way  we-find  that-we  bring  to- 
our  minds  a-great-many  new  thoughts  and  ideas  that  would-not 
otherwise  spring  up. 

BUSINESS  CORRESPONDENCE. 
LETTER  No.  i. 

GENTLEMEN  :  We-desire  to-call-your  attention  to-an  improved 
process  for  galvanizing  we-are  putting  on-the  market.  It-is  of  special 
value  in  galvanizing  lengths  such-as  are  used  in  constructing  wind 
mills.  A  plant  can-be  operated  as  required,  which-is  a  decided  im- 
provement on-the  old  method.  The  cost  of  galvanizing  is  materially 
reduced  and-the  manufacturer  with-a  limited  amount  of  work  can  do 
it  at-a  less  cost  than  to  send  it  away. 

If  you-are  interested  we-shall-be-glad  to-hear  from-you  and  to- 
make-you  a  proposition  for  installing  one-of  these  plants.  Letters-of 
inquiry  should  state  size  of  largest  pieces  to-be  galvanized,  with  gen- 
eral description  of-the  work  and  approximate  estimate  of  quantity  to- 
be  done.  Hoping  to-hear  from-you,  we-are 

Very-truly  yours, 

LETTER  No.  2. 

DEAR-SIR:  Yours-of  October  8th  at-hand.  In-reply  would-say 
that  we-should-be  pleased  to-have-an  agent  in-that  part-of  New- York 
where  you-are,  as  we-have  no-one-there  now.  Our  goods  are  very- 
much  improved  since  Dr.  Bronson  of-your  city  had  his  set.  Our 
method  of  doing  business  will-be  thoroughly  explained  by  copy-of 
contract  which  we  send-you  under  separate  cover.  We-also  send-you 


224  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

one  of-our  circulars.  We-have  agents  that-are  doing  exceedingly 
well  with-the  goods  and  making  money.  Prices,  etc.,  we- will  quote 
you,  providing  you  wish  to-go  into-the  details  of-the  business. 
Kindly  let-us  hear  from- you  again,  and  oblige, 

Yours-truly, 

LETTER  No.  3. 

SUPERINTENDENT  :  Replying  to-yours  of-the  loth  instant  regarding 
damage  to-Pullman  Company's  car  No.  745,  June  10,  and  car  No. 
755.  July  4>  please  note  that  no-one  in-this  department  seems-to-have 
any  knowledge  of-the  alleged  damage.  I-would  call-your-attention 
to-the  fact  that  if-the  platform  of  car  No.  745  was  broken-off  by 
starting  an  engine,  or  by-a  dead  pull,  which-is-the  same  thing,  it- 
would  indicate  that-the  platform  of-the  car  was  in  bad  condition,  as 
in  ordinary  service  the  draft  gear  would-be  expected  to  start  many- 
times  the  weight  of-an  engine  (which  they-claim  was  coupled  to  rear 
of  train  but  not  assisting).  If-this-is-the  case  the  Pullman  Car  Com- 
pany would  themselves  be  responsible  for-the  repairs,  as-the  car 
received  no  unusual  usage.  Mr.  Barton's  statement  would  seem  to 
indicate  the  correctness  of-their  claim  that  car  No.  755  was  derailed, 
but  the  attention  of  no-one  in-this  department  seems-to-have-been 
directed  to-the  derailment  and  damage.  It  appears  to-me  that  in- 
accordance  with-the  usual  custom  of-the  Pullman  Car  Company  their 
porter  should-have  called-the  attention  of-the  persons  handling  the 
car  to-the  derailment  at-the-time  it  occurred.  It-is-not  customary  in- 
this  department  to-authorize  repairs  of-this-kind,  as  you-are-aware. 

MASTER  MECHANIC. 

LETTER  No.  4. 

GENTLEMEN  :  We-have  your  favor  of-the  i6th  inst.  before-us  and 
carefully  note  contents  of  same.  Regarding  enclosure  of  data  con- 
cerning roofing,  as  per  understanding  with-the  writer,  would-say  that 
we-find  same  correct,  except  that  portion  of-it  referring  to-the  roofing 
consisting  of  felt  soaked  in  and  covered  with  "  Maltha,"  as-the  latter 
is-an  arbitrary  trade  name.  We-think  it-would-be  better  to-say  that- 
the  roofing  consists  of-a  wool  felt  thoroughly  saturated  with-a  water, 
alkali,  and  acid  proof  compound,  and-is  then  coated  with-a  harder 
material  of-the  same  composition,  which-is  intended  to  protect  and 
keep  the  interior  of-the  roofing  tacky  and  sticky,  thus  making  it  im- 


KEY  TO   READING  EXERCISES.  225 

possible  to-dry  out,  become  brittle,  or  crack.  We  suggest  this  change 
to-you,  as-there  are  so-many  different  materials,  some-of-which  are 
of  very-little  account,  and  for-which  the  trade  has  appropriated  the 
name  "  Maltha."  Trusting  that  we-have  made  ourselves  clear  in- 
this-matter,  and  soliciting  your  future  orders  when  in  need  of  any- 
thing in-our  line, 

Yours-respectfully, 

LETTER  No.  5. 

DEAR-SlR  :  Enclosed  herewith  I-send-you  blue-prints  showing-the 
results  of  calculations  made  for  net  hauling  capacity  of  class  "  R" 
locomotive  on-the  Eastern  Division.  This-is  based  on  using-the 
latest  type  class  "  R  "  engine,  weighing  about  1 30,000  pounds,  tender 
weighing  72,000  pounds  loaded — making-the  weight  of-the  engine 
about  100  tons. 

In  working  this  matter  up  it  occurred  to-me  that  as-the  resistance 
due  to  grade  was  purely  a  question  of  gravitation,  its  value  could-not- 
be  decreased  by-the  fact  that  we-had  hauled  2300  tons  on-the  Western 
Division,  but  that-the  decrease  in  total  train  resistance  was  due  to- 
decreased  rolling  friction  ;  or  it-is  probable  that  Wellington's  figure 
of  8  pounds  for  rolling  friction  is  too-high.  I-have  therefore  assumed 
for-the  Pennsylvania  Company  test  coefficient  a  rolling  friction  of  6£ 
pounds  per  ton.  with-the  proper  allowance  for  grade  resistance  and- 
the  usual  allowance  for  curve  resistance. 

Yours-truly, 

LETTER  No.  6. 

DEAR-SIR :  Yours-of-the  joih  ult.  to-hand  enclosing-your  check 
for  $32.84  covering  items  referred  to,  receipts  for-which  find  enclosed. 
If-you-will  kindly  turn  to-the  second  page  of-your  policy  you-will-find 
the  conditions  (347,  348)  very-clearly  set  out  in  large  type.  Accord- 
ing to-the  terms-of-your  policy  there-is- no  cash  surrender  value  until 
after  it-has-been  in-force  ten- years.  However,  the  difference  between- 
the  premium  you-are  paying  with-usand  what-you-would  have  to- pay 
in-a  level  premium  company  is  in  itself  a  large  profit,  and-your 
knowledge  of  life  insurance  is  sufficient  to-tell-you  that  it-is  very 
difficult  to-give(i77)  profits  both  ways.  I-hope  to-see-you  personally 
in-a-short-time,  and  will-be-able-to  explain  the  matter  more  fully 


226  MUNSON  PHONOGRAPHY. 

personally  than  by  letter.     With  kind  regards,  and  hoping  yourself 
and  family  are-all  in  good  health, 

Believe-me,  yours- very -sincerely, 

LETTER  No.  7. 

DEAR-SIR  :  We-have  your  valued  favor  of-the  2ist  inst.,  ordering 
one-of  our  No.  i  Self-feeding  Rip  Saws,  for-which  we-thank  you. 
We  note  that-you  specify  four  16  inch  15  gauge,  and  with-reference 
thereto,  beg  to-say  that  15  gauge  saws  are-not  a  standard  size.  We- 
have  14  gauge  saws  in-stock,  and  if  these  will  answer-your  purpose, 
wire  us  on-receipt-of  this-letter,  and-the  machine,  together  with-the 
saws,  will  go  forward  at-once.  We-have  some  15  gauge  saws  ordered, 
which-we  expect  to-arrive  within  four  days,  at-which  time  we-could 
fill  your  order  as  specified.  Kindly  let-us  hear  from-you  at-once,  and 
we-will  govern  ourselves  according  to-your  instructions. 
Yours- very-truly, 

LETTER  No.  8. 

GENTLEMEN  :  A-short-time-ago  I-sent  to-your  dock  a  propeller 
wheel  for-the  yacht  "  Hazelton."  I-trust  this  will-not-be  in-your- 
way  nor  interfere  with  any  arrangement  of  yours,  but  if-such  is-the 
case,  you-may  move  it  back  at-my  expense.  I-wish  that  you-would 
find  out  whether  you-can  purchase  for  me  from  James  Carney  &  Son 
a  propeller  wheel  of-the  same  size  and  dimensions  as-that  of-the  tug- 
boat "Kate  Williams,"  at-which  we-were  looking  when-it-was  on- 
your  dock  last  summer.  If-you  find  that-you-can  get  this  wheel  from 
Carney,  will-you  kindly  get  for  me  the  price  and  a-general  descrip- 
tion of-the  same?  I-should  like  to-purchase  this  through  you,  as-I- 
have  reason  to-think  I-cannot  buy  it  direct.  Will-you  also  please  let 
me  know  whether-the  machine  shop  situated  next  to-your  place  is 
properly  equipped  and  able-tobore  awheel  for-an  8"  shaft  and  fit  the 
key?  If-you-will  kindly  let  me  know  about-the  wheel  as-early-as- 
possible,  I-shall-be  greatly  obliged  to-you.  In-lhe  meantime  I-beg 
to  remain,  Very-truly-yours, 

LETTER  No.  9. 

GENTLEMEN  :  We-are  in-receipt-of  yours-of-the  8th  inst,  and  note 
contents.  Replying  to-the  same  would-say  that-we  billed  you  this 
coal  at-our  regular  price  for  first  quality  coal,  and-this  price  is  as  low 


KEY   TO   READING   EXERCISES.  227 

as  we-have  sold  coal  to  any  person  for-the  last  six  weeks.  We-are 
very-much  surprised  to-hear  that  you-are  offered  stove  coal  at  $4.75, 
f.  o.  b.  cars  at  shipping  points,  and  cannot  understand  it  at-all,  as 
that-is  considerably  lower-  than-the  lowest  quotation  we-have  heard- 
of  since-the  advance  in- the  price  of  coal.  If-it-is-not  asking  too-much 
we-should  like  to-inquire  what  port  this  was  to-be  shipped  from. 
None  of-our  people  has  known  of-this-kind  of  coal  being  offered 
lower-than  $4.95,  and  if-you-would-be  so  kind  as-to  furnish  it,  the 
above  information  would-be  greatly  appreciated.  We-do-not  intend 
to-ask  any-more  for  our  coals  than-the  current  prices  for-the  same 
grades  and  kinds,  but  we  certainly  have-not  sold  a  ton  for-some  time 
at  less-than  the  price  at-which  this  is  billed  to-you,  and  we-cannot-see 
how  anyone-else  can-do-so  at-the  present  market  price  of  coal. 
Awaiting-your  pleasure  in-this-matter,  we  remain, 
Very-truly-yours, 

LETTER  No.  10. 

DEAR-SIR  :  We  hope  you-will-not  think  it  presumptuous,  and-that 
it-will-not-be  of  great  trouble  to-you  to-listen  to-our  complaint.  We- 
have  customers  at  Union,  Omaha,  McLendon,  Pittsboro,  and  Jerni- 
gan  who-have  placed  their  cotton  at-the  depots  fully  a  week  ago,  and 
it-has-not-been  moved.  In-fact,  this  condition  of  affairs  exists,  and 
has  existed,  very  nearly  all-the  season,  at-all  stations  along-the  road, 
and  it-is  working  a-great  hardship  on-us  and  our  customers.  We-had 
one  customer  at  McLendon  or  Jernigan  Crossing  who  had  40 bales  of 
cotton  that  stayed  on-the  platform  over  two  weeks  before  it-was 
moved,  during-which  time  cotton  went-down  fully  one-half  ct.  a 
pound.  It-is  a  difficult  matter  for-us  to-handle  business  during  these 
days  of  sharp  competition,  and  unless  we-can  get  shipments  from  our 
customers  promptly,  we  necessarily  lose  the  business.  We-trust  that- 
you-will  remedy  this  evil  and  place  us  under  renewed  obligations. 

Yours-very-truly, 

LETTER  No.  n. 

DEAR-SIR:  The  1st  section  from  Susp.  Bridge  which  arrived 
De Witt  3.20  A.M.  was  made  up  of  28  refrigerators  and  12  box,  of- 
which  four  were  high-class  freight,  necessitating  good-time,  leaving-a 
balance  of  only  eight  dead  cars.  The  2nd  section  from  the  Bridge 
arriving  DeWitt  5.05  A.M.  was  made  up  of  19  refrigerators,  5  high- 


228  MUNSON   PHONOGRAPHY. 

class  and  protected,  and  12  dead.  From  this  you-will  please  note  that 
we-had  an  unusual  run  of  refrigerators  on  these  trains  both  from 
Buffalo  and-the  Bridge.  As  first  stated  we-cannot,  on-account-of 
time,  make  any  change  in-the  first  section  out-of  Buffalo,  but  it-is- 
the  intention  when  we-have  a  second  section  out-of  Buffalo  and  only- 
a  limited  number-of  refrigerators  or  high-class  freight  on-the  Bridge 
section,  to-make  a  transfer  at  East  Rochester  and  have  only-one  train 
from-that  point  covering  both  Lake  Shore  and  Michigan  Central  busi- 
ness, provided  it  does-not  exceed  the  limit  of-the  train,  but-there 
will-be  times,  as  on  Dec.  6th,  when-the  amount  of-the  refrigerator 
business  running  was  so  heavy  that-this  could-not-be  done  and  make 
the  time  expected.  Yours-truly, 


INDEX. 


4!  A  "  (vowel),  final,  unaccented, 

28 

"A,"    "an,"    and    "and,"   in 
phrases,  52,  53 

standing  alone,  42 
Abbreviations,  41 

and  initials,  list  of,  143-150 

dot-ing  for.  48 

Ef  or  Ve'e  hook,  63 

En-hook,  63 

festival  of  the,  161-164 

half-length  stems  in,  93 

initial-hook,  79 

lists  of  single-stem,  44-46 

list  of  two-stem,  47 

*'ly"  added  to,  157 

miscellaneous,  142 

not  vocalized,  41 

out  of  position,  41 

outlines  of  derivatives  of,  151 
key  to,  153 

past-tense  of,  139 

remarks  about.  158 

Shun  and  Ter  hook,  63 

with  circles,  104 

with  implied-hook,  118 

with  loop,  lit 
'  All "  by  1-hook,  79 
"Alogy,"  133 

"  An "     and     "  and,"    standing 
alone,  42 

with  n-hook,  63 
"  An  "  with  n-curl,  124 
"And-a,"  53 
"Another,"  94,  95 
"Another."     "entire,"     "  trie- 
other,"  and  "hereafter," 
95 


"  Are,"  how  written,  56,  So,  94 
"As"  beginning  phrases,  52 
by    breve-s  and    breve-sez, 

III,   112 

"  Ation,"  remark  regarding,  67 
"Away"  with  breve,  54 

B. 

"  Been"  with  n-curl,  124 

n-hook,  63 

"  Ble,"  and  "  Bly,"  131 
"  Bleness,"     "fulness,"    "ive- 

ness,"  and  "  lessness,"  131 
Blunt  joinings,  26 
"  Breve  "  defined,  37 

and  dot-signs,  positions  of, 
51 

and  stem  phrase-signs,  posi- 
tion with,  52 

enlarged     to    add     "  you," 
"your," and  "would,"  55 

phrase-signs,  position  with, 

52 
Breve-es  for  breve-est,  107 

"  ings,"  118 

or  est  followed  by  a  loop,  1 18 
Breve-est  in  phrases,  112 
Breve-hay,  37 

before  initial-hooks,^  73 

joined  before  breve-way,  39 
Breve-sez  in  phrases,  112 
Breve-signs  for  Hay,  Way,  and 
Yay,  37 

number  of.  50 
Breve-ster  in  phrases,  1 12 
Breve-way,  38 

for  syllable  "way,"  39 
Breve-yay,  38 

for  syllable  "  a,"  39 


229 


230 


INDEX. 


Breves,  how  to  write  the,  50 
names  of  the,  50,  51 
struck  backward,  50 

Business    correspondence,    209, 
223 

C. 

Capitals  and  punctuation,  40 
Chay  and  Ree  distinguished,  9, 

27 
Circle  for  "  s"  or  "  z,"  98 

between  stems,  rule  for  vo- 
calizing, 100 
rule  for  writing,  99 
brief  rule  for   joining  (re- 
mark), 99 
small,  name  of,  99 
on  simple  stems,  98 
stenotype  of,  99 
Circles,  abbreviations  with,  104 
Circles  and  loops,  97 

breve-s  joined  after,  118 
joined  together,  118 
two  sizes  of,  97 

Circles  and  stems,  order  of  read- 
ing. 99 

detached,  how  written,  112 
"Cog,"  127 

"Com,"  "  cum,"  or  "  con,"  126 
full  outlines  sometimes  best, 

128 

in  the  middle  of  words,   127 
"Company,"  how  written,  155 
Compound  stems,  names  of,  60 
Concurrent  vowels,  27 
Consonant-outline  written  before 

vowels,  17 

Consonant  -positions,      first, 
second,  and  third,  II,  12 
Consonant-signs,  I 
Consonant-stems,  I 
direction  of,  2,  7 
length  of,  7 
number  of,  2 
origin  of,  I 
Consonants,  how  to  learn  the,  4 

of  the,  7 
"  Contractions,"  41 


"  Cover,"  how  written,  155 
Curl  for  "in,"  "en,"  or  "un," 

122 

in  initial-hooks,  123 
for  "ing"  on    final   hooks 

122 
Curls,  final,  122 

for  the  nasals  En  and  Ing, 
122 

initial,  122 
in  phrases,  124 
Curved  stem  repeated,  25 

D. 

Dash,  41 

"  Deemed" — "  admit,"  202 
Diagrams  of  the  hands,  70,  71 
"  Did  "  alone  and  in  phrases,  94 
Diphthongs,  how  written,  2 

names  of,  14 

number  of,  2,  13 

places  of,  13 

Diphthong-signs  always  point  the 
same  way,  14 

table  of,  14 

"  Dl,"  outlines  ending  in,  160 
"  Dollar,"  how  written,  156 
Dot-ing  after  half-lengths,  87 

for  abbreviations,  48 

properly  a  suffix,  130 
"  Dot-line,"  meaning  of,  n 
Dot-sign  for  Hay,  39 
Dot-signs,  positions  of,  51 
Downward  and   upward  stems, 
29-36 

E. 

Ef  or  Vee  hook,  62 

abbreviations,  63 

in  phrases,  63 

stems,  names  of,  62 
El  and  Er  hooks  on  curved  stems, 
72 

on  straight  stems,  70 
El-hook  in  phrases,  79 

stems,  names  of,  73 
"  En,"  written  with  curls,  122, 
123 


INDEX. 


231 


En-hook,  59,  60 

abbreviations,  63 

for  stem  Ing,  158 

implied,  114 

in  phrases,  63 
Ens-stems,  rule  for,  116 

vocalization  of,  115 
"  Entire,"  95 

Er  and  Ree  not  joined,  use  of,  29 
Er,  Ree,  Ish,  Shee,  El,  and  Lee, 

29 
Er-hook,  70,  72 

implied,  114 

in  phrases,  80 

stems,  names  of,  73 
"  Ever"  in  compounds,  132 

F. 

"  Ficial-ly,"   words    ending   in, 

156 

"Five  or  six,"  179 
"  For,"  "  fore,"  and  "form,"  132 
Fourth-position  to  indicate  "  to  " 

or  "  too,"  55,  87 
caution  as  to  use  of,  55,  87 
"From— to,"  55 
"  Fulness,"  131 

G. 

"  Give,"  when  vocalized,  179 
H. 

''Had "  by  halving,  93 
Half-length  stems  in   abbrevia- 
tions, 93 

names  of,  86 

positions  of,  87 

short  rule  for  positions  of, 

Qi 

Half-lengths,  ing-dot  after,  87 
Halving  principle,  85,  86 
exceptional  use  of,  92 
in  phrases,  93 
"  t "  or  "  d  "  added  by,  86 
"  Has  "  by  breve-s  and  breve-sez, 
III,  112 


"  Have  "  in  phrases,  52,  54 

standing  alone,  42 

with  v-hook,  63,  64 
"He"    and     "him"    standing 
alone,  43 

in  phrases,  54 

"  He"  beginning  phrases,  52 
"  He,"  "  him,"  and  "  how  "  by 

stem  Hay,  43 
Heavy  stems  joined,  26 
"  Hereafter  "  and  remark  about, ' 

95 
"  His  "  by  breve-sand  breve-sez, 

III,    112 

Hook-breve  for  w  on  Lee,  39 
"  Hook-end  "  of  a  stem,  60 
Hooked-stems,  58 

how  to  write,  58 
Hooks,  imperfect,  70 

implied,  114,  115 

initial  and  final,  58 

in  phrase-writing,  63 

on  lengthened  stems   made 
larger,  91 

on  half-length  stems  made 
smaller,  87 

omission  of,  157 

two  sizes  of,  59 

with  breve-s  used  medially, 

101 
"  How  "  beginning  phrases,  52 

standing  alone,  43 


T. 


"  I "  (pronoun),  42,  52,  53 

"  I-have,"  64 

"  I,"  sign  for  diphthong  joined, 

14 
Implied  En   and    Er  hooks  on 

straight  stems,  114 
Implied  -  hook,         abbreviations 

with,  118 
forms,    license    in    use   of, 

117 

"  In,"  with  n-curls,  122,  124 
"  In,"  "  en."  "  un,"  "  il,"  "  im," 

"in,"  words  commencing 

with.  136 


232 


INDEX. 


Inexact    writing,    errors     from, 

202 

"  Ing,"     curl    on    final    hooks, 
122 

followed     by     breve-words, 

181 

"  Ing-a,"  how  written,  53 
Ing-curl,  122 
Ing-dot,  48,  130 

after  half-lengths,  87 
"  Ing-the,"  how  written,  53 
"  Ingly,"  how  written,  158 
"  Ings,"  breve-s  for,  118 
"  Ington,"  how  written,  158 
Initial  curls,  122 
Initial-hook  abbreviations,  79 

stems,  vowels,  and,  69 
Initial-hooks,  69 

order  of  writing  and  reading, 

69 

Initials,  list  of  abbreviations  and, 
143-150 

of  proper  names,  155 
Interrogation,  sign  of,  41 
"  Is  "  beginning  phrases,  52 

by    breve-s    and   breve-sez, 

III,    112 

Ish  and  Shee,  18,  33 

Ishun-hook,  123 

"  It"  by  breve-est,  112 

halving,  93 
Italics,   words   in,   written   with 

abbreviations,  49 
"  Iveness,"  131 

J- 

Joining  diphthong-signs  to  stems, 

14,  31 
breve-hay    to   initial-hooks, 

73 
consonant-stems,  17 

K. 

K  and  P  sometimes  omitted,  161 
Key  to  reading  exercises,  22  r 
"  Knew,"  how  written,  43 


Large  circle,  103 

for  "  ss,"  "  sz,"  103 

in  phrases,  112 

name  of,  103 

names  of  stems  with,  103 

stenotype  of,  103 

vowel-signs  within,  103 
Large  loop,  no 

in  phrases,  112 

name  of,  no 

names  of  stems  with,  HO 

size  of,  i  to 

stenotype  of,  no 

where  used,  1 10 
Lee  after  Wet,    Met,   Het,  and 

Leet,  87 

Lee  and  Kl,  2,  18,  33 
Lengthened  stems,  names  of,  89 

positions  of,  90 

short  rule  for  positions  of, 

91 
Lengthened  straight  stems  with 

final  hooks  (remark),  90 
Lengthening  principle,  85,  89 

in  phrases,  94 
"  Lessness."  131 
Light  and  heavy  stems  joined,  26 
Long-vowels,  10 

names  of  the,  .1 1 
Long  vowel-signs,  table  of,  1 1 
Loop,  abbreviations  with,  ill 

for  "  st "  or  "  zd,"  107 

for  "  sir,"  1 10 
Loops,  independent,  no 

detached,  how  written,  112 

M. 

M-P  or  M-B,  initial  L  before, 
161 

"  Magna,"  "  magne,"  and 
"  magni,"  132 

Materials  used  in  writing  phonog- 
raphy, 6 

"  Mental-ly,"  '•  mentality."  132 

"Modifications"  in  abbrevia- 
tions and  phrases,  93 


INDEX. 


233 


"  Modified"  defined,  85 
Modified  stems,  85 

order  of  reading,  85 

N. 

N-sounds,  two  consecutive,  158 
"New,"  "knew,"  and  "now," 

43 

4  NS-g."  stem  Ing  for,  158 
"  Nguish  "  and  "  nquish,"  156 
"  Not "  and  "  another,"  94 
"  Now,"  how  written,  43 
Ntial-ly,"  words  ending  in,  156 

O. 

"Of,"  42,  52,  53 

sometimes  omitted,  179 

why  placed  on  the  line,  42 

with  v-hook,  63,  64 
"Of-a,"  53,  54 
"Of-the,"  53,  54,93,  i?9 
"  Of-their  "  and  "  of-other,"  (re- 
mark), 94 

"  Old,"  "  older,"  etc.,  95 
"Ology,"  133 
One  sign  for  two  words,  43 
"  One  "  with  Way-hook  and  En- 
hook,  179 

"Or, "by  Er-hook,  80 
''  Other,"  position  of,  80 

by  lengthening,  94 

Ther-hook,  68 
"  Our"  by  Er-hook,  80 
Outlines  specially  distinguished, 
list  of,  182-201 

good  way    to  study  list,  202 

outlines  for  first  study,  201 

remarks  about,  201 
Out   of   position,    abbreviations, 

4i 

other  outlines,  42 
"  Over,"  position  of,  80 
"  Own,"  with  n-curl,  124 

n-hook,  63 
written  out  of  position,  41, 

42 
"  Owner,"  position  of,  80 


P. 

Past-tense  outlines,  rules  for  for- 
mation of,  137 
Pen,  how  to  hold  the,  6 
"  People  "  as  a  verb,  156 
Perpendiculars  written  upward 

161 
Phonographic   spelling,  practice 

in,  21,  22 

"  Phonography  "  defined,  i 
Phraseography,  51 
Phrases,  list  of,  165-178 

remarks  about,  179 
Phrase-writing,  rule  of  position 

in,  52 

"  Phrenology,"  subject,  135 
Plural-vowel  signs,  82-84 
Plural     and     possessive     nouns, 

forms  of,  140 
Position  of  words  of  more  than 

one  vowel,  23 

one  stem  and  one  vowel,  13 
two  or  more  stems  and  one 

vowel,  20,  21 
words  written  out  of,  155 
Positions  of  half-length  stems,  87 

lengthened  stems,  90 
"  Prefix,"  definition  of,  126 
Prefixes  and  suffixes,  126 
Proper  names,  40 

initials  of,  155 
Proximity,  straight  breves  and, 

129 
Punctuation,  40,  41 

R. 

R,  signs  for  initial,  159 
R,  SH,  and  L  stems  joined  at 
the  beginning  of  outlines, 
32 

at  the  end  of  outlines,  30 
in  the  middle  of  outlines,  34. 

35 
Reading  phonography,  rules  for, 

5 

stems,  what  it  consists  in,  18 
Ree  not  joined,  use  of,  29 


234 


INDEX. 


S. 

Second-place  long  vowels.  5 

1 '  Self  "  at  the  beginning  of  words, 

133 

at  the  end  of  words,  133 
"  Selves,"  final,  133 
Semi-circle  breve  words,  43 
"  Ship,"  133 
Short-vowels,  15 
"  Short  words  are  best,"  203,  221 
Shun  and  Ter  hook  abbreviations, 

68 
Shun-hook,  66 

stems,  names  of,  66 
"  Shus,"  how  written,  202 
"  Simple-end  "  of  a  stem,  60 
Small  circle  for  small  loop,  107 

on  simple  stems,  98 
Small  loop,  107 
in  phrases,  112 
name  of,  107 
names  of  stems  with,  107 
size  of,  107 
where  used,  107 
"  Snow  " — "  snowy,"  202 
"  Soever,"  in  compounds,  132 
"  Some  "  —  "  same,"  202 
Sounds  in  the  English  language, 

number  of,  I 
Special  vocalization,  74 
when  employed,  76-78 
with  lengthened  stems,  91 
Sper-stems,  order  of  reading,  115 
rule  for,  116 
vocalization  of,  115 
"  Stair  "  by  breve-ster,  112 
"  Stated,"  how  written,  in 
"  Stems,"  i 
Stem-joinings,  about  certain,  25 

without  angles,  25 
Stem-signs  instead  of  breves,  38 
Stenotypy,  73 

"S-t-n"  commencing  words,  107 
"  Stock"  in  phrases,  179 
"  Store"  by  breve-ster,  112 
Straight   breves   and   proximity, 

129 
stem  repeated.  25 


"  Sub-reception,"  181 

"  Suffix,"  definition  of,  126 

"  Sun " — "sunny,"  202 

T. 

Ter  or  Ther  hook,  67 
in  phrases,  68 
name  of,  67 

none  on  curved  stems,  67 
Ter-hook  stems,  names  of,  67 
"  Than,"  with  n-curl,  124 

n-hook,  63 

"  That  "  alone  and  in  phrases,  95 
"  The,"  standing  alone,  42 
breve  for,  53 
by  breve-est,  112 

halving,  93 
"  The-other,"  95 
"  Their,"  position  of,  80 
by  breve-ster,  112 
lengthening,  94 
Ther-hook,  68 

"  There"  by  lengthening,  94 
breve-ster,  112 
Ther-hook,  68 
"There,"  "their,"  "other,"  and 

"  at-all,"  80 
"  They-are  "  by  breve-ster,  112 

lengthening,  94 
"Three  I's,"  181 
Three-vowel  signs,  84 
Tick  across  shaded  stems,  155 
"  Tl "  and  "  dl,"  outlines  ending 

in,  160 
"  To  "  by  breve-est,  112 

halving,  93 

"  To"  or  "  too"  by  fourth-posi- 
tion, 55 
Two-vowel  signs,  83 

U. 

"  U  "  sound,  how  written,  39 
"  Uation,"  how  written,  157 
"  Un,"  written  with  curl,  122 
Unvocalized  phonography,  142 
"  Us"  by  breve-s,  in,  112 


INDEX. 


235 


V. 

Vee-hook  on  curved  steins,  64 
Verb  forms,  certain,  141 
"Very,"  80 
Vowel   at   the    beginning    of    a 

word,  20 

end  of  a  word,  20 
between  stems,  19,  20,  100 
read  before  final-hooks,  59 
between    joined    diphthong 

and  stem,  24 
Vowel-places,  3,  16 
Vowel-sign  after  half-length, 

how  read,  86 
Vowel-signs,  complete  table  of, 

16 

number  of,  2 
of  the,  7 

order  of  reading,  89 
Vowels,  how  written,  2 
long  and  short,  4 
sounded  across,  17 
Vowel-sounds  and    their  places, 
16 

W. 

"  W"   and  "wh,"   how  distin- 
guished, 159 

"W"  at  the  beginning  of  out- 
lines, 159 

W  on  Lee,  hook-breve  for,  39 
"Was"  with  way-hook  and  cir- 
cle, iSi 

"  Way  "  with  breve,  54 
Way-hook  on  straight  stems,  78 
'  We  "  alone  and  in  phrases,  54 
in  phrases,  52,  180 
with  way-hook,  181 
with  hook-breve,  54 
"  We-will,"  179 
"  Well "  in  phrases,  113 
Well,  Weel,  and  Way-Lee,  how 

used,  159 

"Were,"  how  written,  56 
"  What-else,"  179 
"What"  in  phrases,  52,  180 
"What,"  "  when,"  or  "we  "by 
hook-breve.  179 


"What- will,"  1 79 

"  When  "  in  phrases,  52,  179 

"  When-will,"  179 

"  Where  was  your,"  how  writ- 

ten,  181 
"While,"   "whale,"    "wheel," 

80 
"Who"    and   "whom,"  how 

written,  42 

"  Who  "  beginning  phrases,  52 
"  Who-have,"  64 
"  Wild,"  how  written,  160 
"  Will,"  how  written,  79,  156 
"With,"  133 

in  phrases,  52,  180 
"With'     and     "without"     in 

special  phrases,  181 
"Without"  in  phrases,  52,  181 
"W-l,"  how  written,  159 
"  Wood,"  how  written,  160 
Word-position,  n 

rule  for,  24 

Word-positions,  number  of,  n 
suggested  by  vowel-places, 

12 

"  Word-signs,"  41 
Words  and  phrases  specially  dis- 
tinguished, list  of,  182-201 
Words  of  more  than  one  stem,  17 
one  stem  and  one  vowel,  13 
one  stem  in  position,  it 
with  one  consonant  and  one 

vowel,  8 

written  out  of  position,  155 
"  Worthy,"  133 
"Would"   added   by  enlarging 

breve,  55 

in  phrases,  52,  180 
Writing  by  sound,  4 

order  of,  7 
Writing  phonography,  directions 

about,  6 
rules  for,  7 

Y. 

Yay-hook  on  straight  stems,  78 
"  You  "  and  ' '  your  "  in  phrases, 
52,  54 


236 


INDEX. 


1  You,"  "  your,"  and  "would" 
added  by  enlarging  breve, 
55 
You-r"  with  yay-hook,  181 


Z. 

"Z,"  circle  for,  98 

stem  Zee  used  for,  at  begin- 
ning  of  words,  98 


3 


POINTS    OF 
SUPERIORITY 


OF 

MUNSON 
PHONOGRAPHY 


1 ^MPLICITY.     It  is  the  simplest  system  that  is 

*-**  published  and  is  therefore  the  easiest  to  learn. 
The  author  was  one  of  the  Official  Stenographers  of  the 
New  York  Supreme  Court.  He  writes  on  a  practical 
basis  and  practises  what  he  preaches.  The  Munson 
System  is  quite  generally  used  by  official  stenographers 
in  the  courts  of  this  country. 

2_f\  REAT  SPEED.  The  system,  once  thoroughly 
^-^  learned  and  mastered,  completely  satisfies  the 
wants  of  the  most  ambitious  stenographer.  It  is  capa- 
ble of  being  written  at  the  highest  Speed  required  in 
reporting  verbatim  the  swiftest  speakers,  and  equally 
fitted  for  taking  dictation  in  business  correspondence. 

31     EQIBILITY.     To    all    the    other    admirable 
~~L*     characteristics    of    the    system    should    be 
added    its    extreme    general    legibility.     There    is    no 
system  so  well  calculated  for  one  writer's  being  able  to 
read  another's  notes. 


NewYork-Q.    P.     PUTNAM'S    SONS-London 


Munson  Shorthand 

By  JAMES  E.  MUNSON 

Late  Official  Stenographer,  New  York  Supreme  Court 

I.  The  Art  of  Phonography 

A  Complete  Instructor  in  the  Best  Method  of  Short- 
hand for  All  Kinds  of  Verbatim  Work,  with  the  Author's 
Latest  Improvements.  New  Revised  Edition.  Cr.  8vo. 
477  pages net  §2.00 

"  Writers  of  any  sort  of  phonographic  shorthand  will  be  greatly  interested 
jn  this  massive  new  text-book.  It  is  the  most  complete  book  of  shorthand 
instruction  that  has  ever  been  published.  The  old  Munson  text-book  was 
exceedingly  minute  and  careful  in  its  rules,  but  the  present  volume  is  twice 
as  large,  and  goes  into  details  with  far  greater  thoroughness." — Springfield 
Republican. 

41  It  is  an  entirely  new  book{  and  it  is  only  fair  to  say  that  there  is  not  to- 
day in  all  the  world  another  single  text-book  on  the  subject  of  phonography 
that  so  fully  and  thoroughly,  in  all  its  details,  covers  the  field  of  shorthand 
instruction.  Mr.  Munson  excels  as  a  teacher.  With  unerring  skill  he  guides 
the  learner  who  finds,  as  the  lessons  one  after  another  unfold  the  several  parts 
of  the  perfect  system,  that  he  has  not  been  taught  anything  that  he  must 
unlearn,  and  that  he  has  not  to  seek  elsewhere  for  further  instruction."— 
Toronto  Globe. 

II.  A  Shorter  Course  in  Munson  Phonography 

Adapted  for  the  Use  of  Schools  and  for  Self-Instruction.  Cr. 
8vo.  Second  Edition  with  Important  Revisions,  net,  $r.25 

"To  those  who  are  looking  for  the  best  system  of  instruction  in  this  most 
important  art,  the  work  is  cordially  recommended.  It  has  stood  the  test  of 
thirty  years.  It  is  practical.  The  book  is  a  complete  guide,  compendium, 
and  reference  work.  —Hartford  Post. 

III.  Munson's  First  Phonographic  Reader 

Business  Correspondence  written  in  Phonographic  Char- 
acters. Prepared  for  Use  in  Connection  with  "  The  Art 
of  Phonography,"  and  "A  Shorter  Course  in  Munson 
Phonography."  Cr.  8vo.  .  .  .  net  50  cts. 

IV.  Munson's  Phonographic  Dictation  Book 

Business  Correspondence 

Longhand  Key  to  Munson's  First  Phonographic  Reader. 
Cr.  8vo net  50  cts. 

Long  experience  has  proven  the  justice  of  the  claim  that  the 
Munson  System  has  three  points  of  superiority  :  one,  simplicity  ; 
two,  great  speed  ;  three,  legibility. 


Q.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS,  New  York  and  London 


WORKS  BY  W.  H.  P.  PHYFE 


How  Should  I  Pronounce  ?  Or  the  Art  of  Correct  Pro- 

nunciation.  16° $1.25 

Popular  edition.  16°  ....  net  75  cts. 
"  I  appreciate  its  value,  and  indorse  your  work  as  a  most  serviceable 

aid  to  all  who  wish  to  speak  our  language  correctly." — EDWIN  BOOTH. 

The  School  Pronouncer.     Based  on  Webster's  Unabridged 
Dictionary.     16°,  pp.  366        .         .        .          net    $1.25 
"  A  scholarly  and  scientific  presentation  of  a  most  difficult  subject." — 
Prof.  T.  W.  HUNT,  College  of  New  Jersey. 

12,000  Words  Often  Mispronounced. 

A  guide  to  correct  pronunciation.  Revised  and  enlarged 
edition  of  "10,000  Words"  16".  (86th  thousand). 

net     $1.25 

The  Test-Pronouncer.  A  companion  volume  to  "  12,000 
Words  Often  Mispronounced,"  containing  the  identical 
list  of  words  found  in  the  larger  work,  arranged  in  groups 
of  ten,  without  diacritical  marks,  for  convenience  in  reci- 
tations. 1 6°  .  .  .  .  .  .  net  50  cts. 

5000  Words  Often  Misspelled.  A  carefully  selected  list 
of  words  difficult  to  spell,  together  with  directions  for 
spelling,  and  for  the  division  of  words  into  syllables  ; 
with  an  appendix  containing  the  rules  and  list  of  amended 
spellings  recommended  by  the  Philological  Society  of 
London  and  the  American  Philological  Association. 
16° net  75  cts. 

5000  Facts  and  Fancies.  A  cyclopaedia  of  important, 
curious,  quaint,  and  unique  information  in  History, 
Science,  Art,  and  Nature.  8°.  (By  mail,  $3.40)  net  $3.00 

Napoleon  :  The  Return  from  Saint  Helena. 

An  account  of  the  Removal  of  the  Emperor's  Remains 
from  Saint  Helena  to  France  in  1840,  together  with  a 
Description  of  his  Tomb  in  the  Hotel  des  Invalides 
in  Paris.  With  eight  full-page  illustrations.  Crown 
g°<  Net,  $1.00 

G.  P.  PUTNAM'S  SONS  NEW  YORK  AND  LONDON. 


1  The  book  is  very  terse,  comprehensive,  and  accurate." 
The  Congregationalist,  Boston. 


P 


Modern 
unctuation 


A    Book   for   Stenographers,    Type- 
writer Operators,  and  Business  Men 

With  Hints  to  Letter-Writers;  One  Hundred  Suggestions 
to  Typewriter  Operators,  a  List  of  Common  Abbrevi- 
ations with  Definitions,  and  a  Vocabulary  of  Busi- 
ness   and   Technical   Terms,    with   Spaces   for 
Writing    in    the    Shorthand    Equivalents 

By 

William  Bradford  Dickson 

I6mo.     75  cents 

A  special  feature  of  the  work  is  the  list  of  business  and 
technical  terms  given  at  the  end  of  the  volume.  To  the 
left  of  each  word  space  has  been  given,  in  order  to 
enable  the  stenographer  to  write  in  his  own  shorthand 
outline  for  the  word.  The  bock  can  thus  be  made  a 
shorthand  dictionary  of  difficult  words  as  well  as  a 
trustworthy  speller. 

"  The  question  of  punctuation  is  one  upon  which  stenographers 
in  general  need  very  much  education,  and  this  little  book  states 
each  point  with  such  care  that  by  its  aid  any  one  will  gain  a  very 
thorough  knowledge  of  it." 

The  Rational  Stenographer,  Chicago. 


New  York        G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons  London 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  bei^pv. 

IANZ519C3 


RY  LOANS 


of  Receipt 


OH^  Week&EnOT  Date  rf  Rtceif* 

L9-25m-9,'47  ( A5618  )444 


UNIVERSITY  ol  C 

AT 
LOS  ANGELES 

T  TRT?ARY 


snmmm 

A     000573569     1 


